Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 1.
What is a carbonyl group?
Answer:
Carbonyl group : A functional group in which a carbon atom is attached to an oxygen atom by a double bond and remaining two valencies of carbon atom are free is called a carbonyl group and represented as Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 7. Carbonyl group is present in aldehydes and ketones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 2.
What are carbonyl compounds?
Answer:
The organic compounds containing a carbonyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 7 are called carbonyl compounds. For example, acetaldehyde, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 8, acetone, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 9. As carbonyl group is common in aldehydes and ketones, their methods of preparation and properties show similarities.

Question 3.
What are carboxylic compounds?
Answer:
The compounds in which the functional group is – COOH are known as carboxylic compounds. Due to the – OH group bonded to Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 10 group, carboxylic acids are distinct from aldehydes and ketones.

Question 4.
How are carbonyl compounds classified ?
OR
Name the compounds containing carbonyl group.
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds contain a group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 11. They are classified as follows :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 12

Question 5.
What are aliphatic aldehydes?
Answer:
The compounds in which the – CHO group (formyl group or aldehyde group) is attached directly to sp3 hybridized carbon atom that is saturated carbon atom are called aliphatic aldehydes. (Exception : Formaldehyde, H – CHO is also classified as aliphatic aldehyde though – CHO group is not attached to any carbon).

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 13

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 6.
What are aromatic aldehydes ?
Answer:
The compounds in which – CHO group is attached directly to an aromatic ring are called aromatic aldehydes.

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 14

Question 7.
Explain the structure of carbonyl functional group.
Answer:

  • In the carbonyl functional group, carbon atom is attached to an oxygen atom by a double bond and remaining two valencies of carbon atom are free, and it is represented as Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 15.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 16
  • The carbonyl carbon atom is sp2-hybridised forming coplanar three sigma (σ) bonds with the bond angle 120°.
  • One sigma bond is formed with oxygen atom while other two sigma (σ) bonds are formed with hydrogen or carbon atoms.
  • The remaining unhybridised 2pz orbital of carbon atom overlaps with p orbital of oxygen atom colaterally forming a pi (π) bond. Hence, carbon atom is joined to oxygen atom by a double bond of which one is sigma and another is n.
  • The oxygen atom in the carbonyl group has two lone pairs of electrons.
  • The carbonyl bond is strong, short and polarized.
  • The polarity of the carbonyl group is explained on the basis of resonance involving neutral and dipolar structures as shown below :
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 17

Question 8.
What are aliphatic ketones? How are they classified?
Answer:
Aliphatic ketones : The compounds in which Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 15 group is attached to two alkyl groups are called aliphatic ketones.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 20
Ketones are classified into two types :

  1. Simple or symmetrical ketones and
  2. mixed or unsymmetrical ketones.

1. Simple or symmetrical ketone : The ketone in which the carbonyl carbon is attached to two identical alkyl groups is called a simple or symmetrical ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 21
2. Mixed or unsymmetrical ketone : The ketone in which the carbonyl carbon is attached to two different alkyl groups is called a mixed or unsymmetrical ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 22

Question 9.
What are aliphatic carboxylic acids? Give their general formula.
Answer:
The organic compounds in which carboxyl (- COOH) group is bonded to an alkyl group are called aliphatic carboxylic acids or fatty acids. (Exception : Formic acid, H-COOH is also classified as aliphatic carboxylic acid though-COOH group is not attached to any carbon).

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 330

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 10.
How are carboxylic acids classified ? Give examples. (3 marks)
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are classified according to the presence of number of carboxyl groups into mono-, di-, tri- and polycarboxylic acids.

  • Monocarboxylic acids : These carboxylic acids contain one carboxyl group.
    Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 331
  • Dicarboxylic acids : These contain two carboxyl groups
    Example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 332
  • Tricarboxylic acid : These contain three carboxyl groups
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 333

Question 11.
What are aromatic carboxylic acids ? Give examples.
Answer:
Aromatic carboxylic acids : These are the compounds in which one or more carboxyl groups (- COOH) are attached directly to the aromatic ring.

For example :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 334

Question 12.
Give examples of common carboxylic acids which are used in daily life.
Answer:
Common carboxylic acids are widely distributed in nature, they are found in both the plants and animals.

  • Acetic acid is main constituent of vinegar.
  • Butyric acid of butter which is responsible for odour of rancid butter.
  • L-lactic acid is present in curd.
  • Citric acid is found in citrus fruits.
  • Higher carboxylic acids such as palmitic acid, stearic acid and oleic acid are the components of animal fats and vegetable oils.

Nomenclature of Aldehydes :

(A) Common System :

  • The names of aldehydes are derived from the common names of acids.
  • The suffix ‘-ic acid’ of an acid is replaced by ‘aldehyde’.
  • The positions of the substituents in the molecule are indicated by Greek letters α, β, γ, etc.
  • starting from the carbon atom attached to the carbonyl group. E.g.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 26

(B) I UP AC System :

  • The longest carbon atoms chain containing aldehyde carbon atom is selected as a parent hydrocarbon.
  • ‘e’ of the alkane is replaced by ‘al’. Alkane → Alkanal
  • The position (locant) of aldehyde group need not be mentioned since it is always at the end position.
  • The substituents in the alkyl group are prefixed in an alphabetical order by appropriate locants.
  • When two – CHO groups are present at the two ends of the chain the ending ‘e’ of alkane is retained and the suffix  ‘-dial’ is added to the name of parent aldehyde.
  • In IUPAC nomenclature an alicyclic compound -in which – CHO group is attached directly to the ring is named as a carbaldeliyde. The suffix ‘carbaldehyde’ is added after the full name of parent cycloalkane structure.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

(C) Common or trivial names :

(1) The common name of a carboxylic acid is derived from the source from which it was first isolated.
The following table gives common names and the source or origin of name.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 27

(2) In branched carboxylic acids, the position of substituents are indicated by Greek alphabet.

For example : Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 28

(D) IUPAC system of nomenclature :

  • The longest continuous cha in of carbon atoms including the carbon atom of – COOH group ¡s selected.
  • The carboxvlic acid is conside red (IS a derivative of the corresponding parent a/kane.
  • The carbon atom of the – COOH group is always at terminal position, hence need not to be indicated while writing IUPAC name.
  • The position of the other substitutents are indicated by the appropriate locants in alphabetical order.
  • In case of dicarboxylic acids, ‘dioic acid’ is added to parent alkane.
  • In an alicyclic compound having a carboxyl group directly attached to alicyclic ring is named as cycloalkane carboxylic acid.

Trivial and IUPAC names of carboxylic acids and aldhydes
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 29
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 30

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 13.
Give the common names and IUPAC names of the Miowing aldehydes :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 31
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 32

Question 14.
Write the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 33

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 15.
What is the IUPAC name of the following compound?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 34
Answer:
IUPAC name : 2-Amino butanoic acid

Question 16.
Write IUPAC name of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 335
Answer:
IUPAC name : Ethanedioic acid

Question 17.
Write the structure and give IUPAC names of following carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 35
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 36

Question 18.
Draw the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 37

Question 19.
Give IUPAC names of the following carboxylic acids.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 38

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 20.
Write the structures and IUPAC names of all isomers of carboxylic acids having molecular formula C5H10O2. HOW many of them are chiral?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 39

Nomenclature of ketones :

(A) Common System :

  • Ketones are named according to the alkyl groups attached to the carbonyl carbon atom followed by the word ketone.
  • The substituents in the alkyl groups are indicated by Greek letters a, f, y, etc. starting from the carbon atom attached to the carbonyl group.

(B) IUPAC System :

  • The longest continuous chain containing carbonyl carbon atom is selected as a parent hydrocarbon.
  • ‘e’ of the alkane is replaced by ‘one’. Alkane → Alkanone
  • The position of carbonyl group is represented by the lowest locant.
  • The substituents in the alkyl groups are prefixed in the alphabetical order along with their positions by appropriate locants.
  • When two C = O groups are present, then ending ‘e ’ of alkane is retained and the suffix – ‘dione ’ is added to the name of parent ketone indicating the locants of ketonic carbonyl groups.
  • In case of polyfunctional ketones, higher priority group is given lower number.
  • When ketonic carbonyl is a lower priority group it is named as ‘oxo’, preceded by the locant. In alicyclic ketones, carbonyl carbon is numbered as 1.

Question 21.
Give the common and IUPAC names of the following ketones :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 40
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 41

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 22.
Give the structures of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 42
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 43

Question 23.
Give IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 44

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 24.
Write the structures and give common names and IUPAC names of the carbonyl compounds represented by formula C5H10O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 45

Question 25.
Write the structure and give IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 46
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 47

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 26.
Write the structure of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 48

Question 27.
How is an aldehyde obtained from an alcohol ?
Answer:
When a primary alcohol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dil. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, an aldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 51
For example, when ethanol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dil. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, acetaldehyde (ethanal) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 52

Question 28.
How is ketone obtained from an alcohol?
Answer:
When a secondary alcohol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dii. H2SO4 under controlled conditions, a ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 53
For example. when 2-propanol is oxidized with potassium dichromate and dii, H2SO4 under controlled conditions, accIone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 54

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 29.
How are the following compounds obtained from alcohol:
(1) Methanal
(2) Propanal
(3) BuLanal
(4) 3-Methylpentanal?
Answer:

  1. Mehanol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms methanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 55
  2. Propan-1-ol on controlled oxidation with K,Cr20 and dilute H2SO4 forms propanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 56
  3. Butan..l-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms butanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 57
  4. 3-Mcthylpcntan.1-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 gives 3-Methylpentanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 58

Question 30.
How are the following compounds prepared from alcohol :
(1) Butanone
(2) Pentan-3-one
(3) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal?
Answer:

  1. Butan-2-ol on controlled oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms butanone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 59
  2. Pentan-3-ol on oxidation with K2Cr2O7 and dilute H2SO4 forms Pentan-3-one.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 60
  3. 2,2-Dimethylpropan- I -ol on oxidation with K2Cr2O7 or KMnO4 and dilute H2SO4 forms 2,2-Dimethyipropanal.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 61

Question 31.
How is an aldehyde obtained from primary alcohol ?
Answer:
When vapours of primary alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K, dehydrogenation takes place, an aldehyde is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 62
For example : When vapours of isopropyl alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K, acetone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 63

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 32.
How is ketone obtained from secondary alcohol?
Answer:
When vapours of secondary alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K. dehydrogenation takes place, a ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 64
For example : When vapours of isopropyl alcohol is passed over heated copper at 573 K. acetone (propanone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 65

Question 33.
How are the following compounds obtained from alkene :
(1) Formaldehyde
(2) Acetaldehyde and
(3) Acetone ?
Answer:
When a stream of ozonised oxygen is passed through a solution of an alkene, in organic solvent, an unstable addition cyclocompound, ozonide is formed which on reduction with zinc dust and water forms an aldehyde or a ketone or a mixture of both.

  1. Formaldehyde : Under these conditions ethylene gives formaldehyde.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 66
  2. AcetuIdeh&: Symmetrically disubstituted alkene like but-2-ene gives acetaldehyde.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 67
  3. scctnne: Tetrasubshtwed alkene like 2,3-dimethyl but-2-ene gives acetone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 68

Question 34.
Write ozonolysis reaction for
(1) Propylene and
(2) Isobutylene.
Answer:
(1) Propylene on reaction with ozonised oxygen in the organic solvent forms propylene ozonide which on reduction with zinc dust and water forms acetaldehyde and formaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 69
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 70

Question 35.
How are the following compounds obtained from alkynes :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone?
Answer:

  1. Acetaldehyde : On passing acetylene through warm 40% H2SO4 in the presence of 1 % HgSO4, vinyl alcohol is obtained which tautomerises and forms acetaldehyde. It is a hydration reaction.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 71
  2. Acetone : On passing propyne through warm 40 % H2SO4 in the presence of 1 % HgSO4, alkenol is obtained which on tautomerisation form acetone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 72

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 36.
Predict the products when
(1) dimethyl acetylene
(2) ethyl acetylene and
(3) diethyl acetylene are treated with mercuric sulphate in dilute sulphuric acid.
Answer:
(1) Dimethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms ethyl methyl ketone by tautomerisation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 73

(2) Ethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms Butan-2-one by tautomerisation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 74

(3) Diethyl acetylene with 40% H2SO4 in the presence of mercuric sulphate (HgSO4) forms hexan-3-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 75
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 76

Question 37.
Write the structures of aldehydes and ketones obtained by ozonolysis.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 77
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 78

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 79
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 80

Question 38.
Predict the structures of ketones produced by hydration of but-l-yne and but-2-yne.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 81

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 39.
How is acetaldehyde prepared from acetyl chloride?
Answer:
Acetyl chloride is reduced to acetaldehyde by hydrogen in presence of Pd catalyst poisoned with BaSO4. This reaction is called Rosenmund reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 82

Question 40.
How is benzaldehyde obtained from benzoyl chloride?
OR
Write chemical equation for Rosenmund reduction.
Answer:
When benzoyl chloride is hydrogenated in the presence palladium on barium sulphate (Pd/BaSO4), benzaldehyde is obtained. This reaction is called Rosenmund reduction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 83

Question 41.
How will you prepare acetophenone from benzene? (Friedel – Crafts acylation).
Answer:
When benzene is treated with acetyl chloride in the prcscncc of anhydrous aluminium chloride, acetophenonc is obtained. This reaction is known as Friedel – Crafts acylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 86

Question 42.
How will you convert benzene into 1-phenylethanone?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 87

Question 43.
How will you obtain 4-Nitrobenzaldehyde from 4-Nitrotoluene ? (Friedel- Crafts reaction).
Answer:
When 4-nitrotoluene is treated with chromium oxide in acetic anhydride, a diacetate derivative is obtained which on acid hydrolysis produces 4-nitrobenzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 88

Question 44.
How will you prepare Propanone (acetone) from Grignard reagent?
Answer:
Grignard reagent (methyl magnesium iodide) reacts with cadmium chloride to give dimethyl cadmium. When acetyl chloride reacts with dimethyl cadmium, propanone (acetone) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 89

Question 45.
How is acetophenone obtained from Grignard reagent ?
Answer:
Grignard reagent (methyl magnesium iodide) reacts with cadmium chloride to give dimethyl cadmium. When benzoyl chloride reacts with dimethyl cadmium, acetophenone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 90

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 46.
How is benzyl methyl ketone obtained from Grignard reagent ?
OR
Convert: Acetyl chloride to benzyl methyl ketone.
Answer:
Grignard reagent (Benzyl magnesium chloride) reacts with cadmium chloride to give diphenyl cadmium. When acetyl chloride reacts with dibenzyl cadmium, benzyl methyl ketone is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 91

Question 47.
How is an aldehyde obtained from alkyl nitrile ?
OR
What is Stephen reaction ?
OR
Write a note on Stephen reaction.
Answer:
(1) An ethereal solution of a nitrile is reduced to imine hydrochloride by SnCl2 in the presence of HCl gas. Further, imine hydrochloride on acid hydrolysis gives aldehyde. This reaction is called Stephen reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 92
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 93
(2) Alternatively, nitriles are selectively reduced by diisobi.ityl aluminium hydride (DIBAI-H) lo imines which on acid hydrolysis to aldehydes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 94

Question 48.
How are following compounds prepared using Gngnard reagent
(1) Acetone
(2) Benzophenone?
Answer:
(1) Acetone: Acetoniti-ile (ethanenitrile) reacts with methyl magnesium iodide in presence of dry ether to give imine complex which on hydrolysis gives acctonc. During reaction acetonitrile and methyl magnesium iodide should be
taken in equimolecular proportion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 95
(2) Benzophenone: Benzonitrile reacts with phenyl magnesium bromide in presence of dry ether to give an imine complex which on acid hydrolysis gives a benzophenone. During reaction bcnzonitrile and phenyl magnesium bromide should be aken in equimolecular proportion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 96

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 49.
Write the structures and IUPAC names of ketones produced by Friedel-Crafts acylation of benzene with
(i) C2H5COCl
(ii) C6H5COCl.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 97

Question 50.
Predict the products of the following conversions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 98

Question 51.
How are the following preparations carried out ?

(1) Benzaldehyde from toluene. (Etard oxidation)
Answer:
When toluene is treated with solution of chromyl chloride (CrO2Cl2) in Cs2, brown chromium complex is obtained, which on acid hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde. This reaction is called Etard reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 99

(2) Benzaldehyde from methyl arene.
Answer:
Methylarene is converted into a benzyllidene diacetate on treatment with chromium oxide in acetic anhydride at 273-278 K. The diacetate derivative on acid hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 100

(3) Benzaldehyde from toluene (commerical method).
Answer:
Side chain chlorination of toluene gives benzal chloride which on hydrolysis gives benzaldehyde.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 101

(4) Benzaldehyde from benzene (Gattermann-Koch synthesis).
OR
Write chemical equation for Gatter- mann-Koch formylation.
Answer:
When benzene is treated with vapours of carbon monoxide and hydrogen chloride in the presence of a catalyst mixture of A1Cl3 and CuCl under high pressure, benzaldehyde is obtained. This reaction is called Gattermann- Koch synthesis.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 102
Preparation of aromatic ketones from hydrocarbons

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 52.
Explain Friedel-Craft’s acylation reaction.
Answer:
The reaction in which hydrogen atom of benzene is replaced by an acyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 103 I in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 is called Friedel-Craft’s acylation. When benzene is heated with an acetyl chloride or acetic anhydride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3, forms acetophenone (1-Phenyl ethanone).

Electrophile : R – C + = O acylium ion Formation of the electrophile :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 105

Question 53.
Give the preparation of acetophenone from benzene using
(i) acetyl chloride
(ii) acetic anhydride.
Answer:

The reaction in which hydrogen atom of benzene is replaced by an acyl group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 103 I in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3 is called Friedel-Craft’s acylation. When benzene is heated with an acetyl chloride or acetic anhydride in the presence of anhydrous AlCl3, forms acetophenone (1-Phenyl ethanone).

Electrophile : R – C + = O acylium ion Formation of the electrophile :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 104
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 105

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 54.
How will you prepare propionaldehyde from ethyl propionate?
Answer:
When ethyl propionate is reduced in presence of diisobutyl aluminium hydride (DIBAI-H), propionaldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 107

Question 55.
Explain the structure of carboxyl group.
Answer:
In carboxyl group, the carboxyl carbon is sp2-hybridised and the bonds to the carboxyl carbon lie in one plane. The C-C = O and O = C-O bond angles are 120°. The carboxylic carbon is less electrophilic than carbonyl carbon because of the resonance structures shown below :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 110

Question 56.
How is carboxylic acid obtained by the acid hydrolysis of an alkyl cyanide ?
Answer:
Alkyl cyanides or alkyl nitriles on acid or alkaline hydrolysis give corresponding carboxylic acids.

Acid Hydrolysis of Alkyl ankle: When alkyl cyanide is boiled wiLh dilute mineral acid, it gives corresponding carboxylic acid. In this, acid amide is obtained as the intermediate product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 111

Question 57.
How is ethanoic add obtained from methyl cyanide by acid hydrolysis?
Answer:
When methyl cyanide is heated with dilutc hydrochloric acid or dilute sulphuric acid. ethanoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 112

Question 58.
How Is proplonlc acid obtained from an alkyl nitrile?
Answer:
When ethyl cyanide (propionitrile) is boiled with dilute HCI or dilute H2SO4, propionic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 113

Question 59.
How Is benzoic acid obtained from bcnzamide?
Answer:
When benzarnide is heated with dil. HCl. benzoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 114

Question 60.
How is carboxylic acid obtained from acyl chlorides and acid anhydrides?
Answer:
When acyl chloride is hydrolysed with water, carboxylic acid is obtained. The reaction is carried out in presence of a base pyridine or NaOH to remove HCl generated.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 118
Acetyl chloride reacts with water almost explosively while benzoyl chloride very slowly.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 119
Acid anhydrides react with water to give carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 120
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 121

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 61.
How is benzoic acid obtained from
(i) ethyl benzoate
(ii) styrene?
Answer:
(i) Benzoic acid from ethyl benzoate : When an ethyl benzoate is heated with dil. H2SO4, undergoes hydrolysis to form benzoic acid and ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 122

(ii) Benzoic acid from styrene:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 123

Question 62.
How is propanoic acid obtained from phenyl propanoate?
Answer:
When phenyl propanoate is heated with dil. NaOH, sodium salt is obtained, which on hydrolysis gives propanoic- acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 124

Question 63.
How is propanoic acid obtained from methyl propanoate ?
OR
When methyl propanoate is heated with dil. NaOH, sodium, salt is obtained, which on hydrolysis gives propanoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 125

Question 64.
How is benzoic acid obtained from phenyl ethene?
Answer:
When phenyl ethene is heated with strong oxidising agents like acidic KMnO4 or acidic K2Cr2O7, benzoic acid is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 126

Question 65.
How is adipic acid obtained from cyclohexene?
Answer:
When cyclohexene is heated with acidified KMnO4, adipic acid (Hexane-1, 6-dioic acid) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 127

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 66.
What is carbonation of Grignard reagent ? How is acetic acid prepared by this reaction ? How is ethanoic acid pepared from dry ice?
Answer:
Addition reaction of carbon dioxide (0 = C = 0) to Grignard reagent, forming a complex and further formation of carboxylic acid is called carbonation of Grignard reagent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 128
Example : When methyl magnesium iodide is added to solid carbon dioxide, a complex is formed which on acid hydrolysis forms acetic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 129

Question 67.
How is benzoic acid prepared from Grignard reagent?
OR
Write the preparation of benzoic acid from dry ice.
Answer:
When phenyl magnesium bromide is treated with dry ice (solid carbon dioxide) in the presence dry ether, complex is obtained which on acidification gives benzoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 130

Question 68.
What are soaps ? How are they prepared ?
Answer:
The sodium or potassium salts of higher fatty acids are known as soaps. Soaps contain more than twelve carbon atoms.

When fat or oil is hydrolysed using sodium or potassium hydroxide solution, soap obtained remains in colloidal form. Soap and glycerol are separated by adding sodium chloride. Soap precipitates out due to common ion effect, and glycerol remains in the solution can be recovered by fractional distillation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 131

Question 69.
How is benzoic acid prepared from alkyl benzenes ?
OR
How will you convert the following :
(1) n-butyl benzene to benzoic acid.
(2) Toluene to benzoic acid.
(3) Cumene to benzoic acid ?
Answer:
When an alkyl benzene is heated with strong oxidizing agents like acidic or alkaline KMnO4 or acidified K2Cr2O7 etc. gives aromatic carboxylic acid. The alkyl side chain gets oxidised to -COOH group irrespective of the size of the chain.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 132

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 70.
Lower aldehydes and ketones are water soluble whereas higher homologues are insoluble. Explain, why.
Answer:
(1) The oxygen atom of Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 135 shows hydrogen bonding with water molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 136
(2) As a result of this, the lower aldehydes and ketones are water soluble (example – acetaldehyde, acetone). As the molecular mass increases, the proportion of hydrocarbon part of the molecule increases which cannot form hydrogen bonding with water and the solubility of higher homologues in water decreases.

Question 71.
Carboxylic acids have higher boiling points than those of alcohols, aldehydes, ketones, ethers, hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses. Explain, why.
Answer:
(1) Carboxylic group (-COOH) in acids is highly polar. in liquid state, pair of carboxylic acid molecules is held together by two intermolecular hydrogen bonds, have higher aggregations and in the vapour.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 137
(2) Intermolecular hydrogen bonding in carboxylic acids state most of the carboxylic acid.s exist as dimmers in which two molecules are held by two hydrogen R – R bonds. Acidic hydrogen of one molecule forms hydrogen bond with carbonyl oxygen of the other molecule. This doubles the size of the molecule resulting in increase in o – intermolecular van der Waals forces, which in turn results in high boiling points. Therefore, carboxylic acids possess higher boiling points than those of alcohols, aldehydes, ketones. ether, hydrocarbons of comparable molecular masses.

Question 72.
Lower aliphatic carboxylic acids are miscible with water while higher carboxylic acids are immiscible.
Answer:
(1) Lower aliphatic carboxylic acids are miscible with water due to the formation of hydrogen bonding with water molecules.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 138
(2) Hydrogen bonding between acid and water. As the molecular mass increases (he solubility of carboxylic acids in water decreases. The insolubility of carboxylic acids is due to increased hydrophobic interaction of hydrocarbon parts with water.

Question 73.
Explain why carboxylic acids are much weaker acids than mineral acids.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are the organic compounds which are acidic in nature. However, compared to mineral acids like HCI or H2SO4. the carboxylic acids are weaker acids.

The strength of acidity depends upon their ability to release H+ ions. Greater the ease with which they release H+ ions, stronger is the acid.

Carboxylic acids when dissolved in water, pcoduce H+ due to its dissociation. (it does not dissociate completely.)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 139
The mineral acid-s like HCI, H2SO4 release H+ ion to a larger extent as they dissociatc almost complctcly in aqueous solution for e.g. HCl → H+ Cl thus carboxylic acids are weaker than mineral acids. The equilibrium exists in aqueous solution of carboxylic acid as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 140
Since concentration of water practically remains constant
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 141

where Ka is acidity constant
Larger the value Ka greater is the extent of ionization and stronger is the acid. But strength of acids is expressed in ternis of their pKa values. Smaller the value of pKa. the stronger is the carboxylic acid. Here pKa value of carboxylic acids is higher than mineral acids. Hence, carboxylic acids arc weaker than mineral acids.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 74.
Carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenols and alcohols. Explain. Why?
Answer:
(1) Carboxylic acid loses a proton as compared to phenol. Consider the ionization of carboxylic acid and phenol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 142
Due to delocalization the negative charge over the ortho and para positions of aromatic ring, phenoxide anion is more stable than phenol. Thus phenol easily undergoes ionization
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 143
However, alcohol and alkoxide ion are single structures. In an alkoxide anion the negative charge is localized on a single oxygen atom. Hence, phenols are more acidic than alcohols.

(2) Carboxylic acid has two resonance hybride non equivalent structures (I & II) while carboxylate anion has two resonance hybrid equivalent structures (III & IV). The carboxylate ion is more stable than carboxylic acid and equilibrium is shifted towards the direction of increased ionization.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 144
(3) Carboxylate ion has two equivalent resonance structures with nejative charge is delocalized over two electro negative oxygen atoms. Phenoxide anion has non-equivalent resonance structures in which negative charge is
delocalized over one oxygen atom and less electronegative carbon atom. As a result carboxylate anion is more stable than phenoxide ion. Hence carboxylic acids ionize to the greater extent than phenol furnishing higher concentration of H+ ions. Therefore, carboxylic acids are more acidic than phenols and alcohols.

Question 75.
Trichloro acetic acid is a stronger acid than acetic acid. ExplaIn.
Answer:
(1) The acidic nature of carboxylic acid is due to the ability to release H ions. Greater the ease with which they release H+ ions, stronger is the acid. Any factor that stabilizes the carboxylate ion would help the release of H+
ions and thus increase the strength of the acid. The electron-withdrawing group attached to -carbon atom increases the strength of the acid. In trichloroacetic acid, three chloro substituents on s-carbon atom of acetic acid makes the electrons withdrawing effect more pronounced and the negative charge of carboxylate ion formed gets dispersed.

Thus, increases the stability of carboxylate ion.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 336

(2) The acetate ion formed gets destabilised due to the electron releasing effect of a methyl group (+ I effect). As a result, acetic acid dissociates to a lesser extent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 145

(3) The trichloro acetate ion formed gels stabilised due to electron-withdrawing effect of three 3Cl atoms (- I effect). As a result. trichloro acetic acid dissociates to a greater extent. Trichioro acetic acid having lower pKa value than acetic acid. Hence. trichloro acetic acid is a stronger acid than acetic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 76.
Which is the stronger acid in each of the following pairs ?
(1) CH3-COOH and CH2 = CH-COOH
Answer:
CH2 = CH-COOH is the stronger acid than CH3-COOH

(2) C6H5-COOH and C6H5-CH2-COOH
Answer:
C6H5-COOH is the stronger acid than C6H5-CH2-COOH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 148
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 149

(4) CH3-CH2-COOH and NC-CH2-COOH
Answer:
NC-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than CH3-CH2-COOH

(5) (CH2)2CH-CH2-COOH and (CH3)2NH-CH2-COOH
Answer:
(CH3)2NH-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than (CH3)2CH-CH2-COOH

(6) O2N-CH2-C00H and Cl-CH2-COOH
Answer:
NO2-CH2-COOH is the stronger acid than Cl-CH2-COOH.

Question 77.
Arrange the following acids in their increasing order of acidic strength.

(1) Acetic acid, chloroacetic acid, propionic acid, formic acid.
Answer:
Propionic acid < acetic acid < formic acid < chloroacetic acid

(2) Bromoacetic acid, chloroacetic acid, fluoroacetic acid, iodoacetic acid.
Answer:
Iodoacetic acid < bromoacetic acid < chloroacetic acid < fluoroacetic acid.

(3) Acetic acid, chloroacetic acid, dichloroacetic acid, trichloroacetic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < chloroacetic acid < dichloroacetic acid < trichloroacetic acid.

(4) n-butyric acid, 3-chlorobutyric acid, 2-chlorobutyric acid, 3-chlorobutyric acid.
Answer:
n-Butyric acid < 3-chlorobutyric acid < 2-chlorobutyric acid < 1-chlorobutyric acid.

(5) Acetic acid, benzoic acid, p-methoxy benzoic acid, p-nitrobenzoic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < benzoic acid < p-methoxy benzoic acid < p-nitrobenzoic acid.

(6) Acetic acid, phenyl acetic acid, p-nitro phenyl acetic acid.
Answer:
Acetic acid < phenyl acetic acid < p-nitro phenyl acetic acid.

(7) Benzoic acid, p-toluic acid, p-chlorobenzoic acid.
Answer:
p-toluic acid < benzoic acid < p-chlorobenzoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 157

Question 78.
Arrange the following carboxylic acids in order of increasing acidity : m-Nitrobenzoic acid, Trichloroacetic acid, benzoic acid, a-Chlorobutyric acid.
Answer:
Acidity in the increasing order : Benzoic acid, m-nitrobenzoic acid, a-chlorobutyric acid, trichloroacetic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 79.
Arrange the following carboxylic acids with increasing order of their acidic strength and justify your answer.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 158

Question 80.
Explain polarity of carbonyl group.
Answer:
The polarity of a carbonyl group is duc to higher electronegativity of oxygen compared to carbon. It is explained on the basis of resonance involving neutral and dipolar structures.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 159
The carbonyl carbon has positive polarity (see structures (A) and (D)). Therefore, it is electron deficient. As a result, this carbon atom is electrophilic (electron loving) and is susceptible to attack by a nucleophile (Nu : ).

Question 81.
Explain SchifPs reagent test.
OR
What is a SchifPs reagent ? How is it used to detect aldehydes ?
Answer:

  • Schiff’s reagent is prepared by dissolving pink p-rosaniline hydrochloride (dye Fuchsin) in water and passing SO2 gas till the pink solution is decolourised.
  • Schiff s reagent is an oxidising agent.
  • When an aldehyde is added to Schiff s reagent, the colourless solution turns pink or in magenta colour and aldehyde is oxidised to a carboxylic acid.
  • This test is not given by ketones, hence, used to distinguish between aldehyde and ketone.

Question 82.
Which colour is obtained when SchifFs reagent is treated with acetaldehyde?
Answer:
When Schiff s reagent is treated with acetaldehyde, pink colour is obtained.

Question 83.
What is Tollen’s reagent?
Answer:

  • Tollen’s reagent is an ammoniacal silver nitrate, [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH.
  • It is prepared by adding NH4OH solution to silver nitrate solution.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 162
  • It is a stronger oxidising agent than Fehling solution. Aldehyde when heated with Tollen’s reagent, silver mirror is deposited.

Question 84.
Explain Tollen’s reagent test.
OR
Explain silver mirror test.
Answer:

  • Tollen’s reagent is an (ammoniacal silver nitrate) [Ag(NH3)2]+ OH.
  • When an aldehyde, like acetaldehyde is heated with Tollen’s reagent, it is oxidised to acetic acid and silver ions Ag+ in Tollen’s reagent complex are reduced to silver Ag giving greyish black precipitate or deposition of silver on inner surface of the test tube which shines like a mirror. Hence this test is also called silver mirror test.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 163
  • This test is not given by ketones.
  • Hence Tollen’s reagent is used to distinguish between aldehydes and ketones.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 85.
What is Fehling’s solution? How is it prepared?
Answer:

  • Fehling’s solution is a complex of cupric ions with tartaric acid.
  • It is a mild oxidising agent.
  • It is prepared by mixing equal amount of Fehling’s solution ‘A’ containing CuSO4 solution and Fehling’s solution ‘B’ containing sodium potassium tartrate (Rochelle salt) in caustic soda (NaOH) solution.
  • It is used to detect aldehydes that decolourise deep blue colour of the solution and give red precipitate of Cu2O.

Question 86.
Explain Fehling’s solution test.
Answer:

  • Fehling’s solution is a mixture of Fehling’s solution ‘A’ containing CuSO4 solution and Fehling’s solution ‘B’ containing sodium potassium tartrate (Rochella salt) in caustic soda (NaOH) solution.
  • When an aldehyde is heated with Fehling’s solution, the deep blue colour of the solution disappears and Cu+2 (cupric ion) is reduced to Cu+ ion a red precipitate of cuprous oxide, Cu2O is obtained while aldehyde is oxidised to a carboxylate ion.
  • For example,
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 164
  • This test is not given by ketones, since they cannot be oxidised by Fehling solution.
  • Aromatic aldehydes are not oxidised by Fehling solution.
  • Hence this test is used to distinguish between aldehydes and ketones.

Question 87.
What is the action of the following reagents on ethanal :
(1) Fehling’s solution,
(2) Tollen’s reagent or Ammonical silver nitrate ?
Answer:

  1. When ethanal is heated with Fehling’s solution, the deep blue colour of the solution disappears and a red precipitate of Cu2O is obtained.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 165
  2. When ethanal is heated with Tollen’s reagent a greyish black precipitate or deposition of silver is obtained.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 166

Question 88.
Why is benzaldehyde NOT oxidized by Fehling solution ?
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is treated with Fehling solution, it does not reduce cupric ion (Cu+2). Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde. Thus, Fehling test cannot be used for aromatic aldehyde.

Question 89.
Explain laboratory test for ketonic group or sodium nitroprusside test.
Answer:
Laboratory test for ketonic group : Sodium nitroprusside test : When a freshly prepared sodium nitroprusside solution is added to a ketone, mixture is shaken well and basified by adding sodium hydroxide solution drop by drop, red colour appears in the solution, which indicates the presence of ketonic (> C = O) group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 170
The anion of ketone formed by alkali reacts with nitroprusside ion to form a red coloured complex which indicates the presence of the ketonic group.

Question 90.
What is the action of hydrogen cyanide on the following :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone
(3) Benzaldehyde?
Answer:
(1) Action of HCN on acetaldehyde : When acetaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, acetaldehyde cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 171

(2) Action of HCN on acetone : When acetone is treated with hydrogen cyanide, acetone cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 172

(3) Action of HCN on benzaldehyde : When benzaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, benzaldehyde cyanohydrin is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 173

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 91.
What is the action of hydrogen cyanide in basic medium on (1) butanone (2) 2,4-dichlorobenzaldehyde?
Answer:
(1) Action of hydrogen cyanide on butanone : When butanone is treated with hydrogen cyanide, butanone cyanohydrin is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 174

(2) Action of hydrogen cyanide on 2,4-dichlorobenzaldehyde : When 2, 4-dichloro benzaldehyde is treated with hydrogen cyanide, cyanohydrin of 2,4-dichloro benzaldehyde is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 175

Question 92.
What is the action of sodium bisulphite on :
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone (propanone)?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde reacts with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bisulphite (NaHSO3) and forms crystalline acetaldehyde sodium bisulphite. It is water soluble crystalline solid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 176

(2) Acetone reacts with saturated aqueous solution of sodium bisuiphite (NaHSO3) and forms crystalline acetone sodium bisuiphite. It is water soluble crystalline solid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 177

Question 93.
A carbonyl compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C5H10O forms crystalline precipitate with sodium bisulphite and gives positive iodoform test but does not reduce Fehling solution. Write the structure of carbonyl compound.
Answer:
A carbonyl compound C5H10O has two structures.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 178
Pentan-2-one forms crystalline precipitate with sodium bisulphite and gives positive iodoform test. But does not reduce Fehling solution.

Pentan-3-one does not react with iodine and NaOH because it does not contain Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 180 group.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 94.
How does alcohols react with aldehydes and ketones?
Answer:
Aldehyde reacts with one molecule of anhydrous monohydric alcohol in presence of dry hydrogen chloride to give alkoxyalcohol known as hemiacetal, which further reacts with one more molecule of anhydrous monohydric alcohol to give a geminaldialkoxy compound known as acetal as shown in the reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 181
Ketones react with 1, 2 – or 1, 3 – diols in presence of dry hydrogen chloride to give five or six-membered cyclic ketals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 182

Question 95.
What is the action of ethanol on acetaldehyde ? What is the action of ethylene glycol on acetone ?
Answer:
Acetaldehyde reacts with one equivalent of monohydric alcohol in the presence of dry hydrogen chloride to form an intermediate known as hemiacetal, which further adds another molecule of alcohol to form a gem-dialkoxy compound known as acetal. Acetone reacts with ethylene glycol under similar conditions to form cyclic products known as ethylene glycol ketals.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 183

Question 96.
Write the structure of product in the following reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 187
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 188

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 189
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 190

Question 97.
How does Grignard reagent react with the carbonyl compounds (or aldehydes and ketones)?
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones react with Grignard reagent (R – Mg – X) in dry ether and form a complex which on further hydrolysis with acid forms the corresponding alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 191

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 98.
What is the action of Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I on : (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone?
Answer:
(1) Grignard reagent with formaldehyde gives a primary alcohol.
Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on hydrolysis with dilute HCl forms ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 192

(2) Acetone on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on hydrolysis with dilute HC1 forms tert-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 193

Question 99.
Explain the mechanism of addition reactions of ammonia derivatives H2N-Z with carbonyl compounds (aldehydes or ketones).
Answer:
Derivatives of ammonia H2N-Z reacts with carbonyl compounds (aldehydes or ketones) in weakly acidic medium to give addition products, which loses a water molecule to give a final product imine derivatives. A substituted imine is called a Schiff base. Schiff bases are solids and have sharp melting points.

General reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 194

Question 100.
What Is the action of ethylamine on :
(1) acetaldehyde
(2) acetone ?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with ethyl amine forms imine (Schiff base).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 195
(2) Acetone on reaction with ethyl amine forms imine (Schiff base).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 196

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 101.
What are oximes? Which functional group do they contain?
Answer:
Oximes : These are the compounds obtained by the reactions of carbonyl compounds namely aldehydes and ketones with hydroxyl amine NH2OH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 197

Question 102.
What is the action of hydroxyl amine (NH2OH) on (1) acetaldehyde (2) acetone?
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with hydroxyl amine (in weakly acidic medium) forms crystalline acetaldoxime.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 198
(2) Acetone on reaction with hydroxyl amine (in weakly acidic medium) forms crystalline acetoxime.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 199

Question 103.
What are hydrazones?
Answer:
Carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones react with hydrazine forming compounds like hydrazones. For example, acetaldehyde on reaction with hydrazine gives acetaldehyde hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 200

Question 104.
Which compound can convert Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 201
Answer:
The compound which can convertMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 202.

Question 105.
What is the action of hydrazine on (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone ?
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde on reaction with hydrazine forms formaldehyde hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 203
(2) Acetone with hydrazine forms acetone hydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 204

Question 106.
What are phenylhydrazones?
Answer:
The carbonyl compounds like aldehydes and ketones on reaction with phenylhydrazine form hydrazones. For example, acetaldehyde on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms acetaldehydephenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 205

Question 107.
What is the action of phenylhydrazine on (1) formaldehyde (2) acetone (propanone) ?
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms formaldehydephenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 206
(2) Acetone on reaction with phenylhydrazine forms acetone phenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 207

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 108.
What is the action of 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine on
(1) Acetaldehyde
(2) Acetone
(3) Butanone
(4) Benzaldehyde ?
OR
Complete and rewrite the balanced chemical equation : Butanone + 2, 4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine.
Answer:
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 208
(2) Acetone on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 209
(3) Butanone on reaction with 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine forms 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 210

Question 109.
What is the action of semi carbazide on (1) Acetaldehyde (2) Acetone?
Ans.
(1) Acetaldehyde on reaction with semicarbazide forms scrnicarbazone derivative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 211
(2) Acetone on reaction with sernicarbazide forms semicarbazone derivative.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 212

Question 120.
Write the structures of carbonyl compounds and ammonia derivatives that combine to give following imines.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 213

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 121.
Write the structure of the products obtained from the following ketones by action of hydrazine in presence of (1) slightly acidic medium (2) strong base KOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 214
Answer:
(1) In slightly acidic medium
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 215
(2) In the presence of a strong base KOH
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 216

Question 122.
Explain haloform reaction.
Answer:
A ketone containing -COCH3 group is oxidised by sodium hypohalite a mixture of (sodium hydroxide and halogen) results in the formation of sodium salt of carboxylic acid having one carbon atom less than that of ketone and methyl group is converted to haloform.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 220
Acetaldehyde is the only aldehyde which gives haloform reaction. In this reaction, R may be hydrogen, methyl group or aryl group and X may be Cl, Br or I. The reaction is given by all methyl ketones (CH3 – CO – R) and all alcohols containing CH3 – (CHOH) group.

When a methyl ketone is warmed with iodine and sodium hydroxide, a yellow precipitate of iodoform is obtained. The iodoform reaction is used as a qualitative test for detection of CH3CO-group in a organic compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 221

Question 128.
Identify the compounds, amongst the following, that give positive iodoform test.
(CH3)2CHOH, (CH3)3COH, CH3COCH2CH2CH3, CH3CH2CHO, CH3CH2CH(OH)CH2CH3, CH3CH2OH, C6H5COCH2CH3, CH3CHO, C6H5CH2CH2OH and CH3CH(OH)CH2CH2CH3.
Answer:
For an iodoform test, the carbonyl compound must have Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 222 group.
The compounds that give positive iodoform test :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 223

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 129.
Explain cross aldol condensation.
Answer:
(1) An aldol condensation between two different carbonyl compounds (aldehydes and or ketones) takes place even though one of the two carbonyl compounds molecules does not contain a-hydrogen atom e.g. HCHO and C6H5CHO.

(2) If both aldehydes or ketones contain two a-hydrogen atoms each, then a mixture of four products, is formed. For example, a mixture of ethanal and propanal on reaction with dilute alkali followed by heating gives a mixture of four products.

Self aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 232
Cross aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 233

Question 130.
Write the structure of the major product of the following crossed aldol condensation.
Answer:
(1) Formaldehyde and propionaldehyde :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 236
(2) Benzaldehyde with acetone:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 237

Question 131.
Explain aldol condensation reaction of propionaldehyde.
Answer:
Since propionaldehyde has an a-hydrogen atom it undergoes aldol condensation with alkali Ba(OH)2, forming 3-Hydroxy-2-methylpentanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 238
3-Hydroxy-2-methylpentanal on heating undergoes dehydration and forms 2-Methylpent-2-enal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 239

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 132.
If a mixture of formaldehyde and acetaldehyde is subjected to aldol condensation, predict the products formed and draw their structures.
Answer:
Since formaldehyde, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 240 does not have α-hydrogen atom it will not undergo self aldol condensation. Since acetaldehydeMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 241has a-hydrogen atom, it will undergo self aldol condensation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 242
Formaldehyde and acetaldehyde undergo cross aldol condensation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 243
Hence two aldol condensation products will be obtained.

Question 133.
Indicate by equations, what happens when a mixture of acetaldehyde and acetone are treated with alkali.
Answer:
When a mixture of acetaldehyde and acetone is treated with alkali, Ba(OH)2, they undergo self aldol condensation and cross aldol condensation.
(1) Self aldol condensation acetaldehyde :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 244
(2) Self aldol condensation of acetone:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 245
(3) Cro5s aldol condensation:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 246

Question 134.
Explain Cannizzaro reaction.
OR
Write a note on Cannizzaro reaction.
OR
Write a note on self oxidation-reduction reaction of aldehyde with suitable example.
Answer:

  • Aldehydes which do not have a-hydrogen atom, on heating with concentrated alkali (50% aqueous or ethanolic solution of NaOH or KOH) undergo self oxidation and reduction reaction or redox reaction.
  • This self redox reaction or disproportionation reaction is called Cannizzaro reaction.
  • In this reaction one molecule of the aldehyde is oxidised to carboxylic acid while the second molecule of the aldehyde is reduced to alcohol (carboxylic acid formed, reacts with alkali, NaOH and forms a salt R – COONa).
  • When formaldehyde (methanal) is heated with 50% NaOH solution, methanol (reduction product) and sodium formate (oxidation product) are formed.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 248.
  • Ketones and aldehydes like acetaldehyde, propionaldehyde, etc. having a – H atom do not give Cannizzaro reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 135.
Explain cross Cannizzaro reaction with example.
OR
Write the reaction for the action of 50 % NaOH on a mixture of formaldehyde and benzaldehyde.
Answer:
The reaction between two different aldehydes, not having a-hydrogen atoms is called cross Cannizzaro reaction. These two aldehydes undergo disproportionation in presence of concentrated alkali to give four products. However, if one of the aldehydes is formaldehyde, the reaction yields exclusively formate and alcohol to corresponding aldehyde.

Formaldehyde and benzaldehyde since do not have a-hydrogen atom, will undergo Cannizzaro (redox) reactions.

(1) Self Cannizzaro (redox) reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 249
(2) Cmss Cannizzaro (redox) reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 250

Question 136.
What is the action of cone, potassium hydroxide on benzaldehyde?
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is heated with concentrated potassium hydroxide in presence of methanol, a mixture of potassium benzoate and phenyl methanol (benzyl alcohol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 251

Question 137.
Differentiate between Cannizzaro reaction and Aldol reaction.
Answer:

Cannizzaro reaction Aldol reaction
1. It is given by aldehydes not having alpha hydrogen atom.
2.  In this reaction an aldehyde is converted to the corres­ponding acid and an alcohol.
3.  It is a disproportionate ion reaction.
4.  It requires concentrated alkali as a catalyst.
1. It is given by aldehydes and ketones possessing alpha hydrogen atom.
2.  In this reaction aldehydes and ketones are converted into aldol and ketols, respectively.
3.  It is an addition reaction.
4.  It requires dilute alkali as a catalyst.

Question 138.
Write the chemical equations for aldol condensation or Cannizzaro reaction that the following compounds undergo :
(1) Propanal
(2) 2-Methyl propanal (isobutyraldehyde)
(3) Pentanal
(4) 3-Methylbutanal
(5) Acetophenone
(6) p-Methoxybenzaldehyde
(7) 2-Methyl cyclohexanone
(8) Chloral
(9) Cyclopentanone
(10) Phenyl acetaldehyde
(11) 1-Phenyl propan-l-one.
Answer:
(1) Propanal (Aldol condensation) : Propanal contains α-H atom. Two molecules of propanal undergo self condensation in presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl pentanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 253

(2) 2-NIethvl propanal (Canniuaro reaction) : Two molecules of them undergo cannizzaro reaction in the presence of 50% alkali to form sodium isobutyrate and isohutyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 254

(3) Pentanal (Aldol condensation) : Pentanal contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-propyl heptanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 255

(4) 3-Methyl butanal (Aldol condensation) : 3-Methyl butanal contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of dil. alkali to form 3-Hydroxy-2-isopropyl-5-methyl hexanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 256

(5) Acetophenone (Aldol condensation) : Acetophenone contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-1, 3-diphenyl but-l-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 257

(6) p-Methoxybenzaldehyde (Cannizzaro reaction) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 258

(7) 2-Methyl cyclohexanone
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 259

(8) Chloral (Cannizzaro’s reaction) : There is no α-H atom CCl3CHO, therefore it undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 260

(9) Cyclopentanone (Aldol condensation) : Cyclopentanone contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 2-(l-Hydroxy-1 cyclopentyl) cyclo pentane-l-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 261

(10) Phenyl acetaldehyde (Aldol condensation) : Phenyl acetaldehyde contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-2, 4-diphenylbutanal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 262

(11) 1-phenyl propan-l-one (Aldol condensation) : 1-phenyl propan-l-one contains a-H atom. Two molecules of them undergo self-condensation in the presence of base to form 3-Hydroxy-2-methyl-l, 3-diphenyl pentan-l-one
3-Hydroy-2-methyl-1, 3-diphenyl pentan-l-one
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 263

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 139.
Write a note on Clemmensen reduction.
OR
Explain Clemmeusen’s reduction.
OR
Explain the reduction of carbonyl group into methylene group.
Answer:

  • The carbonyl groupMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 264on reduciion with zinc amalgam (Zn – Hg) in concentrated hydrochloric acid is converted into methylene group ( – CH2 -).
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 265
  • Aldehydes and kctoncs on reaction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms corresponding alkanes. ibis reduction is called Clemmensen reduction.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 266
  • Acetaldehyde on reduction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms ethane.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 267
  • Acetone on reduction with Zn – Hg in concentrated HCl forms propane.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 268

Question 140.
Explain Wolff-Kishner reduction.
Answer:
Hydrazine (NH2-NH2) reduces carbonyl groupMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 269of aldehydes or ketones to metylene group Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 270 When aldehyde or ketone is heated with hydrazine in the presence of base such as potassium hydroxide and ethylene glycol, an alkane is obtained due to reduction of carbonyl compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 271

Question 141.
Compound A (C5H10O) form a phenyl hydrazone and gives a negative Tollen’s reagent test and iodoform test. On reduction with Zn-Hg/HCl, compound A gives n-pentane. Write the structure of ‘A’.
Answer:
Since A (C5H10O) forms a phenyl hydrozone, it is a carbonyl compound. Since it gives negative Tollen’s reagent test, it is not an aldehyde but it must be a ketone.

Since it doesn’t give iodoform test, it doesn’t have Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 272group.
Hence the structure of ‘A’ will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 273

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 142.
Identify A and B in the following reactions :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 274
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 275

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 276
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 277

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 278
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 279

 

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 280
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 281

Question 143.
What is the action of concentrated nitric acid on (1) Benzaldehyde (2) Benzophenone?
Answer:

  1. Benzaldehyde on reaction with concentrated nitric acid in presence of cone. H2SO4 forms m-nitrobenzaldehyde
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 282
  2. Benzophenone on reaction with concentrated nitric acid in presence of cone. H2SO4 forms m-nitrobenzophenone
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 283

Question 144.
Explain laboratory tests for carboxyl (- COOH) group.
Answer:
The presence of – COOH group in carboxylic acids is identified by the following tests :

(1) Litmus test : (valid for water soluble substances)
Aqueous solution of Organic compound containing – COOH group turns blue litmus red which indicates the presence of acidic functional group.

(2) Sodium bicarbonate test : When sodium bicarbonate is added to an organic compound containing – COOH group, a brisk effervescence of carbon dioxide gas is evolved. Water insoluble acid goes in solution and gives precipitate an acidification with cone. HCl. This indicates the presence of -COOH group.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 284

(3) Ester test : One drop of concentrated sulfuric acid is added to a mixture of given organic compound containing – COOH group and one mL of ethanol, the reaction mixture is heated for 5 minutes in hot water bath. After this, hot solution is poured in a beaker containing water, fruity smell of ester confirms the presence of carboxylic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 285

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 145.
How is acid chloride obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
Carboxylic acid on heating with thionyl chloride (SOCl2), phosphorus trichloride (PCl3) or phosphorus pentachloride (PCl5) give corresponding acid chlorides. In this reaction – OH of carboxyl group is replaced by -Cl.

The reactions are :
(1) Action on SOCl2 on carboxylic acid :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 286
Example : Acetic acid reacts with thionyl chloride to give acetyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 287

(2) Action of PCl3 on carboxylic acid (ethanoic acid) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 288
Example : Action of phosphorus trichloride on acetic acid gives acetyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 289

(3) Action of PCI5 on carboxIic acid :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 290

Question 146.
How will you convert 3,5-Dinitrobenzoic acid to 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride?
Answer:
When 3,5-Dinitrobenzoic acid is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, 3,5-Dinitrobenzoyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 291

Question 147.
How is acid amide obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
Carboxylic acid or acid chloride with ammonia salts, which on further strong heating at high temperature decompose to give amides.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 292
When acetic acid is treated with ammonia, ammonium acetate is obtained. Ammonium acetate on strong heating decomposes to form acetamide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 293
When acetyl chloride is treated with ammonia, acetamide is obtained
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 294

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 148.
How is acid anhydride obtained from carboxylic acid?
Answer:
When carboxylic acid is heated with strong dehydrating agent like phosphorus pentoxide or concentrated sulphuric acid, an acid anhydride is obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 295

The reaction is reversible and anhydride is hydrolysed back to acid.

Alternatively, when sodium acetate is heated with acetyl chloride, acetic anhydride is obtained. This reaction is irreversible.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 296

Question 149.
What is decarboxylation of an acid ? How is it done?
OR
What happens when sodium acetate is heated with soda lime ?
Answer:
Removal of a carboxylic group from acid is called decarboxylation. Decarboxylation of an acid is carried out by heating anhydrous sodium salts of carboxylic acids with soda lime (NaOH + CaO). The product hydrocarbons obtained contain one carbon atom less than the carboxylic acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 297
When sodium acetate is heated with soda lime, methane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 298

Question 150.
How is alcohol obtained from carboxylic acid ?
OR
What is the action of LiAlH4/H3O+on ethanoic acid? Write balanced equation for the conversion :
Cyclopropane carboxylic acid to Cyclopropylmethanol.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids are reduced to primary alcohols using powerful reducing agent lithium aluminium hydride.

(i) When ethanoic acid is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 in dry ether, forms ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 299
(ii) When cyclopropane carboxylic acid is reduced in the presence of lithium aluminium hydride in dry ether, forms cyclopropyl methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 300
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 301

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

Question 151.
What is the action 9f following compounds on cyclohexanone in presence of dry hydrogen chloride?
(1) Ethyl alcohol
(2) Ethylene glycol
Answer:
(1) With Ethyl alcohol : Cyclohcxanonc reacts with one equivalent of monohydric ethyl alcohol lo form hemi ketal, which further adds another molecule of alcohol to form a gem-dialkox compound known as ketal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 309
(2) With Ethylene glycol : cyclohexanone reaCts with ethylene glycol to form cyclic ketal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 310

Question 152.
Answer the following in one sentence.

1. Name the compound which reacts with formaldehyde to produce ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
The compound which reacts with formaldehyde to produce ethyl alcohol is methyl magnesium iodide.

2. What are imines ?
Answer:
These are the compounds obtained by the reactions of carbonyl compounds namely aldehydes and ketones with primary amine.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 317

3. Why does skin have burning sensation, when an ant bites ?
Answer:
When an ant bites, formic acid is released from an ant which gives burning sensation as the acid comes in contact with the skin.

4. What is the percentage of acetic acid in vinegar?
Answer:
The percentage of acetic acid in vinegar is 6 to 8%.

5. Which reagent is used to distinguish formic acid and acetic acid?
Answer:
The reagent used to distinguish formic acid and acetic acid is ammoniacal silver nitrate.

6. What happens when acetyl chloride is treated with dibenzyl cadmium ? Give reaction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 318

7. Complete the following reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 319
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 320

8. Give reason : Aromatic carboxylic acids do not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction.
Answer:
Aromatic carboxylic acids do not undergo Friedel-Crafts reaction because the catalyst aluminium chloride (Lewis acid) gets bonded to carboxyl group.

9. Write the name of two compounds which do not contain carbonyl group but show iodoform test.
Answer:
The name of two compounds which do not contain carbonyl group but show iodoform test are ethanol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 321

10. Give reason : In semicarbazide, – NH2 group bonded to carbonyl group is not involved in the formation of semicarbazone.
Answer:
NH2 group attached to – NH group in semicarbonide is more active than NH2 group attached to carbonyl group due to electron density difference.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

11. Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde but Tollen’s reagent oxidises benzaldehyde. Give reason.
Answer:
When benzaldehyde is heated with Fehling solution, there is no change in colour of the solution, Cu2+ ion is not reduced, hence Fehling solution does not oxidise benzaldehyde. However, Tollen’s reagent oxidises benzaldehyde to give silver mirror test.

12. Give reason : Direct attachment of vinyl group to carboxylic group increases the acidity of corresponding acids.
Answer:
Direct attachment of vinyl group to carboxylic group increases the acidity of corresponding acids due to greater electronegativity of sp2-hybridised carbon to which carboxyl carbon is attached.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 322

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 153.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question :

1. IUPAC name of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 337
(a) l-Phenylhexan-2-one
(b) 6-Phenylhexan-5-one
(c) l-Benzylhexan-2-one
(d) Dodecan-5-one
Answer:
(a) l-Phenylhexan-2-one

2. The general formula of carbonyl compounds is
(a) CnH2n+1OH
(b) CnH2nO
(c) CnH2nO2
(d) CnH2n+1O
Answer:
(b) CnH2nO

3. Aldehydes and ketones are
(a) chain isomers
(b) functional isomers
(c) geometrical isomers
(d) position isomers
Answer:
(b) functional isomers

4. Identify ‘C’ in the following reaction,
\(\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{Br} \stackrel{\mathrm{KCN}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A} \stackrel{\mathrm{H}^{+} \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{B} \stackrel{\mathrm{LiAlH}_{4}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{C}\)
(a) Propan – 1 – ol
(b) Propanone
(c) 2-Ethyl-3-pentanone
(d) Propanal
Answer:
(d) Propanal

5. Grignard reagent when reacted with alkyl cyanide followed by hydrolysis gives
(a) an aldehyde
(b) a ketone
(c) a primary alcohol
(d) a secondary alcohol
Answer:
(b) a ketone

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

6. Identify ‘ B ’ in the following reaction :
\(\mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{C}=\mathrm{N} \stackrel{\mathrm{CH}_{3} \mathrm{MgI}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A} \underset{\mathrm{HCl}}{\stackrel{2 \mathrm{HOH}}{\longrightarrow}} \mathrm{B}+\mathrm{NH}_{3}+\mathrm{MgIOH}\)
(a) Magnesium intermediate
(b) Ethanol
(c) Propanal
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(d) Propanone

7. \(\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B} \stackrel{\text { dry ether }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{Col}\) Complex \(\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O} / \mathrm{H}^{+}\) Ethyl Methyl Ketone. In the above reaction, A and B are
(a) Formonitrile, Propyl magnesium bromide
(b) Ethyl cyanide, Ethyl magnesium bromide
(c) Hydrogen cyanide, Ethyl magnesium bromide
(d) Acetonitrile, Ethyl magnesium bromide
Answer:
(d) Acetonitrile, Ethyl magnesium bromide

8. A dilute solution of p-rosaniline hydrochloride in water whose pink colour has been discharged by passing sulphur dioxide, does not restore its colour by
(a) HCHO
(b) CH2CHO
(c) (CH3)2COCH3
(d) CCl3CHO
Answer:
(c) (CH3)2COCH3

9. The reagent with which both acetaldehyde and acetone reacts easily is –
(a) Fehling’s solution
(b) Tollen’s reagent
(c) Grignard reagent
(d) Schiff s reagent
Answer:
(c) Grignard reagent

10. Isopropyl methyl ketone when treated with Zn-Hg and concentrated hydrochloric acid give
(a) iso-butane
(b) iso-pentane
(c) n-pentane
(d) neo-pentane
Answer:
(b) iso-pentane

11. The formation of acetone cyanohydrin from acetone is an example of
(a) Nucleophilic addition
(b) Nucleophilic substitution
(c) Electrophilic addition
(d) Electrophilic substitution
Answer:
(a) Nucleophilic addition

12. Which of the following is Fehling solution ‘A’?
(a) CuSO4 solution
(b) CaSO4 solution
(c) NaOH solution
(d) Sodium potassium tartarate solution
Answer:
(a) CuSO4 solution

13. The compound ‘X’ upon alkaline hydrolysis gives a product which reacts with phenylhydrazine but does not reduce ammoniacal silver nitrate solution. A possible structure for ‘X’ is
(a) CH3CHCl CH2Cl
(b) CH3CCl2CH3
(c) CH3CH2CH2Cl
(d) CH3CH2CHCl2
Answer:
(b) CH3CCl2CH3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

14. Which of the following is the correct statement with respect to aldehyde and ketones ?
(a) Ketones are reducing agents
(b) Aldehydes are good reducing agents
(c) Cannizzaro reaction is an addition reaction
(d) Ketones do not react with Grignard reagent
Answer:
(b) Aldehydes are good reducing agents

15. Acetaldehyde acts as
(a) a catalyst
(b) a reducing agent
(c) an oxidizing agent
(d) a mordant
Answer:
(b) a reducing agent

16. An organic compound (A) C3H80 on oxidation gives (B) C3H6O2. The compound A may be
(a) an ester
(b) an alcohol
(c) an aldehyde
(d) a ketone
Answer:
(b) an alcohol

17. Identify ‘B’ from the following reaction :
\(\mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{CHO}+\mathrm{NH}_{2} \mathrm{OH} \rightarrow \mathrm{A} \stackrel{\mathrm{Na} / \mathrm{C}_{2} \mathrm{H}_{5} \mathrm{OH}}{\Delta} \mathrm{B}\)
(a) Propan-1-amine
(b) Propan-2-amine
(c) Isopropylamine
(d) Dimethylamine
Answer:
(a) Propan-1-amine

18. Sodium borohydride does not reduce
(a) – COOH group
(b) – NO2 group
(c) – X atom
(d) – CHO group
Answer:
(a) – COOH group

19. An aldehyde when warmed with Zn/Hg and cone. HCl gives
(a) alcohol
(b) hydrocarbon
(c) carboxylic acid
(d) ketone
Answer:
(b) hydrocarbon

20. Acetaldol is
(a) 3-hydroxy butanol
(b) 3-hydroxy butanal
(c) 2-hydroxy propanal
(d) 3-hydroxy pentanal
Answer:
(b) 3-hydroxy butanal

21. Acetone can be reduced to propane, the reduction is called
(a) Clemmensen’s reduction
(b) catalytic reduction
(c) Rosenmund’s reduction
(d) partial reduction
Answer:
(a) Clemmensen’s reduction

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

22. Which of the following reagents can react with acetaldehyde to give water soluble white crystal-line solid?
(a) NaHSO4
(b) NaHSO3
(c) Na2SO3
(d) Na2SO4
Answer:
(b) NaHSO3

23. Which of the following compounds does NOT undergo aldol condensation?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 326
Answer:
(a)

24. Formalin is 40% aqueous solution of :
(a) Methanal
(b) Methanoic acid
(c) Methanol
(d) Methanamine
Answer:
(a) Methanal

25. Which of the following compounds do not produce pink colour with Schiff s reagent?
(a) Formaldehyde
(b) 2-propanone
(c) 3-pentanone
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

26. Both aldehydes and ketones can react with
(a) Tollen’s reagent
(b) the Grignard reagent
(c) Fehling’s solution
(d) Schiffs reagent
Answer:
(b) the Grignard reagent

27. Aldol reaction is.
(a) an addition reaction
(b) an elimination reaction
(c) a self-reduction reaction
(d) a disproportionate ion reaction
Answer:
(a) an addition reaction

28. The reaction in which two molecules combine to form a new molecule with the elimination of a small molecule like water is called
(a) an oxidation reaction
(b) a condensation reaction
(c) a hydrolysis reaction
(d) a redox reaction
Answer:
(b) a condensation reaction

29. Benzaldehyde undergoes Cannizzaro’s reaction to give
(a) sodium benzoate and methyl alcohol
(b) sodium benzoate and benzyl alcohol
(c) benzyllic acid and benzyl alcohol
(d) phenol and benzoic acid
Answer:
(b) sodium benzoate and benzyl alcohol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

30. Identify ‘X’ in the following reaction :
CH3-CHO + X → CH3-CH = N-NH-C6H5 + H2O
(a) C6H5-NH2
(b) C6H5-NH-NH2
(c) C6H5-N = NH
(d) C6H5-NH-NH-CH3
Answer:
(b) C6H5-NH-NH2

31. What happens when propanal is treated with zinc amalgam and conc.HCl ?
(a) Propan-l-ol
(b) Propan-2-ol
(c) Propane
(d) Propanone
Answer:
(c) Propane

32. Identify ‘ B ’ in the following reaction :
\(2 \mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{CHO} \frac{\text { dil. base or acid }}{300 \mathrm{~K}} \mathrm{~A} \underset{\text { dehydration }}{\text { dehy }} \mathrm{B}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}\)
(a) CH3-CH(OH)-CH2-CHO
(b) CH3-CH2-CH(OH)-CHO
(c) CH3-CH = CH-CHO
(d) CH3-CO-CH3
Answer:
(c) CH3-CH = CH-CHO

33. The blue colour of Fehling’s solution is due to
(a) Cu2O
(b) CuCO3
(c) CuO
(d) Cu++ ions
Answer:
(d) Cu++ ions

34. How is Schiff s reagent prepared?
(a) By passing CO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(b) By passing NO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(c) By passing SO2 through p-rosaniline solution
(d) By passing NH3 through silver nitrate solution
Answer:
(c) By passing SO2 through p-rosaniline solution

35. Benzaldehyde when treated with cone. HNO3 gives
(a) o-nitrobenzaldehyde
(b) p-nitrobenzaldehyde
(c) m-nitrobenzaldehyde
(d) a mixture of -o and -p-nitrobenzaldehyde
Answer:
(c) m-nitrobenzaldehyde

36. Which of the following carbonyl compounds undergoes aldol condensation ?
(a) Benzaldehyde
(b) Benzophenone
(c) Acetophenone
(d) tert-Butyl phenyl ketone
Answer:
(c) Acetophenone

37. Which of the following carbonyl compounds undergoes self redox reaction in presence of concentrated base ?
(a) 3-Methylpentanal
(b) 2-Chlorobutanal
(c) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal
(d) tert-Butyl methyl ketone
Answer:
(c) 2,2-Dimethylpropanal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

38. The smell of bitter almond is given by the compound.
(a) Benzoic acid
(b) Benzaldehyde
(c) Vanillin
(d) Cinnamaldehyde
Answer:
(b) Benzaldehyde

39. Which of the following will not give yellow precipitate when treated with NaOH and H?
(a) 3-Methylbutan-2-one
(b) 2-methylpentan-3-one
(c) Propanone
(d) Hexan-2-one
Answer:
(b) 2-methylpentan-3-one

40. A β-hydroxyl carbonyl compound is obtained by the action of NaOH on
(a) HCHO
(b) C6H5CHO
(c) CR3CHO
(d) CH3CHO
Answer:
(d) CH3CHO

41. Decarboxylation of sodium propionate gives
(a) methane
(b) ethane
(c) propane
(d) ethene
Answer:
(b) ethane

42. Ester on hydrolysis with dil HCl gives
(a) RCOOH + ROH
(b) RCOR + ROH
(c) ROH + ROH
(d) RCOR + RCOOH
Answer:
(a) RCOOH + ROH

43. \(\mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{CO}-\mathrm{CH}_{3} \stackrel{\mathrm{CrO}_{3}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A}\) The compound A is
(a) acetic acid
(b) propionic acid
(c) formic acid
(d) benzoic acid
Answer:
(a) acetic acid

44. The reaction of C6H5CH = CHCHO with LiAlH4 gives
(a) C6H5CH2CH2CH2OH
(b) C6H5CH2CH2CHO
(c) C6H5CH = CHCH2OH
(d) C6H5CH2CHOHCH3
Answer:
(a) C6H5CH2CH2CH2OH

45. A mixture of sodium benzoate and sodalime on heating yields
(a) methane
(b) benzene
(c) sodium benzoate
(d) calcium benzoate
Answer:
(b) benzene

46. Which is the strongest acid?
(a) CH3COOH
(b) CH3CH2COOH
(c) (CH3)3CCOOH
(d) CICH2COOH
Answer:
(d) CICH2COOH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

47. Benzaldehyde when treated with alkaline KMnO4 yields
(a) Benzyl alcohol
(b) Benzoic acid
(c) CO2 and H2O
(d) Salicylic acid
Answer:
(a) Benzyl alcohol

48. Acetonitrile on acidic hydrolysis gives
(a) HCOOH
(b) CH3NC
(c) CH3COONa
(d) CH3COOH
Answer:
(d) CH3COOH

49. The organic compounds A and B reacts with sodium metal and liberates hydrogen gas. A and B reacts together to give ethyl acetate. The A and B are
(a) CH3COOH & C2H5OH
(b) HCOOH & C2H5OH
(c) CH3COOH & HCOOH
(d) CH3COOH & CH3OH
Answer:
(a) CH3COOH & C2H5OH

50. Which one of the following undergoes reaction with 50% NaOH to give to corresponding alcohol and acid?
(a) Phenol
(b) Benzoic acid
(c) Benzaldehyde
(d) Butanal
Answer:
(c) Benzaldehyde

51. Identify the reactant in the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 327
Answer:
(c) CO

52. The strongest acid is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 328
Answer:
(c)

53. Predict the product in the following reaction
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 338
The compound A is
(a) butane
(b) propane
(c) ethane
(d) propene
Answer:
(b) propane

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

54. Ethyl benzoate when heated with dil H2SO4 gives
(a) acetic acid
(b) benzoic acid
(c) ethanoic acid
(d) phenyl methanol
Answer:
(b) benzoic acid

55. Margarine contains
(a) acetaldehyde
(b) propionaldehyde
(c) butyraldehyde
(d) formaldehyde
Answer:
(c) butyraldehyde

56. Monocarboxylic acids have the general formula
(a) CnH2n+1O2
(b) CnH2nO2
(c) CnH2nO
(d) CnH2n-1O2
Answer:
(b) CnH2nO2

57. Formic acid is obtained from
(a) vinegar
(b) red ants
(c) butter
(d) oil
Answer:
(b) red ants

58. Butter contains
(a) lactic acid
(b) butyric acid
(c) citric acid
(d) acetic acid
Answer:
(b) butyric acid

59. Glacial acetic acid is
(a) HCOOH
(b) CH3COOH
(c) CH3CH2COOH
(d) C3H7COOH
Answer:
(b) CH3COOH

60. Which of the following acids is optically active?
(a) Oxalic acid
(b) Salicylic acid
(c) Acetic acid
(d) Lactic acid
Answer:
(d) Lactic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

61. Lactic acid is
(a) propionic acid
(b) α-hydroxy propionic acid
(c) p-hydroxy benzoic acid
(d) butyric acid
Answer:
(b) α-hydroxy propionic acid

62. The carbon atom of the carboxylic group is
(a) sp3-hybridized
(b) sp2-hybridized
(c) sp-hybridized
(d) unhybridized
Answer:
(b) sp2-hybridized

63. The common name of carboxylic fatty acids is derived from
(a) the name of parent alkanes
(b) the name of corresponding aldehydes
(c) from their original sources
(d) the name of alkyl group present in them
Answer:
(c) from their original sources

64. The IUPAC name of a-methylpropionic acid is
(a) Propanoic acid
(b) Butanoic acid
(c) 2-Methylpropanoic acid
(d) 2-Methylbutanoic acid
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpropanoic acid

65. For the nomenclature of carboxylic acids, the suffix used is
(a) -ane
(b) -oic
(c) -al
(d) -ol
Answer:
(b) -oic

66. Propionic acid can be prepared by the
(a) action of propyl magnesium chloride on dry ice
(b) alkaline hydrolysis of propyl cyanide
(c) acid hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide
(d) oxidation of Propanone
Answer:
(c) acid hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide

67. The intermediate compound formed during hy-drolysis of acetonitrile to acetic acid is
(a) acetone
(b) acetamide
(c) ammonium acetate
(d) ethyl ammonium chloride
Answer:
(b) acetamide

68. Carbonation of CH3MgI gives organic compound. The same compound can also be obtained by
(a) oxidation of Methanol
(b) oxidation of Methanal
(c) acid hydrolysis of acetonitrile
(d) alkaline hydrolysis of ethyl cyanide
Answer:
(c) acid hydrolysis of acetonitrile

69. The acid that cannot be prepared by the action of Grignard reagent on dry ice is
(a) methanoic acid
(b) ethanoic acid
(c) propanoic acid
(d) butanoic acid
Answer:
(a) methanoic acid

70. The compound which on acid hydrolysis followed by oxidation gives acetic acid is
(a) CH3I
(b) CH2Cl2
(c) ClCH2CH2C1
(d) CH3CHCl2
Answer:
(d) CH3CHCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

71. The hydrolysis product of alkyl cyanide is
(a) primary amine
(b) amides
(c) aldehyde
(d) carboxylic acid
Answer:
(d) carboxylic acid

72. To prepare acetic acid,
(a) methyl alcohol is oxidized with KMnO4
(b) calcium acetate is distilled with calcium for-mate under dry conditions
(c) acetaldehyde is oxidized in the presence of K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4
(d) glycerol is heated with H2SO4
Answer:
(c) acetaldehyde is oxidized in the presence of K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4

73. Solid carbon dioxide when treated with etheral solution of C2H5MgBr followed by acid hydrolyzis gives
(a) propanoic acid
(b) ethanoic acid
(c) propionic acid
(d) both (a) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (c)

74. Which of the following compound does not give acetic acid on oxidation ?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Propan-l-ol
(c) Propan-2-ol
(d) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol
Answer:
(b) Propan-l-ol

75. A carboxylic acid resembles an alcohol with respect to its reaction with
(a) acidified K2Cr2O7
(b) washing soda
(c) caustic soda
(d) sodium metal
Answer:
(d) sodium metal

76. Acetic acid can be converted into acetic anhydride on heating with
(a) POCl3
(b) PCl3
(c) PCI5
(d) P2O5
Answer:
(d) P2O5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

77. Acetyl chloride reacts with ammonia to give
(a) ammonium acetate
(b) ethylammonium chloride
(c) ethylamine
(d) acetamide
Answer:
(d) acetamide

78. The reagent that reacts with acetic acid to give sodium acetate with liberation of carbon dioxide gas is
(a) sodium metal
(b) caustic soda
(c) caustic potash
(d) baking soda
Answer:
(d) baking soda

79. An alkene on hydration gives a compound, which reacts with propionic acid to produce isopropyl propionate. The alkene is
(a) CH2 = CH2
(b) CH3-CH = CH2
(c) CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2
(d) CH3 – CH = CH – CH3
Answer:
(b) CH3-CH = CH2

80. Both the compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’ react with sodium metal to liberate hydrogen gas and react with each other to give Methylethanoate. The compounds ‘A’ and ‘B’ are
(a) C2H5 – COOH and CH3 – OH
(b) C2H5 – COOH and C2H5 – OH
(c) CH3 – COOH and C2H5 – OH
(d) CH3 – COOH and CH3 – OH
Answer:
(d) CH3 – COOH and CH3 – OH

81. Identify the product ‘D’ in the following series of reactions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 339
(a) CH3COOCH3
(b) CH3COOC2H5
(c) C2H5COOCH3
(d) C2H5COOC2H5
Answer:
(b) CH3COOC2H5

82. Acetyl chloride on heating with sodium acetate gives
(a) ethyl acetate
(b) acetamide
(c) acetic anhydride
(d) acetaldehyde
Answer:
(c) acetic anhydride

83. Carboxylic acids are acidic in nature because
(a) it dissociates to give H+ ions
(b) it donates proton
(c) it reacts with active metal and liberates hydro-gen gas
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

84. Carboxylic acids on heating with P2O5 give
(a) acid chlorides
(b) alkyl halides
(c) acid amides
(d) acid anhydrides
Answer:
(d) acid anhydrides

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

85.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 329
Answer:
(c)

86. The compound having general formula is called
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids 340
(a) diester
(b) acid anhydride
(c) hemiacetal
(d) acetal
Answer:
(d) acetal

87. Identify the strongest acid amongst the following :
(a) Chloroacetic acid
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Trichloroacetic acid
(d) Dichloroacetic acid
Answer:
(c) Trichloroacetic acid

88. Acetaldehyde, when treated with which among the following reagents does ‘not’ undergo addition reaction?
(a) ammonia
(b) hydroxyl amine
(c) ammoniacal silver nitrate
(d) semicarbazide
Answer:
(c) ammoniacal silver nitrate

89. Popcorn has butter flavour which contains
(a) butan-l-one
(b) butane-2, 3-dione
(c) butan-2-one
(d) butyric acid
Answer:
(b) butane-2, 3-dione

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

90. On acid hydrolysis, propane nitrile gives
(a) propanal
(b) acetic acid
(c) propionamide
(d) propanoic acid
Answer:
(d) propanoic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Lay out of a letter means ____________
(a) physical appearance
(b) arrangement of its parts
(c) body
Answer:
(b) arrangement of its parts

Question 2.
Written communication is called ____________
(a) compliments
(b) consideration
(c) correspondence
Answer:
(c) correspondence

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 3.
Communication that takes place internally between various departments of an organization ____________
(a) external communication
(b) internal communication
(c) verbal communication
Answer:
(b) internal communication

Question 4.
Communication that takes place between business organization and outsiders like bank, suppliers, creditors, etc ____________
(a) internal communication
(b) external communication
(c) verbal communication
Answer:
(b) external communication

Question 5.
Communication conveying message in spoken form is called ____________
(a) Non-verbal communication
(b) Verbal communication
(c) Internal communication
Answer:
(b) Verbal communication

Question 6.
Facial expression is a form of ____________ communication.
(a) Verbal communication
(b) Non-verbal communication
(c) Internal communication
Answer:
(b) Non-verbal communication

Question 7.
Information or ideas in written form is ____________
(a) oral communication
(b) written communication
(c) body language
Answer:
(b) written communication

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 8.
A website for publishing informal online articles is called ____________
(a) blog
(b) cellular phone
(c) video conferencing
Answer:
(a) blog

Question 9.
Two-way personalised webscam based communication is called as ____________
(a) website
(b) blog
(c) video conferencing
Answer:
(c) video conferencing

Question 10.
____________ is a skill of being able to understand the feelings of another person.
(a) Empathy
(b) Sympathy
(c) Body language
Answer:
(a) Empathy

Question 11.
A ____________ introduces the firm.
(a) inside
(b) address, heading
(c) reference number
Answer:
(b) address, heading

Question 12.
Language of business letter should be ____________
(a) simple
(b) hard
(c) flowery
Answer:
(a) simple

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Correspondence (1) Greeting to the recipient of the letter
(b) Salutation (2) Message not included in the body of the letter
(c) Postscript (3) Non-verbal communication
(d) Hand gestures (4) Introduction of the sender
(e) Conciseness (5) Written communication
(6) Inside address
(7) Brief matter
(8) Other documents attached
(9) Verbal communication
(10) Heading

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Correspondence (5) Written communication
(b) Salutation (1) Greeting to the recipient of the letter
(c) Postscript (2) Message not included in the body of the letter
(d) Hand gestures (3) Non-verbal communication
(e) Conciseness (7) Brief matter

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
Branch of general communication concerned with business activities.
Answer:
Business communication

Question 2.
Communication that takes place internally between departments.
Answer:
Internal communication

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 3.
Communication that takes place between organization and outsider.
Answer:
External communication

Question 4.
An electronic mail sending messages using electronic devices through the internet.
Answer:
E-mail

Question 5.
A website for publishing informal articles.
Answer:
Blog

Question 6.
Online interactive groups using advanced mobile and web-based technologies.
Answer:
Social media network

Question 7.
The gesture of a dancer.
Answer:
Non-verbal communication

Question 8.
Skill to understand and share the feelings of another person.
Answer:
Empathy

Question 9.
The name and address of the letter writer.
Answer:
Heading

Question 10.
A matter wrote after completing the letter.
Answer:
Postscript

Question 11.
Copies were sent along with the letter.
Answer:
Enclosure

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 12.
The final part of the letter.
Answer:
Signature

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
A report is a systematic presentation of facts, figures, and conclusions about a topic.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
A notice is a written summary of transactions conducted at the meeting.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
Minutes give precise information regarding an important event that is about to take place.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Letterhead includes the name and address of the sender.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
A letter written in a logical sequence is coherence.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
“You’ attitude means writing the word you many times in a letter.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 7.
Harsh and rude words should be avoided in a letter.
Answer:
True

Question 8.
Minimum words should be used in a letter.
Answer:
True

Question 9.
The additional information written after the letter is completed is Postscript.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
The letter sent to other people at the same time is ‘Carbon Copy Notation’.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
Salutation includes documents, cheques, etc. attached with the letter.
Answer:
False

Question 12.
A complimentary close is written below the body of the letter in a polite manner.
Answer:
True

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Twitter, Youtube, Facebook, Written communication
Answer:
Written communication

Question 2.
E-mail, website, blog, completeness
Answer:
Completeness

Question 3.
Notice, Reports, Minutes, Non-verbal communication
Answer:
Non-verbal communication

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 4.
Coherence, Consideration, Cheerfulness, Margin
Answer:
Margin

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
The process of communication conveying a message in spoken form is called as ____________
Answer:
verbal communication

Question 2.
Communication which is neither written or spoken is known as ____________
Answer:
Non-verbal communication

Question 3.
The participants are able to see and hear each other and also display visual data models etc. under ____________
Answer:
video conferencing

Question 4.
Communication that involves hearing and understanding what a person says to you is ____________
Answer:
active listening

Question 5.
Proper arrangement of various parts of the letter is called as ____________
Answer:
layout

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 6.
The number written on the left-hand side below the heading to give a quick reference to the matter concerned is called ____________
Answer:
Reference Number

Question 7.
The reader gets the idea of the matter of the letter without reading the letter completely by reading ____________
Answer:
Subject

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Written summary ……………………….
(2) Spirit of hopeness ………………………..
(3) Logical sequence ……………………….
(4) ………………………. Your’s faithfully

(Coherence, Minutes, Cheerfulness, Complimentary close)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Written summary Minutes
(2) Spirit of hopeness Cheerfulness
(3) Logical sequence Coherence
(4) Your’s faithfully Your’s faithfully

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
Name the Electronic device in which mails can be sent.
Answer:
Mails can be through E-mail (Internet).

Question 2.
Name the device that provides a short message service.
Answer:
Mobile/Cellular phone provides short message service.

Question 3.
What is the final part of the letter called?
Answer:
The final part of the letter is called ‘Signature’.

1I. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
Written communication includes body language, facial expression, etc.
Answer:
Non Verbal communication includes body language, facial expression, etc.

Question 2.
Internal communication takes place between business organizations and outsiders.
Answer:
External communication takes place between business organizations and outsiders.

Question 3.
Coherence is also called the use of ‘You attitude’.
Answer:
Consideration is also called the use of ‘You attitude’.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 4.
A written summary of a business transacted at the meeting is called Notice.
Answer:
A written summary of a business transacted at the meeting is called Minutes.

Question 5.
Oral Communication is a permanent record.
Answer:
Written Communication is a permanent record.

Question 6.
The skill of understanding the feelings of another person is called Sympathy.
Answer:
The skill of understanding the feelings of another person is called Empathy.

Question 7.
A letter without clarity is invalid.
Answer:
A letter without a signature is invalid.

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Non-Verbal Communication
Answer:

  • Communication that does not involve written or spoken words is called non-verbal communication.
  • It takes place by using body language, facial expression, eye contact, silence, symbols, signs, gestures, etc.

Question 2.
Notice
Answer:

  • It is an intimation by the company to the concerned persons or members or directors about the day, date, time, place, and business to a transacted at the meeting.
  • It is to be sent to all the concerned persons through registered post.
  • It should also include the agenda which is going to be discussed at the meeting.

3. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
Explain any four modes of Electronic devices.
Answer:
Modes of electronic device:
(a) E-mail:
It means sending messages through the internet. An E-mail has made businesses come closer to their customers. It also saves time for writing letters, posting a letter, etc.

(b) Websites:
It is a set of interconnected web pages which are located on a single web. It contains the information provided by the owner of the website. It can be accessed through the internet or through a private local area network. Each website has a unique internet address called “Uniform Resource Locator”(URL).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

(c) Social media network:
It is a very popular online interactive group created by using mobile and web-based technologies. It helps the business organization to interact with the consumers and communicate about their products and services.

(d) Video-conferencing:
It can be done through computers by providing a video link between two or more people. The participants can see and hear each other while communicating and can also display visual data also.

4. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
The letterhead introduces the firm.
Answer:

  • The letterhead (or the head address) consists of the name of the company sending out the letter, its registered address, its emblem or logo, telephone number, fax number, telegraphic address, telex number, website, and e-mail address, and same times a brief line describing the nature of business of the company.
  • The letterhead is usually printed at the top center of the page.
  • When the addressee of the letter receives the letter, his attention first goes to the letterhead.
  • On seeing the letterhead, he knows about the sender’s firm.
  • The layout of the letterhead, it’s printing, and its style help to create an image of the company.
  • An attractive letterhead creates a good impression.
  • The letterhead speaks a lot of the sender’s organization.
  • Thus, the letterhead introduces the firm.

Question 2.
Postscript should not be used in business letters.
Answer:

  • Postscript means ‘written afterward’. It is like a footnote added to the letter.
  • It means additional matter not written in the main body of the letter but added after completing the letter.
  • It is necessary if some information is received late and is required to be conveyed along with the original letter.
  • To have a postscript in the letter is not a good practice and hence should be avoided.
  • It indicates the possible carelessness of the writer.
  • It should be used only for communicating an urgent message.
  • Thus, postscript should not be used in business letters.

Question 3.
Courtesy is one of the requisites of a good business letter.
Answer:

  • Every business letter must be courteously worded.
  • The language used should be polite, pleasing, and convincing.
  • Courtesy and polite tone are possible by using terms like ‘please’, ‘thank you, ‘very kind of you’ etc.
  • It is specifically necessary for letters sent to the employees.
  • It includes polite manners, kindness, and consideration for others.
  • A courteous letter builds goodwill for the organization.
  • Lack of courtesy may prove to be costly and troublesome to a business unit.
  • A business letter and serves as a ‘silent salesman’ or ‘silent ambassador’ only when it is courteous in meaning and language.
  • Courtesy facilitates the expansion of business activities.
  • Thus, courtesy is one of the requisites of a good business letter.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 4.
A business letter is a silent salesman.
Answer:

  • In modern times, the scale of the business has increased to such an extent that direct and personal dealing with the customers is difficult except in case of retail trade.
  • Correspondence is, thus, necessary to widen the boundaries of markets and expand the scale of business.
  • Effectively drafted and neatly typed letters play the role of a salesman in creating and expanding the market for goods and services.
  • When letters are courteous it creates a good impression.
  • Letters convince the prospects of the novelty, specialty, and utility of the products and induce them to place orders.
  • Thus, a business letter is a silent salesman.

Question 5.
A letter without a date is incomplete.
Answer:

  • The date is an important part of a business letter.
  • The date includes the day, month, and year on which the letter is sent to the addressee.
  • The reference of data is useful for the fulfillment of business transactions on a particular date.
  • A letter with a date can serve as evidence in a court of law.
  • The date on the letter facilitates quick reference to old letters and filing of letters in chronological order.
  • A letter without a date is incomplete and legally invalid. It is like a body without ahead.
  • Thus, a letter without a date is incomplete.

Question 6.
The margin on all sides is a waste of paper.
Answer:

  • In order to make a letter appear systematic and attractive, it is better to maintain margins on both sides of the letter.
  • Proper margin makes the letter attractive.
  • Proper margin must be kept on the left-hand side and right-hand side.
  • Proper space must be left at the bottom of the letter.
  • Thus, the margin on all sides is a waste of paper.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

Question 7.
The signature provides legal value to the letter.
Answer:

  • It usually consists of the name of the writer, his official designation, if any, and the department he is concerned with.
  • It is placed directly below the complimentary close.
  • The signature must be handwritten in ink and placed two or three line spaces below the complimentary close.
  • Business letters, today, carry the typed name and also the designation of the signatory below the signature.
  • This helps the reader to identify the person by his name and his official position in the company.
  • A letter without a date is invalid, likewise, a letter without a signature is also invalid.
  • The unsigned letter has no significance.
  • Thus, a signature provides legal value to the letter.

5. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain the physical appearance of a letter.
Answer:
‘Physical appearance’ simply means ‘The look’ of the letter. How it should appear or present itself to the receiver of the letter, what impression should it create? All these depend on the ‘Look’ or ‘Outer appearance’ of the letter. Therefore to make the letter look attractive, attention should be given to the following points.

(a) Paper:
A paper of superior quality should be used. The high cost of such paper is a sort of investment and not an expenditure. A paper of good quality always creates a good impression. Proper colour of the paper must be selected (generally white colour). A quality paper is useful to keep records for long period.

(b) Typing:
The typed letters are more attractive and legible than handwritten letters. However, the typing must be neat, accurate, and clean. Spelling must be checked for its correctness. Electronic typewriters or computers with printers must be used.

(c) Margin:
The proper margin on both sides gives the letter a presentable appearance. The size of the margin depends upon the size of the paper. It is also necessary to leave space at the bottom of the letter.

(d) Spacing:
Proper and enough space between the lines should be left. Spacing should be uniform. Proper spacing between the paragraphs increases the attractiveness of letter writing.

(e) Letterhead:
The design of the letterhead should be simple but attractive and impressive. It should include all necessary details like address, telephone number, E-mail, Fax No. etc. The letterhead has advertising value. It introduces the sender to the receiver of the letter.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 9 Business Communication Skills of a Secretary

(f) Folding:
Though the folding of a letter is a simple matter but not an unimportant one. Folds should be minimum. The number of folds depends on the size of paper used for writing a letter and the size of the envelope used for sending it.

(g) Envelope:
The envelope used for sending a letter should be of the proper size, color, and quality. A right-sized envelope should be used. In simple words, the envelope should neither be too small nor too big. If a window envelope is used, to save time and labour then the letter must be folded in such a way that the inside address shall appear exactly on the window (of the envelope).
It Must Be Noted That – “There Are No Exact Rules for Physical Appearance of A Business Letter. It Depends on Circumstances.”

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Secretary is ____________ to Directors.
(a) owner
(b) servant
(c) member
Answer:
(b) servant

Question 2.
Directors are the ____________
(a) owners
(b) representative of shareholders
(c) creditors of the company
Answer:
(b) representative of shareholders

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors

Question 3.
The provision regarding qualification shares of a director is contained in the ____________
(a) Articles of Association
(b) Memorandum of Association
(c) Prospectus
Answer:
(a) Articles of Association

1B. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
A person is elected by the shareholders of a company.
Answer:
Director

Question 2.
Maximum information in minimum words.
Answer:
Brevity

1C. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
The Directors are ____________ of shareholders.
Answer:
representative

Question 2.
The Directors are responsible for making ____________
Answer:
decision, plans and policies

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors

Question 3.
The report prepared by the directors at the end of every Financial Year is called ____________
Answer:
Directors report

Question 4.
The gap between two consecutive Board meetings should not be more than ____________
Answer:
120 days

1D. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) ……………………… The link between members and the directors
(2) Brevity ……………………………..

(Secretary, Concise and compact information)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Secretary The link between members and the directors
(2) Brevity Concise and compact information

1E. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
Brevity means not using harsh words while writing a letter.
Answer:
Politeness means not using harsh words while writing a letter.

Question 2.
The First Board meeting should be held with 60 days from the date of its incorporation.
Answer:
The First Board meeting should be held with 30 days from the date of its incorporation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 10 Correspondence with Directors

Question 3.
Accuracy means avoiding unnecessary details and irrelevant information in a letter.
Answer:
Brevity means avoiding unnecessary details and irrelevant information in a letter.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 1.
What is solution?
Answer:
The solution is a homogeneous mixture of two or more components or pure substances. When the size of particles of the components is of the order of 10-10 m, then the solution is called a true solution. E.g. An aqueous solution of sugar.

Question 2.
Explain : (1) Homogeneous solution
(2) Heterogeneous solution.
Answer:
(1) Homogeneous solution : A solution in which solute and solvent form uniform homogeneous one phase due to attraction between their molecules/particles is called homogeneous solution.
E.g. A solution of NaCl or sugar.

(2) Heterogeneous solution : A solution consisting of two or more phases is called a heterogeneous solution. E.g. A colloidal solution of starch.

Question 3.
Define : (1) Solvent (2) Solute.
Answer:
(1) Solvent : The component in which solution formation takes place and which constitutes larger proportion of a solution is called solvent. For example, in an aqueous solution of sugar, water is the solvent.

(2) Solute : In a solution the component which dissolves and constitutes smaller proportion of a solution is called a solute. For example, in a sugar solution, sugar is the solute.

Question 4.
What are the different types of solutions?
Answer:
A solution consists of a solvent and a solute. Since the physical states of a solvent and a solute may be gaseous, liquid or a solid, there are nine types of solutions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 1

Question 5.
Mention the solvent and solute in the following :
(1) Smoke
(2) Moisture
(3) Alloy
(4) Soda water.
Answer:

Substance Solvent Solute
1. Smoke Gas Solid
2. Moisture Gas Liquid
3. Alloy Solid Solid
4. Soda water Liquid Gas

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 6.
What is a saturated solution?
Answer:
A solution which contains the maximum amount of dissolved solute and further the solute can’t be dissolved is called a saturated solution.

There exists a dynamic equilibrium which is represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 2

Question 7.
What is a supersaturated solution?
Answer:
A solution containing a solute more than that required to form a saturated solution at equilibrium is called a supersaturated solution.

When a tiny crystal of a solute is added to supersaturated solution, the excess solute separates out and forms saturated solution.

Question 8.
What is solubility of a solute ?
Answer:
Solubility : It is defined as amount of a solute present per unit volume in its saturated solution at a specific temperature.
It is expressed in mol L-1 or mol dm-3.

Question 9.
Explain the factors on which the solubility of a substance (solute) depends.
Answer:
The extent of dissolution of a substance (solute) depends upon the following factors :
(1) Nature of a solute : A solute may be crystalline, amorphous, ionic or covalent. Hence accordingly its tendency to dissolve changes. The substances having similar intermolecular forces tend to dissolve in each other.

(2) Nature of solvents : Solvents are classified as polar and nonpolar. Polar solutes dissolve in polar solvents. For example, ionic compounds dissolve in polar solvent like water. A solvent other than water is called a nonaqueous solvent. For example, C6H6, CCl4, etc. Solutions in these solvents are called nonaqueous solutions.
The solvent may be a gas, a liquid or a solid.

(3) Amount of a solvent : More amount of a solvent, will dissolve more quantity of the solute.

(4) Temperature : Depending on the nature of a solvent and a solute the solubility changes with termperature. The effect depends on the heat of solution, hydration energy, etc. Generally as the temperature increases, solubility of solid increases and that of gases decreases.

(5) Pressure :

  • Pressure has no effect on the solubilities of solids and liquids since they are incompressible.
  • The effect of pressure is important only for solutions which involve gases as solutes. With the increase in pressure and decrease in temperature, the solubility of gases increases.

Question 10.
Explain with the help of Le Chatelier’s principle the effect of temperature on solubility.
Answer:

  1. The effect of temperature on solubility depends on enthalpy of solution.
  2. For example, dissolution of KCl in water is an endothermic process since heat is absorbed during dissolution. In according to Le Chatelier’s principle by increasing temperature the solubility of KCl increases.
  3. Dissolution of CaCl2, Li2SO4, H2O in water is an exothermic process since heat is evolved during dissolution. In this, according to Le Chatelier’s principle by increasing the temperature the solubility decreases.

Question 11.
Explain the solubility of gases in liquids.
Answer:

  • Gases are soluble in water and other liquids and their solubility depends upon the nature of the gas.
  • Non-polar gases like O2, have less solubility in polar solvents.
  • Polar gases like CO2, NH3, HCl, etc. are more soluble in polar solvent like water. CO2 forms H2CO3, while NH3 forms NH4OH in aqueous solutions.
  • The solubility of gases in liquids increases with the increase in pressure and the decrease in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 12.
Why does the solubility of a gas decrease with increase in temperature ?
OR
How does solubility of a gas in water varies with temperature ?
Answer:

  • The gases are soluble in water and other liquids.
  • According to Charles’ law, the volume of a given mass of a gas increases with the increase in temperature at constant pressure.
  • Hence, the volume of the dissolved gas increases with the increase in temperature.
  • This enormous increase in volume of the gases cannot be accommodated by the solvent molecules, hence excess of the gases escape out in the form of bubbles.

Therefore, the solubility of gases in liquids decreases with temperature.

Question 13.
Explain the effect of pressure on the solubility of the gases.
OR
State and explain Henry’s law.
Answer:
(1) Since the gases are compressible, their solubility in the liquids is influenced by external pressure of the gas. The solubility of gases increases with the increase in pressure.

(2) Henry’s law : It states that the solubility of a gas. in a liquid at constant temperature is proportional to the pressure of the gas above the solution.
(i) If S is the solubility of a gas in mol dm-3 at a pressure P and constant temperature then by Henry’s law,
S ∝ P or S = KH × P
where KH is called Henry’s law constant.
(ii) If P = 1 atm, then S = KH.
(iii) If several gases are present, then the solubility of any gas in the mixture is proportional to its partial pressure at given temperature.

(3) Illustration of Henry’s law : In case of aerated or carbonated drink beverage, the bottle is filled by dissolving CO2 gas at high pressure and then sealed.
Above the liquid surface there is air and undissolved CO2. Due to high pressure, the amount of dissolved CO2 is large.

When the cap of the aerated bottle is removed, the pressure on the solution is lowered, hence excess of CO2 and air escape out in the form of effervescence. Thus by decreasing the pressure, solubility of CO2 is decreased.

Question 14.
What are the exceptions to Henry’s law? Why ?
Answer:
(1) The gases like NH3 and CO2 do not obey Henry’s law.
(2) This is because, these gases react with water,
\(\mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{l})} \longrightarrow \mathrm{NH}_{4 \text { (aq) }}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(\text {aq })}^{-}\)
CO2(g) + H2O(l) → H2CO3(aq)
(3) Due to reactions of the gases like NH3, CO2(g), they have higher solubilities than expected by Henry’s law.

Question 15.
Oxygen gas is slightly soluble in water but it is highly soluble in blood. Explain.
Answer:
The vital constituent of blood, namely haemoglobin reacts with oxygen increasing the solubility of oxygen.
Haemoglobin + 4O2(g) → Haemoglobin O8
This oxygenated blood is circulated to the various parts of body, for the supply of oxygen.

Question 16.
Obtain the units of Henry’s law constant.
Answer:
By Henry’s law, S = KH × P, where S is solubility of the gas in mol dm-3, P is the pressure of the gas in atmosphere (or in bar) and KH is Henry’s law constant.
∴ KH = \(\frac{S^{\left(\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{dm}^{-3}\right)}}{P_{(\mathrm{atm})}}\) mol dm-3 atm-1 or mol dm-3 bar-1
Hence the units of Henry’s law constant KH are mol dm-3atm-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Solved Examples 2.4

Question 17.
Solve the following :
(1) For a gas, the Henry’s law constant is 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1 at 25 °C. Calculate the solubility of the given gas at 2.5 atm and 25 °C.
Solution :
Given : Henry’s law constant = KH
= 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1
Pressure of the gas = P = 2.5 atm
Solubility of the gas = S = ?
By Henry’s law
S = KH × P
= 1.25 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1 × 2.5 atm
= 3.125 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of gas = 3.125 × 10-3 mol dm-3

(2) The solubility of dissolved oxygen to 27 °C is 2.6 × 10-3 mol dm-3 at 2 atm. Find its solubility at 8.4 atm and 27 °C.
Solution :
Given : Solubility of O2
= S1 = 2.6 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Initial pressure of O2 = P1 = 2 atm
Final pressure of O2 = P2 = 8.4 atm
Solubility of O2 = S2 = ?
(i) By Henry’s law,
S1 = KH × P1
∴ Henry’s law constant KH is,
KH = \(\frac{S_{1}}{P_{1}}=\frac{2.6 \times 10^{-3}}{2}\)
= 1.3 × 10-3 mol dm-3 atm-1
(ii) Now, S2 = KH × P2 = 1.3 × 10-3 × 8.4
= 10.92 × 10-3
= 1.092 × 10-2 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of O2 = 1.092 × 10-2 mol dm-3

(3) Henry’s law constant for the solubility of methane in benzene is 4.27 × 10-5 mm-1 Hg mold dm-3 at constant temperature. Calculate the solubility of methane at 760 mm Hg pressure at same temperature.
Solution :
Given : Henry’s law constant = KH
= 4.27 × 10-5mm-1 Hg mol dm-3
Pressure of the gas = P = 760 mm Hg
KH = 4.27 × 10-5 mm-1 mol dm-3
= 4.27 × 10-5 × 760 atm-1 mol dm-3
= 3245 × 10-5 atm-1 mol dm-3
= 3.245 × 10-2 atm-1 mol dm-3
P = 760 mm = \(\frac{760}{760}\) atm = 1 atm
By Henry’s law,
S = KH × P = 3.245 × 10-2 atm-1 mol dm-3 × 1 atm
= 3.245 × 10-2 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of methane = 3.245 × 10-2 mol dm-3

(4) The solubility of ethane at 25 °C is 0.92 × 10-3 g dm-3 at 1000 mm Hg pressure. Calculate Henry’s law constant.
Solution :
Given : Solubility of ethane
= S = 0.92 × 10-5 g dm-3
Pressure of ethane = P = 1000 mm Hg
Molar mass of ethane (C2H6) = 30 g mol-1
Henry’s law constant = KH = ?
S = 0.92 × 10-3 g dm-3
= \(\frac{0.92}{30}\) × 10-3
= 3.067 × 10-5 mol dm-3
P = 1000 mm = \(\frac{1000}{760}\)atm = 1.316 atm
By Henry’s law,
S = KH × P
∴ KH = \(\frac{S}{P}=\frac{3.067 \times 10^{-5}}{1.316}\)
= 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1
Ans. Henry’s law constant = KH
= 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(5) The solubility of nitrogen at 30 °C is 2.5 × 10-3 g dm-3 at 760 mm pressure. What will be its solubility in mol dm-3 at 20,000 mm and same temperature?
Solution :
Given : Initial solubility of N2 = S1 =2.5 × 10-3 g dm-3
Initial pressure = P1 = 760 mm
Final pressure = P2 = 20,000 mm
Final solubility = S2 in mol dm-3 = ?
Molar mass of N2 gas = 28 g mol-1
S1 = 2.33 × 10-5 mol dm-3
= \(\frac{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}{28}\) mol dm-3
= 8.93 × 10-5 mol dm-3
P1 = \(\frac{760}{760}\) = 1 atm
P2 = \(\frac{20,000}{760}\) = 26.32 atm
By Henry’s law,
S1 = KH × P1
∴ KH = \(\frac{S_{1}}{P_{1}}=\frac{8.93 \times 10^{-5}}{1}\)
= 8.93 × 10-5 mol dm-3 atm-1
S2 = KH × P2 = 8.93 × 10-5 × 26.32
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3
Ans. Solubility of N2 gas
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3.

[Alternative method:
S1 = KHP1 and S2 = KHP2
∴ \(\frac{S_{2}}{S_{1}}=\frac{K_{\mathrm{H}} P_{2}}{K_{\mathrm{H}} P_{1}}=\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\)
∴ S2 = S1 × \(\frac{P_{2}}{P_{1}}\) = 8.93 × 10-5 × \(\frac{20,000}{760}\)
= 2.35 × 10-3 mol dm-3]

Question 18.
Marine life like fish prefers to stay at lower level in water. Explain.
OR
Explain, why do aquatic animals prefer to stay at lower level of water during summer?
Answer:

  1. The solubility of oxygen gas decreases with the increase in temperature.
  2. In sea or lake water, the temperature of upper level is higher than the lower level.
  3. Therefore the dissolved oxygen content in water is more at lower level than at higher level required for the marine life.

Hence marine life like fish prefers to stay at lower level than upper level of water.

Question 19.
State and explain Raoult’s law.
Answer:
Statement of Raoult’s law : The law states that, at constant temperature, the partial vapour pressure of any volatile component of a solution is equal to the product of vapour pressure of the pure component and the mole fraction of that component in the solution.

Let P0 and P be the respective vapour pressures of a pure volatile component and a solution. If x1 is the mole fraction of a solvent then by Raoult’s law,
P = x1 × P0.

Explanation : Consider a solution containing two volatile components A and B having mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively.
Let \(P_{1}^{0}\) and \(P_{2}^{0}\) be the vapour pressures of pure components (or liquids) A and B respectively.
Then by Raoult’s law, vapour pressure of component A = P1 = X1 × \(P_{1}^{0}\), vapour pressure of component B = P2 = x2 × \(P_{2}^{0}\).
Here P1 and P2 represent partial vapour pressures of the two liquid components in the solution.
Hence the total vapour pressure, PT of the solution will be,
PT = P1 + P2
∴ PT = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
∵ x1 + x2 = 1
∴ x1 = 1 – x2
∴ PT = (1 – x2)\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
= \(P_{1}^{0}\) – x2\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
= (\(P_{2}^{0}\) – \(P_{1}^{0}\))x2 + \(P_{1}^{0}\)
With the help of above equation, the vapour pressures of solutions having different concentrations (or mole fractions) can be calculated.

Question 20.
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with mole fraction of a solute in a liquid mixture.
Answer:
Consider a liquid mixture of two liquid components A and B having vapour pressures \(P_{1}^{0}\) and \(P_{2}^{0}\) and mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively.
By Raoult’s law, the vapour pressures P1 and P2 are,
P1 = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) and P2 = x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
The vapour pressure of the solution is,
PT = P1 +P2 = x1\(P_{1}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{2}^{0}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 3
∴ PT = (\(P_{2}^{0}\) – \(P_{1}^{0}\))x2 + \(P_{1}^{0}\)
The plot of PT versus x2 is a straight line. The plots of P1 versus x1, and P2 versus x2 are straight lines passing through the origin.
When x1 = 1, x2 = 0, PT = \(P_{1}^{0}\) and when x1 = 0, x2 = 1, PT = \(P_{2}^{0}\) as shown by lines I and II in Fig. 2.2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 21.
Explain the composition of vapour phase above a liquid mixture.
Answer:
Consider a liquid mixture of two liquids A and B having vapour pressures \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) and \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) and mole fractions x1 and x2 respectively in the liquid phase.
By Raoult’s law, the vapour pressures of two liquids will be,
PA = x1\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) and PB = x2\(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
The total vapour pressure of this liquid mixture is,
PT = PA + PB
PT = x1\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) + x2\(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
The vapour above liquid surface contains A and B. If y1 and y2 are the mole fractions of A and B components respectively in the vapour phase, then by Dalton’s law of partial pressures,
PA = y1PT and PB = y2PT
and total vapour pressure is,
PT = y1PT + y2PT.

Question 22.
What are ideal and nonideal solutions ?
Answer:

  • Ideal solutions : These are solutions which obey Raoult’s law over an entire range of concentrations at constant temperature.
  • Nonideal solutions : These are solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentrations.

Question 23.
What are the characteristics of ideal solutions ?
Answer:

  • The ideal solutions obey Raoult’s law over entire range of concentrations at constant temperature.
  • In the formation of an ideal solution, heat is neither evolved nor absorbed and enthalpy change for mixing is zero, i.e. Δmix H = 0.
  • In the formation of an ideal solution, there is no volume change on mixing two liquid components and the volume of solution is equal to the sum of volumes of two liquid components. Δmix V = 0
  • In the ideal solution, solvent-solvent, solute-solute and solvent-solute interactions are comparable.
  • The vapour pressure of an ideal solution lies between vapour pressures of two pure components.

Question 24.
Give an example of an ideal solution.
Answer:
A liquid mixture of benzene and toluene which have nearly identical physical properties and inter molecular forces forms an ideal solution.

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of nonideal solutions.
Answer:

  • Nonideal solutions do not obey Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentrations.
  • The vapour pressures of these solutions may be higher or lower than ideal solutions.
  • These solutions exhibit two types of deviations from Raoult’s law namely (a) positive deviation and (b) negative deviation.
  • These solutions give azeotropic mixtures.

Question 26.
Explain solutions with positive deviations from Raoult’s law.
Answer:
(i) A solution or a liquid mixture which has higher vapour pressure than theoretically calculated by Raoult’s law or higher than those of pure components is called a nonideal solution with positive deviation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 4
(ii) In these solutions, solute-solvent intermolecular attractions are weaker than those between solvent-solvent and solute-solute interactions.
(iii) For example, solutions of acetone and ethanol, carbon disulphide and acetone, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 27.
Explain solutions with negative deviations from Raoult’s law.
Answer:
(1) A solution or a liquid mixture which has lower vapour pressure than theoretically calculated by Raoult’s law or lower than those of pure components is called a nonideal solution with negative deviation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 5
(2) In these solutions, the intermolecular interactions between solvent and solute molecules are stronger than solvent-solvent or solute-solute interactions.
(3) For example, solutions of phenol and aniline, chloroform and acetone, etc.

Solved Examples 2.5

Question 28.
Solve the following :

(1) The vapour pressures of two liquids A and B are 400 mm Hg and 600 mm Hg respectively at 47 °C. A solution is prepared by dissolving 10 g of A of molar mass 60 g mol-1 in 80 g of B of molar mass 40 g mol-1. Find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 400 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 650 mm Hg.
WA = 10 g and WB = 80 g.
MA = 60 g mol-1; MB = 40 g mol-1, Psoln = ?
nA = \(\frac{W_{\mathrm{A}}}{M_{\mathrm{A}}}=\frac{10}{60}\) = 0.1667 mol
nB = \(\frac{W_{\mathrm{B}}}{M_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{80}{40}\) = 2 mol
Total number of moles = n = nA + nB
= 0.1667 + 2
= 2.1667 mol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 6
= 0.07693 × 400 + 0.9230 × 600
= 30.772 + 553.8
= 584.572 mm Hg
Ans. Vapour pressure of solution
= Psoln = 584.572 mm Hg

(2) 2.5 mol of a liquid A is mixed with 4.5 mol of liquid B at 25 °C. If the vapour pressures of A and B at 25 °C are 160 mm Hg and 230 mm Hg respectively, calculate the vapour pressure of the liquid mixture.
Solution :
Given : nA = 2.5 mol; nB = 4.5 mol,
\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 160 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 230 mm Hg, Psoln = ?
Total number of moles = n = nA + nB
= 2.5 + 4.5
= 7.0 mol
Mole fraction of A = xA = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{n}=\frac{2.5}{7}\) = 0.3571
Mole fraction of B = 1 – xA = 1 – 0.3571
= 0.6429
\(P_{\text {soln }}=x_{\mathrm{A}} P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}+x_{\mathrm{B}} P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\)
= 0.3571 × 160 + 0.6429 × 230
= 57.136 + 147.9
= 205 mm Hg
Ans. Psoln = 205 mm Hg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(3) The vapour pressures of pure liquids A and B are 400 mm Hg and 650 mm Hg respectively at 330 K. Find the composition of liquid and vapour if total vapour pressure of solution is 600 mm Hg.
Solution :
Given : \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 400 mm Hg; \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 650 mm Hg,
PT = 600 mm Hg, T = 330 K; xA = ? xB = ?, y1 = ? y2 = ?
(x is mole fraction in liquid phase while y is mole fraction in vapour phase.)
PT = (\(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) – \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\))xB + \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\)
600 = (650 – 400)xB + 400
= 250xB + 400
∴ xB = \(\frac{600-400}{250}\) = 0.8
∵ xA + xB = 1
∴ xA = 1 – xB = 1 – 0.8 = 0.2
The composition of A and B in liquid mixture is, xA = 0.2 and xB = 0.8.
If P1 and P2 are vapour pressures (or partial pressures) of A and B in vapour phase then by Raoult’s law,
P1 = xA × \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 0.2 × 400 = 80 mm Hg
P2 = xB × \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 0.8 × 650 = 520 mm Hg
If y1 and y2 are mole fractions of A and B respectively in vapour phase then, by Dalton’s law,
P1 = y1PT
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 7
(or y2 = 1 – y1 = 1 – 0.1333 = 0.8667)
Ans. Composition of liquid : xA = 0.2 and xB = 0.8
Composition of vapour: yA = 0.1333 and yB = 0.8667

(4) A mixture of two liquids A and B have vapour pressures 3.4 × 104 Nm-2 and 5.2 × 10 Nm-2. If the mole fractions of A is 0.85, find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution:
Given : Vapour pressure of pure liquid A
= \(P_{\mathrm{A}}^{0}\) = 3.4 × 104 Nm-2
Vapour pressure of pure liquid B
= \(P_{\mathrm{B}}^{0}\) = 5.2 × 104 Nm-2
Mole fraction of A = xA = 0.85
Mole fraction of B = xB = 1 – xA
= 1 – 0.85
= 0.15
The vapour solution is given by
\(P_{\text {soln }}=X_{A} P_{A}^{0}+X_{B} P_{B}^{0}\)
= 0.85 × 3.4 × 10 + 0.15 × 5.2 × 104
=2.89 × 104 + 0.78 × 104
=(2.89 + 0.78) × 104
Psoln = 3.67 × 104 Nm-2
Ans. Vapour pressure of a solution = 3.67 × 104 Nm-2

Question 29.
Define the term colligative property. Give examples.
Answer:
(1) Colligative Property : The property of a solution which depends on the total number of particles of the solute (molecules, ions) present in the solution and does not depend on the nature or chemical composition of solute particles is called colligative property of the solution.

(2) Examples of colligative properties : (a) lowering or relative lowering of vapour pressure of a solution (b) elevation in the boiling point (c) depression in the freezing point (d) osmotic pressure.

Question 30.
Explain and define the term vapour pressure of a liquid.
OR
What is vapour pressure of a liquid?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 8
(1) If a volatile liquid is placed in an open vessel, the liquid molecules have a tendency to escape in a gaseous state forming vapour and diffuse into surroundings. Hence evaporation takes place continuously, and no equilibrium is attained.

(2) If a liquid is placed in a closed vessel, the vapour molecules get accumulated on its surface. These vapour molecules are in continuous random motion. They collide with each other, with walls of a container and surface of the liquid, and return to the liquid state. This reverse phenomenon is called condensation.

(3) After some time, rates of evaporation and condensation become equal and an equilibrium is established between liquid and vapour phases. At this stage the vapour exerts a constant pressure called vapour pressure on liquid surface at constant temperature.

(4) Vapour pressure : The pressure exerted by the vapour of a liquid (or solid) when it is in equilibrium with the liquid (or solid) phase at a constant temperature is called the vapour pressure of the liquid (or solid).

(5) The vapour pressure of a liquid increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 31.
Explain the following terms :
(1) Relative vapour pressure of a solution
(2) Lowering of vapour pressure of a solution
(3) Relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Answer:
(1) Relative vapour pressure of a solution : If Po is the vapour pressure of a pure liquid (solvent) and P is the vapour pressure of a solution after adding a nonvolatile solute, then, relative vapour pressure = \(\frac{P}{P_{0}}\).

(2) Lowering of vapour pressure of a solution :
When a nonvolatile solute is added to a pure solvent, the surface area is covered by the solute molecule decreasing the rate of evaporation, hence its vapour pressure decreases. This decrease in vapour pressure is called lowering of vapour pressure.
If P0 is the vapour pressure of a pure solvent (liquid) and P is the vapour pressure of the solution, where P < P0, then, (P0 – P) is the lowering of the vapour pressure.

(3) Relative lowering of vapour pressure : If P0 and P are the respective vapour pressures of a pure liquid (solvent) and the solution containing a non-volatile solute then P < P0. Hence, P0 – P represents the lowering of the vapour pressure due to addition of a nonvolatile solute.
∴ Relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}=\frac{\Delta P}{P_{0}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 32.
State and explain Raoult’s law for solutions of nonvolatile solutes.
Answer:
(a) Statement of Raoult’s law : The law states that the vapour pressure of a solvent over the solution of a nonvolatile solute is equal to the vapour pressure of the pure solvent multiplied by mole fraction of the solvent at constant temperature.

(b) Explanation : Let P0 and P be the vapour pressures of a pure solvent and a solution respectively. If x1 is the mole fraction of the solvent then Raoult’s law can be represented as,
P = x1P0
For a binary solution containing one solute, if x1 and x2 are mole fractions of a solvent and a solute respectively then,
x1 + x2 = 1
∴ x1 = 1 – x2
∴ P = x1P0
= (1 – x2) P0
= P0 – x2P0
= P0 – P = x2P0
∴ P0 – P = x2P0
∴ x2 = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
P0 – P = ΔP is the lowering of vapour pressure
∴ x2 = \(\frac{\Delta P}{P_{0}}\)
In the equation, P0 – P/P0 is called relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Hence Raoult’s law can also be stated as the relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to mole fraction of the solute.

Question 33.
Show that relative lowering of vapour pressure is a colligative property.
Answer:
Consider a binary solution containing a nonvolatile solute. If P0 and P are vapour pressures of a pure solvent and the solution respectively then, Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = P0 – P
Relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
By Raoult’s law,
\(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}=x_{2}\)
where x2 is mole fraction of the solute. Therefore the relative lowering of vapour pressure is a colligative property.

Question 34.
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with mole fraction of a solvent in solution.
OR
Explain the variation of vapour pressure with the concentration of a solution.
Answer:
The vapour pressure of a pure solvent decreases when a nonvolatile solute is dissolved in it. Consider a pure solvent with vapour pressure P0 and mole fraction x1. For a solution containing a non-volatile solute, if x1 and x2 are the mole fractions of a solvent and a solute respectively, then x1 + x2 = 1 and x1 < 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 9
By Raoult’s law, P = x1 × P0. As the mole fraction of a solvent in the solution increases the vapour pressure increases as shown in the above figure 2.5. When x1 becomes equal to 1, the vapour pressure becomes P0, i.e. the vapour pressure of a pure solvent.

If at any mole fraction of a solvent, the vapour of the solution is P, then the lowering of vapour pressure will be, ΔP = P0 – P.

Question 35.
Derive a relation between relative lowering of vapour pressure and molar mass of non-volatile solute.
Answer:
Consider a solution in which W1 gram of a solvent of molar mass (or molecular weight) M2 contains W2 gram of a solute of molar mass M2. Then
number of moles of a solvent = n1 = \(\frac{W_{1}}{M_{1}}\)
Number of moles of a solute = n2 = \(\frac{W_{2}}{M_{2}}\)
∴ Total number of moles = n = n1 + n2
Mole fraction of the solvent = x1 = \(\frac{n_{1}}{n}\)
Mole fraction of the solute = x2 = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 10
In the case of an ideal solution which is a dilute solution, the concentration and the number of moles of the solute are very low, i.e. n2 << n1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 11
If P0 and P are the vapour pressures of a pure solvent and a solution respectively, then relative lowering of vapour pressure = \(\frac{P_{0}-P}{P_{0}}\)
By Raoult’s law
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 12
Hence by measuring the vapour pressure of a pure solvent and a solution, the molar mass of the dissolved nonvolatile substances can be determined.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Solved Examples 2.6 – 2.7

Question 36.
Solve the following :

(1) The vapour pressure of a pure liquid at 298 K is 4 × 104 Nm-2. When a nonvolatile solute is dissolved the vapour pressure becomes 3.65 × 104 Nm-2. Calculate (A) relative vapour pressure, (B) lowering of vapour pressure and (C) relative lowering of vapour pressure.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 4 × 104 Nm-2
P = 3.65 × 104 Nm-2
(A) Relative vapour pressure = \(\frac{P}{P_{0}}\)
= \(\frac{3.65 \times 10^{4}}{4 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 0.9125

(B) Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = P0 – P
= 4 × 104 – 3.65 × 104
= (4 – 3.65) × 104
= 0.35 × 104 Nm-2 = 3.5 × 103 Nm-2

(C) Relative lowering of vapour pressure is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 13
Ans. (A) 0.9125 (B) 3.5 × 103 Nm-2 (C) 0.0875

(2) A pure liquid has vapour pressure 5.2 × 104 Pa at 298 K. When a solute is dissolved, the mole fraction of it is 0.02 in the solution. Find the vapour pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 5.2 × 104 Pa
x2 = 0.02
P = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 14
Ans. Vapour pressure of the solution
= 5.096 × 104 Pa

(3) The vapour pressure of pure benzene is 640 mm of Hg. 2.175 × 10-3 kg of nonvolatile solute is added to 39 gram of benzene, the vapour pressure of solution is 600 mm of Hg. Calculate molar mass of solute (C = 12, H = 1).
Solution :
Given : P0 = 640 mm Hg
W1 = 39 g benzene = 39 × 10-3 kg
W2 = 2.175 × 10-3 kg
P = 600 mm Hg
M1 = 78 × 10-3 kg, M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 15
Ans. Molar mass of a solute = 69.6 × 10-3 kg mol-1

(4) In an experiment, 18.04 g of mannitol were dissolved in 100 g of water. The vapour pressure of water was lowered by 0.309 mm Hg from 17.535 mm Hg. Calculate the molar mass of mannitol.
Solution :
Given : Mass of a solute (mannitol)
= W2 = 18.04 g
Mass of a solvent (water) = W1 = 100 g
Vapour pressure of a solvent (water)
= P0
= 17.535 mm Hg
Lowering of vapour pressure = ΔP = 0.309 mm Hg
Molar mass of H2O = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of solute (mannitol) = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 16
Ans. Molar mass of mannitol = 184.3 g mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(5) The vapour pressure of 2.1% solution of a non-electrolyte in water at 100 °C is 755 mm Hg. Calculate the molar mass of the solute.
Solution :
Given : At 100 °C, vapour pressure of water = P0 = 760 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of the solution = P = 755 mm Hg
Since the solution is 2.1 % by mass,
Mass of solute (nonelectrolyte) = W2 = 2.1 g
Mass of water = W1 = 100 – 2.1 = 97.9 g
Molar mass of water = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of nonelectrolyte = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 17
Ans. Molar mass of nonelectrolyte = 58.69 g mol-1

(6) Calculate the mass of a nonvolatile solute (molar mass 40 × 10-3 kg/mol) which is dissolved in 114 × 10-3 kg octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%.
Solution :
Given : Molar mass of solute = M2 =40 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of solvent (octane) = W1 = 114 × 10-3 kg
If vapour pressure of octane = P0 = 100
Vapour pressure of solution = P = 80
Molar mass of octane (C8H18) = 114 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of solute = W2 = ?
In this solution, since the vapour pressure is decreased by greater extent, 100 – 80 = 20% the solution must be concentrated and number of moles of solute must be large so that n1 + n2 ≠ n1
Hence Raoult’s law must be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 18
∴ Mass of solute dissolved = W
= moles × molar mass = 0.25 × 40 × 10-3
= 0.01 kg
Ans. Mass of solute dissolved = 0.01 kg

(7) The vapour pressure of water is 16.8 mm Hg at a certain temperature. If the vapour pressure of the solution is 16.78 mm, find the molality of the solution.
Solution :
Given : P0 = 16.8 mm Hg; P = 16.78 mm Hg
Molar mass of water = M1 = 18 g mol-1
Molality of the solution = m = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 19
Ans. Molality of the solution = 0.66 m

Question 37.
Explain the effect of temperature on the vapour pressure of a liquid.
Answer:
The vapour pressure of a liquid is the pressure of the vapour in equilibrium with the liquid at a given temperature. The evaporation of a liquid requires thermal energy. Hence, as temperature rises, the vapour pressure rises until it becomes equal to the external pressure, generally the atmospheric pressure, 101.3 kNm-2 (1 atm). This temperature is called the normal boiling point of the liquid.

Question 38.
What is boiling point of liquid?
OR
Define boiling point.
Answer:
The boiling point of a liquid is defined as the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the liquid becomes equal to the external pressure, i.e., the atmospheric pressure (1 atm), e.g., the boiling point of water at 1 atm is 373 K. m

Question 39.
Explain the elevation in the boiling point of a solution.
Answer:
The elevation in the boiling point of a solution is defined as the difference between the boiling points of the solution and the pure solvents at a given pressure, e.g. If T0 and T are the boiling points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the elevation in boiling point, ΔTb = T – T0. It is a colligative property.

Question 40.
What are the units of molal elevation constant?
Answer:
Boiling point elevation, ΔTb is given by,
ΔTb = Kb × m
where m is molality in mol kg-1 and Kb is molal elevation constant or abullioscopic constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 20
∴ Kb has units K kg mol-1 (or °C kg mol-1)
Therefore, molal elevation constant is the elevation in boiling point produced by 1 molal solution of a nonvolatile solute.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 41.
Derive the relation between molar mass of the solute and boiling point elevation.
Answer:
The boiling point elevation, ΔTb of a solution is directly proportional to molality (m) of the solution.
∴ ΔTb ∝ m
ΔTb = Kb m
where Kb is a proportionality constant
If m = 1 molal, then
ΔTb = Kb
where Kb is called molal elevation constant.
The molality of the solution is given by,
Number of moles of the solute, m = \(\frac{\text { Number of moles of the solute }}{\text { Weight of the solvent in } \mathrm{kg}}\)
Let W1 = Weight (in gram) of a solvent,
W2 = Weight (in gram) of a solute
M2 = Molecular weight of the solute
Then the molality (m) of the solution is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 21
If the weights and molecular weight are expressed in kg, then,
\(\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}=K_{\mathrm{b}} \times \frac{W_{2}}{W_{1} M_{2}}\)

Question 42.
Define molal elevation constant (Ebullioscopic constant)? Does it depend on the nature of a solute ? What are its units ?
Answer:
(1) Molal elevation constant (Ebullioscopic constant) : It is defined as the elevation in boiling point, produced by dissolving one mole of a solute in 1 kg (or 1000 gram) of a solvent (i.e. 1 molal solution).
The elevation in the boiling point,
ΔTb is given by ΔTb = Kb × m
where Kb is molal elevation constant and m is molality of the solution.
∴ When m = 1, ΔTb = Kb
(2) Kb depends only on the nature of the solvent.
(3) Kb does not depend on the nature of the solute.
(4) It does not depend on concentration of the solution.
(5) The units of molal elevation constant are :
(A) K kg mol-1 and (B) Km-1.

Solved Examples 2.8

Question 43.
Solve the following :

(1) Calculate the (i) elevation in the boiling point and (ii) the boiling point of 0.05 m aqueous solution of glucose. (Kb = 0.52 Km-1)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of the solution = m = 0.05 m
Molal elevation constant = Kb = 1.86 K kg mol-1
Boiling point of pure water = T0 = 373 K
Elevation in the boiling point = ΔTb = ?
Boiling point of solution = Tb = ?

(i) ΔTb = Kb × m
= 0.52 × 0.05
= 0.026K

(ii) The elevation in the boiling point is given by,
ΔTb = Tb – T0
∴ Boiling point of a solution,
Tb = T0 + ΔTb
= 373 + 0.026
= 373.026 K
Ans. ΔTb = 0.026 K, Tb = 373.026 K

(2) 0.18 molal aqueous solution of a substance boils at 373.25 K. Calculate the molal elevation constant of water. (Boiling point of water is 373.15 K)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = m = 0.18 m
Boiling point of water = T0 = 373.15 K
Boiling of the solution = Tb = 373.25
Molal elevation constant = Kb = ?
Elevation in boiling point = ΔTb
= Tb – T0
= 373.25 – 373.15
= 0.1 K
ΔTb = Kb × m
∴ Kb = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}}{m}=\frac{0.1}{0.18}\) = 0.5556 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal elevation constant of water
= 0.5556 K kg mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(3) The boiling point of benzene is 353.23 K. When 1.80 gram of non-volatile solute was dissolved in 90 gram of benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. Calculate the molar mass of solute. [Kb for benzene = 2.53 K kg mol-1]
Solution :
Given : \(T_{b}^{0}\) = 353.23 K; Tb = 354.11 K
W1 = 90 g; W2 = 1.8 g; Kb = 2.53 K kg mol-1
Molar mass = M2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – \(T_{b}^{0}\) = 354.11 – 353.23 = 0.88 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 22
Ans. Molar mass = M2 = 57.5 g mol-1

(4) Boiling point of a solvent is 80.2°C. When 0.419 g of the solute of molar mass 252.4 g mol-1 is dissolved in 75 g of the above solvent, the boiling point of the solution is found to be 80.256 °C. Find the molal elevation constant.
Solution :
Given : T0 = (273 + 80.2) K
Tb = 273 + 80.256 (K)
W1 = 75g
W2 = 0.419 g
M2 = 252.4 g mol-1
Kb = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= (273 + 80.256) – (273 + 80.2)
= 0.056 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 23
Ans. Kb = 2.53 K kg mol-1

(5) 3.795 g of sulphur is dissolved in 100 g of CS2. This solution boils at 319.81 K. What is the molecular formula of sulphur in solution? Theboiling point of CS2 is 319.45 K.
(Given that Kb for CS2 =2.42 K kg mol-1 and atomic mass of S = 32.)
Solution :
Given : W2 = 3.795 g; W1 = 100 g CS2
Tb = 319.81 K; T0 = 319.45 K
Kb = 2.42 K kg mol-1 M2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 319.81 – 319.45 = 0.36 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 24
Number of S atoms in molecule = \(\frac{255.1}{32}\)
= 7.972
≅ 8
Ans. Formula of sulphur in CS2 solution = S8

(6) Calculate the mass in grams of an impurity of molar mass 100 g mol-1 which would be required to raise the boiling point of 50 g of chloroform by 0.30°C. (Kb for chloroform = 3.63 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : M2 = 100 g mol-1
W1 = 50 g chloroform
W2 = ?
ΔTb = 0.30°C.
Kb = 3.63 K kg mol-1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 25
Ans. Weight of impurity = 0.4132 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(7) A solution containing 0.5126 g of naphthalene (molar mass = 128.17 g mol-1) in 50.0 g of CCl4 gives a boiling point elevation of 0.402 °C. While a solution of 0.6216 g of unknown solute in the same mass of the solvent gives a boiling point elevation of 0.647 °C. Find the molar mass of the unknown solute. (Kb for CCl4 = 5.03 K kg mol-1 of solvent)
Solution:
Given : For naphthalene solution :
W2 = 0.5126 g
W1 = 50 g
M2 = 128.17 g mol-1
Kb = 5.03 K kg mol-1
ΔTb = 0.402°C
For unknown solute :
W’1 = 50g
W’2 = 0.6216 g
ΔT’b = 0.647°C
M’2 = ?
For the solution of unknown substance,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 26
Ans. Molecular weight of unknown substance = 96.65 g mol-1

(8) A solution containing 0.73 g of camphor (molar mass 152 g mol-1) in 36.8 g of acetone (boiling point 56.3°C) boils at 56.55°C. A solution of 0.564 g of unknown compound in the same weight of acetone boils at 56.46°C. Calculate the molar mass of the unknown compound.
Solution:
Given : Mass of solute = W2 = 0.73 g camphor
Mass of solvent = W1 = 36.8 g
Molar Mass of solute = M2 = 152 g mol-1
Boiling point of acetone = T0 = (273 + 56.3) K
Mass of unknown solute = W’2 = 0.564 g
Mass of solvent = W’1 = 36.8 g
Boiling point of solution of camphor = Tb = (273 + 56.55) K
Boiling point solution of unknown compound = T’b = (273 + 56.46) K
Molar mass of unknown compound = M’2 = ?

For camphor solution,
∴ ΔTb = Tb – T0
= (273 + 56.55) – (273 + 56.3)
= 0.25 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 27
For a solution of unknown compound
ΔT’b = ΔT’b – T0
= (273 + 56.46) – (273 + 56.3)
= 0.16 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 28
Ans. Molar mass of the compound = 183.5 g mol-1

(9) 0.12 molal solution of a substance boils at 373.21°K. Calculate molal elevation constant of the solvent.
Solution :
Given : Concentration of solution = m = 0.12
Boiling point of the solution = Tb = 373.21 K
For solvent (water) T0 = 373.15 K
Molal elevation constant, Kb = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= 373.21 – 373.15
= 0.06 K
ΔTb = Kb × m
∴ Kb = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{b}}}{m}\)
= \(\frac{0.06}{0.12}\)
=0.5 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal elevation constant = Kb = 0.5 K kg mol-1

(10) Boiling point of water at 750 mm of Hg is 99.63 °C. How much sucrose must be added to 500 g of water so that it boils at 100 °C? (Kb = 5.02 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Boiling point of water = T0 = 273 + 99.63
= 372.63 K
Boiling point of a solution = Tb = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Mass of a solvent (water) = W1 = 500 g
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = M2
= 342 g mol-1
Kb = 5.02 K kg mol-1
Mass of solute (sucrose) = W2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0
= 373 – 372.63
= 0.37 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 29
Ans. Mass of sucrose required to be added = 12.60 g

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(11) A solution of phosphorus prepared by dissolving 0.0175 kg of phosphorus in 0.08 kg of CS2 has a boiling point 319.87 K. If Kb for CS2 is 2.4 K kg mol-1 and atomic mass of phosphorus is 31 × 10-3 kg mol-1, find the formula of phos-phorus. (Boiling point of CS2 = 319.45 K)
Solution :
Given : Mass of solvent (CS2) = W1 = 0.08 kg
Mass of phosphorus = W2 = 0.0175 kg
Boiling point of CS2 = T0 = 319.45 K
Boiling point of solution = Tb = 319.87 K
Molal elevation constant = Kb = 2.4 K kg mol-1
Atomic mass of phosphorus = 31 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Molecular formula of phosphorus = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 319.87 – 319.45 = 0.42 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 30
∴ Number of atoms in a molecule of phosphorus = \(\frac{\text { molar mass of phosphorus }}{\text { atomic mass of phosphorus }}\)
= \(\frac {125}{31}\)
= 4.032
≅ 4
Hence the molecular formula of phosphorus is P4 in CS2.
Ans. Molecular formula of phosphorus = P4

(12) Boiling point of water at 750 mm of Hg is 99.63 °C. How much sucrose must be added to 500 g of water so that it boils at 100 °C? (Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Pressure = P = 750 mm Hg
T0 = 273 + 99.63 = 372.63 K
Tb = 273 + 100 = 373 K
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = 342 × 10-3 kg mol-1
W1 = 500 g = 0.5 kg
Mass of sucrose to be added = W2 = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 373 – 372.63 = 0.37 K
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 31
Ans. Mass of sucrose to be added = 121.7 × 10-3 kg
= 121.7 g

(13) 35 % (W/W) solution of ethylene glycol in water, an anti-freezer used in automobiles in radiators as a coolant. It lowers freezing point of water to -17.6 °C. Calculate the mole fraction of the components.
Solution :
35% (W/W) means 100 g solution contains 35 g ethylene glycol (CH2OH-CH2OH) and 65 g H2O.
Molar mass of water = 18 g mol-1
Molar mass of ethylene glycol (CH2OH-CH2OH) = 62 g mol-1
Number of moles of water = n1 = \(\frac{65}{18}\) = 3.611 mol
Number of moles of ethylene glycol = n2 = \(\frac{35}{62}\)
= 0.5645 mol
Total moles = n = n1 + n2 = 3.611 + 0.5645
= 4.1755 mol
Mole fraction of ethylene glycol = x2
\(=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}=\frac{0.5645}{4.1755}\) = 0.1352
∴ Mole fraction of water = 1 – x2 = 1 – 0.1352
= 0.8648
Ans. Mole fraction of water = 0.8648
Mole fraction of ethylene glycol = 0.1352

Question 44.
Define freezing point of a liquid.
Answer:
The freezing point of a liquid is defined as the temperature at which the solid coexists in the equilibrium with the liquid and the vapour pressure of the liquid and the solid are equal.

Question 45.
Explain the depression in the freezing point of a solution.
Answer:
The depression in the freezing point of a solution is defined as the difference between the freezing points of a pure solvent and that of the solution.
If T0 and T are the respective freezing points of a pure solvent and a solution, then the depression in the freezing point ΔTf is given by,
ΔTf = T0 – T (T < T0)
The depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) is a colligative property.

Question 46.
What causes depression in freezing point ?
OR
Explain, freezing point depression as a consequence of vapour pressure lowering.
Answer:
The freezing point of a liquid is the temperature at which the liquid and the solid have the same vapour pressure.

Addition of a nonvolatile solute to a liquid decreases the freezing point, i.e., the freezing point of the solution is less than that of the pure solvent. This is due to the lowering of the vapour pressure of the solvent by the addition of the nonvolatile solute.

When a liquid is cooled from the point A, its vapour pressure decreases and at the point B, it freezes (solidifies).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 32
In case of a solution, since the vapour pressure is lowered, the freezing point decreases. Hence, if the solution is cooled from the point A’, it freezes at lower temperature B’, than the pure liquid. This is also due to separation of solvent molecules due to solute molecules decreasing their intermolecular attraction.

If T0 and T are the freezing points of a pure solvent and the solution, then, the depression in the freezing point is given by,
ΔTf = T0 – T.
This depression ΔTf depends on the lowering of the vapour pressure (P0 – P). ΔTf ∝ (P0 – P), where P0 and P are the vapour pressures of the pure liquid and the solution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 47.
What is a relationship between freezing point depression and concentration of solute (or solution)?
Answer:
It is observed experimentally that as the concentration of a solution increases, the freezing point of the solution decreases and hence the depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) increases.

The depression in the freezing point of a solution is directly proportional to the molal concentration (expressed in mol kg-1) of the solution.
Thus,
ΔTf ∝ m
where m is the molality of the solution.
∴ ΔTf = Kfm, where Kf is a constant of proportionality. If m = 1 molal,
ΔTf = Kf. Hence Kf is called the cryoscopic constant or molal depression constant. Kf is characteristic of the solvent.

Question 48.
What are the units of molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant?
Answer:
The freezing point depression, ΔTf is given by,
ΔTf = Kf × m
where m is molality in mol kg-1 and Kf is molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 33
∴ Kf has unit K kg mol-1 (or °C kg mol-1)
Therefore cryoscopic constant is the depression in freezing point produced by 1 molal solution of a nonvolatile solute.

Question 49.
Write the formula to determine molar mass of a solute using freezing point depression method.
Answer:
M2 = \(\frac{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times W_{2} \times 1000}{W_{1} \times \Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}\)
where
Kf = Molal depression constant
ΔTf = Depression in freezing point
W1 = Mass of a solvent
W2 = Mass of a solute.
M2 = Molar mass of solute

Question 50.
Define cryoscopic constant (or molal depression constant).
Answer:
Molal depression constant : It is defined as the depression in freezing point, produced by dissolving one mole of a solute in 1 kg (or 1000 g) of a solvent (i.e. 1 molal solution).

Solved Examples 2.9

Question 51.
Solve the following :

(1) 1.35 g of a substance when dissolved in 55 g acetic acid produced a depression of 0.618°C in a freezing point. Calculate the molar mass of the dissolved substance. (Kf = 3.865 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Mass of a solvent = W1 = 55 g
Mass of a solute = W2 = 1.35 g
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.618 °C
Molal depression constant = Kf = 3.865 K kg mol-1
Molar mass of a solute = M2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 34
Ans. Molar mass of the substance = 153.5 g mol-1

(2) When certain amount of sucrose is dissolved in 1 kg of water, the freezing point of the solution is found to be 272.8 K. If the molecular mass of sucrose is 342 g mol-1 and Kf for water is 1.86 K kg mol-1, calculate the amount of sucrose present in the solution.
Solution :
Given : W1 = Mass of the solvent = 1 kg
T0 = Freezing point of pure water = 273 K
Tf = Freezing point of the solution = 272.8 K
ΔTf = T0 – Tf = Depression in freezing point
= 273 K – 272.8 K
= 0.2 K
M2 = Molecular mass of the solute
= 342 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Kf = Molal freezing point depression constant for water
= 1.86 K kg mol-1
W2 = Mass of the solute = ?
ΔTf = T0 – Tf
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 35
Ans. Mass of sucrose = 36.78 × 10-3 kg

(3) The freezing point of a pure solvent is 315 K. On addition of 0.5 mole of urea in 1 kg of the solvent, the freezing point decreases by 3 K. Calculate the molal depression constant for the solvent.
Solution :
Given :
m = Molality of urea = 0.5 m
ΔTf = Depression in the freezing point = 3 K
Kf = Molal depression constant for the solvent = ?
ΔTf = Kf × m
∴ Kf = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{m}\)
= \(\frac{3}{0.5}\)
= 6 K kg mol-1
Ans. Molal depression constant = 6 K kg mol-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(4) The freezing point of pure benzene is 278.4 K. Calculate the freezing point of the solution when 2g of a solute having molecular weight 100 is added to 100 g of benzene. (Kf for benzene = 5.12 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Kf for benzene = 5.12 K kg mol-1
T0 = Freezing point of the solvent = 278.4 K
W1 = Mass of the solvent = 100 g = 0.1 kg
W2 = Mass of the solute = 2g = 2 × 10-3 kg
M2 = Molecular mass of the solute = 100 g mol-1
= 100 × 10-3 kg mol-1
T = Freezing point of the solution = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 36
Ans. Freezing point of the solution = 277.376 K

(5) 0.635 × 10-3 kg of a substance of molar mass 190 × 10-3 kg mol-1 was dissolved in 30.5 × 10-3 kg of a solvent. If the depression in the freezing point is 0.62 °C, find the molal depression constant of the solvent.
Solution :
Given : Mass of solvent = W1 = 30.5 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solute = W2 = 0.635 × 10-3 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.62 °C (or K)
Molar mass of the substance = M2 = 190 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Molal depression constant = Kf = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 37
Ans. Molal depression constant = Kf
= 5.66 K kg mol-1

(6) The boiling point of an aqueous solution is 100.18 °C. Find the freezing point of the solution. (Given : Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1, Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1)
Solution :
Given : Tb = 100.18 °C + 273 = 373.18 K
Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1; Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1
Boiling point of water = T0 = 373 K
Tf = ?
ΔTb = Tb – T0 = 373.18 – 373 = 0.18 K
If m is the molality of the solution, then
ΔTb = Kb × m and ΔTf = Kf × m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 38
Freezing point of water = T0 = 273 K
ΔTf = T0 – Tf
Hence the freezing point of the solution is,
Tf = T0 – ΔTf = 273 – 0.6438 = 272.3562 K
OR Freezing point of solution is -0.6438 °C.
Ans. Freezing point of the solution
= 272.3562 K
= -0.6438 °C

(7) 1.0 × 10-3 kg of urea when dissolved in 0.0985 kg of a solvent, decreases freezing point of the solvent by 0.211 K. 1.6 × 10-3 kg of another nonelectrolyte solute when dissolved in 0.086 kg of the same solvent depresses the freezing point by 0.34 K. Calculate the molar mass of the another solute. (Given molar mass of urea = 60)
Solution :
Given : Mass of Urea = W2 = 1 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solvent = W1 = 0.0985 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔTf = 0.211 K
Molar mass of urea = M2 = 60 g mol-1
= 60 × 10-3 kg mol-1
Mass of another solute = W’2 = 1.6 × 10-3 kg
Mass of solvent = W’1 = 0.086 kg
Depression in freezing point = ΔT’f = 0.34 K
Molar mass of another solute = 60 × 10-3 kg mol-1

From urea solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 39
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 40
For solution of another solute :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 41
Ans. Molar mass of solute = 68.23 g mol-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 52.
What do you understand by the terms :
(1) permeable membrane
(2) semipermeable membrane?
Answer:
(1) Permeable membrane : A membrane which allows free transfer of the solute molecules from a solution of a higher concentration to a solution of a lower concentration through it is called a permeable membrane and the transfer is called diffusion, e.g., a membrane of a paper.

(2) Semipermeable membrane : A membrane which allows free passage of only the solvent molecules but not the large solute molecules or ions of large molecular mass from a solution of a lower concentration (or a pure solvent) to a solution of higher concentration through it, is called a semi-permeable membrane, e.g., parchment paper, complex like Cu2[Fe(CN)6], etc.

Question 53.
Define and explain osmosis.
Answer:
(1) Definition : It is defined as a spontaneous uni-directional flow of the solvent molecules from a pure solvent or a dilute solution to the more concentrated solution through a semipermeable membrane.

Example : A flow of water molecules from a dilute solution into a concentrated glucose solution through a parchment paper.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 42

(2) Explanation : Consider a vessel divided into two compartments by a semipermeable membrane. When one compartment is filled with a pure solvent or a dilute solution and another by concentrated solution, there is a spontaneous of solvent molecules to the concentrated solution. This arises due to higher vapour pressure of a pure solvent or dilute solution than concentrated solution.

Question 54.
Explain the relation between osmotic pressure and concentration of solution.
Ans.
(1) Consider V dm3 of a solution in which n1 moles of a solvent contains n2 moles of a nonvolatile solute at absolute temperature T.

(2) The osmotic pressure, n of a solution is given by,
π = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\)
R is gas constant having value 0.08206 dm3 atm K-1 mol-1 (OR L atm K-1 mol-1). Since concentration, C of a solution is in mol dm-3 or molarity is,
C = \(\frac{n}{V}\) mol dm-3 or M
∴ π = CRT
(If concentration C is expressed in mol m-3 and R = 8.314 J K-1mol-1, then π will be in SI units, pascals or Nm-2.)

Question 55.
Explain the terms :
(1) Isotonic solutions
(2) Hypotonic solutions
(3) Hypertonic solutions.
Answer:
(1) Isotonic solutions : The solutions having the same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.

Explanation : If two solutions of substances A and B contain nA and nB moles dissolved in volume V (in dm3) of the solutions, then their concentrations are,
CA = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3) and
CB = \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\) (in mol dm-3)
If the absolute temperature of both the solutions is T, then by the van’t Hoff equation,
πA = CARTand πB = CBRT where πA and πB are their osmotic pressures.
For the isotonic solutions,
πA = πB
∴ CA = CB
∴ \(\frac{n_{\mathrm{A}}}{V}=\frac{n_{\mathrm{B}}}{V}\)
∴ nA = nB
Hence, equal volumes of the isotonic solutions at the same temperature will contain equal number of moles (hence, equal number of molecules) of the substances.

(2) Hypotonic solutions : When two solutions have different osmotic pressures, then the solution having lower osmotic pressure is said to be a hypotonic solution with respect to the other solution.
Explanation : Consider two solutions of the substances A and B having osmotic pressures πA and πB. If πB is less than πA, then the solution B is a hypotonic solution with respect to the solution A.
Hence, if CA and CB are their concentrations, then, CB < CA. Hence, for equal volumes of the solutions, nA < nA.

(3) Hypertonic solutions : When two solutions have different osmotic pressures, then the solution having higher osmotic pressure is said to be a hypertonic solution with respect to the other solution.
Explanation : Consider two solutions of substances A and B having osmotic pressures πA and πB. If πB is greater than πA, then the solution B is a hypertonic solution with respect to the solution A.
Hence, if CA and CB are their concentrations, then CB > CA. Hence, for equal volume of the solutions, nB > nA.

Question 56.
Explain colligative properties of electrolytes.
Answer:

  • The electrolytic solutions do not exhibit colligative properties similar to nonelectrolytes.
  • The colligative properties of electrolytes are higher than those shown by equimolar solutions of nonelectrolytes.
  • The molar masses of electrolytes determined by colligative properties are found to be considerably lower than their actual molar masses.

Question 57.
Why are the colligative properties of electrolytic solutions greater than those for non-electrolytic solutions with same concentration ?
Answer:

  • The electrolytes in polar solvents or aqueous solutions dissociate into two or more ions whereas nonelectrolytes do not dissociate.
  • Consequently the number of particles in electrolytic solutions are considerably higher than equimolar nonelectrolytic solutions.
  • Therefore the colligative properties of electrolytes are greater than nonelectrolytes with same concentration in solution.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 58.
What is abnormal colligative property? Explain the reasons.
Answer:
Abnormal colligative property : When the experimentally measured colligative property of a solution is different from that calculated theoretically by the van’t Hoff equation or by the laws of osmosis, then the solution is said to have abnormal colligative property.

Explanation : The colligative property depends on the number of solute particles in the solution but it is independent of their nature. Abnormal values of them arise when the dissolved solute undergoes a molecular change like dissociation or association in the solution.
The observed colligative property (or abnormal colligative property ) may be higher or lower than the theoretical value.

(i) Dissociation of the solute molecules : When a solute like an electrolyte is dissolved in a polar solvent like water, it undergoes dissociation, which results in the increase in the number of particles in the solution.

Hence, the observed value of the colligative property becomes higher than the theoretical value, e.g., when one mole of KCl is dissolved in the solution then due to dissociation, KCl → K+ + Cl, the number of particles increases, hence, the colligative properties like osmotic pressure elevation in the boiling point, etc. increase.

(ii) Association of the solute molecules : When a solute like a nonelectrolyte is dissolved in a nonpolar solvent like benzene, it undergoes association forming molecules of higher molecular mass. Hence, the number of the particles in the solution decreases. Therefore the colligative properties like osmotic pressure, elevation in the boiling point, etc., are lower than the theoretical value, e.g., nA → An.
2CH3COOH → (CH3COOH)2
2C6H5COOH → (C6H5COOH)2

Question 59.
Explain abnormal osmotic pressure.
Answer:

  • When the experimentally observed osmotic pressure is different than theoretically calculated value by van’t Hoffs equation then it is called abnormal osmotic pressure.
  • This arises when the dissolved solute undergoes a molecular change like association or dissociation.

Question 60.
Explain abnormal molecular masses.
Answer:
When the observed molecular masses obtained from their colligative properties of the substances are different (higher or lower) than the theoretical or normal values calculated from their molecular formulae, then they are called abnormal molecular masses.

Question 61.
How is van’t Hoff factor related to molecular mass of the substance ?
Answer:
The van’t Hoff factor is also defined as,
actual moles of particles in solution after
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 43
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 44
In case of nonelectrolytes, i < 1.
In case of electrolytes, i > 1. For example for KNO3 and NaCl, i = 2, for Na2SO4, CaCl2, i = 3, etc.

Question 62.
Write modification of expressions of colligative properties with the help of van’t Hoff factor.
Answer:
The modified expressions of colligative properties with the help of van’t Hoff factor i are as follows :
(1) By Raoult’s law :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 45
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 46

Question 63.
Obtain a relation between degree of dissociation and molar mass for an electrolyte.
Answer:
Consider an electrolyte AxBy.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 47
If i is van’t Hoff factor and n is total number of ions produced from dissociation of one mole of electrolyte then, the degree of dissociation α is given by,
α = \(\frac{i-1}{n-1}\)
Now if Mth and Mob are theoretical arid observed molecular (or molar) masses respectively, then,
i = \(\frac{M_{\mathrm{th}}}{M_{\mathrm{ob}}}\)
∵ α(n – 1) = i – 1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 48
This is a relation between degree of dissociation and molecular masses of the dissolved electrolyte AxBy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 64.
Solve the following :

(1) 300 mL solution at 27 °C contains 0.2 mol of a nonvolatile solute. Calculate osmotic pressure of the solution.
Solution :
Given : V= 300 ml = 0.3 dm3 ;
T= 273 + 27 = 300 K
π = 0.2 mol, π = ?
π = \(\frac{n R T}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.2 \times 0.08206 \times 300}{0.3}\)
= 16.41 atm
Ans. Osmotic pressure = π = 16.41 atm.

(2) 200 mL solution at 27 °C contains 10 g of a nonvolatile solute of molar mass 65 g mol-1. What is osmotic pressure of the solution ?
Solution :
Given : V = 200 mL = 0.2 dm3; W = 10 g
M = 65 g mol-1; T= 273 + 27 = 300 K; π = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 49
Ans. Osmotic pressure = π = 18.93 atm.

(3) Calculate the osmotic pressure of 0.2 M glucose solution at 300 K. (R = 8.314 J mol-1 K-1)
Solution :
Given : Concentration of the solution
= C = 0.2 M
= 0.2 mol dm-3
= 0.2 × 103 mol m-3
Temperature = T= 300 K
= 8.314 J mol-1 K-1
The osmotic pressure, π is given by,
π = CRT
= 0.2 × 103 × 8.314 × 300
= 4.988 × 105 Nm-2 (or Pa)
Ans. Osmotic Pressure = 4.988 × 105 Nm-2

(4) A solution of cane sugar containing 18 g L-1 has an osmotic pressure 1.25 atm. Calculate the temperature of the solution. (Molar mass of cane sugar = 342, R = 0.082 lit atm mol-1 K-1)
Solution:
Given : Amount of cane sugar = W = 18 g L-1
Osmotic pressure = π = 1.25 atm
Molar mass of cane sugar = M = 342 g mol-1
Temperature = T = ?
Number of moles of cane sugar
= \(\frac{W}{M}\)
= \(\frac{18}{342}\)
= 0.05263 mol
∴ Concentration of solution = C
= \(\frac{n}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.05263}{1}\)
= 0.05263 mol lit-1
π = CRT
∴ T = \(\frac{\pi}{\mathcal{C R}}\)
= \(\frac{1.25}{0.05263 \times 0.08206}\)
= 289.4 K
Ans. Temperature of solution = 289.4 K

(5) Equal volumes of two solutions, one containing glucose and another urea have osmotic pressures 12.6 atm and 23.8 atm at 25 °C. Calculate the ratio of number of moles of urea to glucose.
Solution :
Given : Osmotic pressure of glucose solution = π1
= 12.6 atm
Osmotic pressure of urea solution = π2
= 23.8 atm
Number of moles of glucose = n1
Number of moles of urea = n2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 50
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 51

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

(6) One litre of a solution containing 25 g glucose has osmotic pressure 3.4 atm at 300 K. If by diluting the solution the osmotic pressure becomes 2.0 atm at the same temperature, what would be its concentration ? (Molar mass of glucose = 180)
Solution :
Given : Mass of solute (glucose) = 25 g
Volume of solution = 1.0 L
Osmotic pressure = π1 = 3.4 atm
After dilution osmotic pressure = π2 = 2 atm
Final concentration = c2 = ?
The number of moles of glucose = n = \(\frac{25}{180}\)
= 0.1389 mol
Initial concentration = c1 = \(\frac{n}{V}\)
= \(\frac{0.1389}{1}\)
At constant temperature, by van’t Hoff-Boyle’s law,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 52
Ans. Concentration of solution = 0.0817 mol L-1

(7) A solution of a substance having mass 1.8 × 10-3 kg has the osmotic pressure of 0.52 atm at 280 K. Calculate the molar mass of the substance used.
[Volume = 1 dm3, R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1]
Solution :
Given : W= 1.8 × 10-3 kg = 1.8 g
π = 0.52 atm; V = 1 dm3
T = 280 K;
Molar mass = M = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 53
Ans. Molar mass = M = 79.53 g mol-1

(8) An organic substance (M = 169 gram mol-1) is dissolved in 2000 cm3 of water. Its osmotic pressure at 12 °C was found to be 0.54 atm. If R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1, calculate the mass of the solute.
Solution :
Given : M = 169 g mol-1
V = 200 cm3 = 0.2 dm3
T = 273 + 125 = 285 K
π = 0.54 atm
R = 0.0821 L atm K-1 mol-1; W = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 54
Ans. Mass of solute = 0.78 g

(9) A solution containing 10 g glucose has osmotic pressure 3.84 atm. If 10 g more glucose is added to the same solution, what will be its osmotic pressure. (Temperature remains constant)
Solution :
Given : Mass of glucose = W1 = 10 g
Mass of more glucose added = W2 = 10 g
Initial osmotic pressure = π1 = 3.84 atm
Final osmotic pressure = π2 = ?
Total mass of glucose in final solution = W1 + W2
W’ = 10 + 10
= 20 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions 55
∴ π2 = \(\pi_{1} \times \frac{W^{\prime}}{W_{1}}\)
= \(3.84 \times \frac{20}{10}\) = 7.68 atm
Ans. Osmotic pressure of the solution = 7.68 atm

(10) A 0.1 m solution of K2SO4 in water has freezing point of -0.43 °C. What is the value of van’t Hoff factor if Kf for water is 1.86 K kg mol-1?
Solution :
Given : m = 0.1 m, ΔTf = 0 – (-0.43) = 0.43 °C
Kf = 1.86 K kg mol-1, i = ?
ΔTf = i × Kf × m
∴ i = \(\frac{\Delta T_{\mathrm{f}}}{K_{\mathrm{f}} \times m}=\frac{0.43}{1.86 \times 0.1}=2.312\)
Ans. van’t Hoff factor = i = 2.312

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 65.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. A molal solution is one that contains one mole of solute in
(a) one litre of the solvent
(b) 1000 g of the solvent
(c) one litre of the solution
(d) 22.4 litre of solution
Answer:
(b) 1000 g of the solvent

2. 10.0 grams of caustic soda when dissolved in 250 cm3 of water, the resultant molarity of solution is
(a) 0.25 M
(b) 0.5 M
(c) 1.0 M
(d) 0.1 M
Answer:
(c) 1.0 M

3. 5 × 10-3 kg of urea is dissolved in 2 × 10-2 kg of water. The percentage by weight of urea is
(a) 15%
(b) 20%
(c) 25%
(d) 30%
Answer:
(b) 20%

4. Vapour pressure of solution of a nonvolatile solute is always
(a) equal to the vapour pressure of pure solvent
(b) higher than vapour pressure of pure solvent
(c) lower than vapour pressure of pure solvent
(d) constant
Answer:
(c) lower than vapour pressure of pure solvent

5. According to the Raoult’s law, the relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to the
(a) mole fraction of solvent
(b) mole fraction of solute
(c) independent of mole fraction of solute
(d) molality of solution
Answer:
(b) mole fraction of solute

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

6. Partial pressure of solvent in solution of non-volatile solute is given by equation,
(a) P = x2P0
(b) P0 = xP
(c) P = x1P0
(d) P0 = x1P
Answer:
(c) P = x1P0

7. When partial pressure of solvent in solution of nonvolatile solute is plotted against its mole fraction, nature of graph is
(a) a straight line passing through origin
(b) a straight line parallel to mole fraction of solvent
(c) a straight line parallel to vapour pressure of solvent
(d) a straight line intersecting vapour pressure axis
Answer:
(a) a straight line passing through origin

8. Colligative property depends only on ………………. in a solution.
(a) Number of solute particles
(b) Number of solvent particles
(c) Nature of solute particles
(d) Nature of solvent particles
Answer:
(a) Number of solute particles

9. Lowering of vapour pressure of solution
(a) is a property of solute
(b) is a property of solute as well as solvent
(c) is a property of solvent
(d) is a colligative property
Answer:
(d) is a colligative property

10. Raoult’s law is not applicable to
(a) solutions of volatile solutes
(b) solutions of electrolytes
(c) dilute solutions
(d) concentrated solutions
Answer:
(d) concentrated solutions

11. The relative lowering of vapour pressure of a solution is proportional to the
(a) mole fraction of the solvent
(b) mole fraction of the solute
(c) amount of the substance
(d) volume of the solvent
Answer:
(b) mole fraction of the solute

12. The vapour pressure of an aqueous solution of glucose at 100 °C is 710 mm Hg. Hence the molality of the solution is
(a) 2.83 m
(b) 3.65 m
(c) 16.47 m
(d) 12.5 m
Answer:
(b) 3.65 m

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

13. Relative vapour pressure lowering depends only on
(a) Mole fraction of solute
(b) Nature of solvent
(c) Nature of solute
(d) Nature of solute and solvent
Answer:
(a) Mole fraction of solute

14. A solution having mole fraction of a solute equal to 0.05 has vapour pressure 20 × 103 Nm-2. Hence the vapour pressure of a pure solvent is
(a) 21.05 × 103 Nm-2
(b) 4 × 105 Nm-2
(c) 1 × 103 Nm-2
(d) 2 × 104 Nm-2
Answer:
(a) 21.05 × 103 Nm-2

15. The addition of the nonvolatile solute into the pure solvent ……………..
(a) increases the vapour pressure of solvent
(b) decreases the boiling point of solvent
(c) decreases the freezing point of solvent
(d) increases the freezing point of solvent
Answer:
(c) decreases the freezing point of solvent

16. A solution having the highest vapour pressure is
(a) 1 M Al2(SO4)3
(b) 0.1 M NaNO3
(c) 1 M BaCl2
(d) 1 M Ca(NO3)2
Answer:
(b) 0.1 M NaNO3

17. Molal elevation constant is elevation in boiling point produced by
(a) 1 g of solute in 100 g of solvent
(b) 100 g of solute in 1000 g of solvent
(c) 1 mole of solute in one litre of solvent
(d) 1 mole of solute in one kg of solvent
Answer:
(d) 1 mole of solute in one kg of solvent

18. The determination of molar mass from elevation in boiling point is called
(a) cryoscopy
(b) osmometry
(c) ebullioscopy
(d) spectroscopy
Answer:
(c) ebullioscopy

19. Which of the following aqueous solutions will have minimum elevation in boiling point ?
(a) 0.1 M KCl
(b) 0.05 M NaCl
(c) 1 M AIPO4
(d) 0.1 M MgSO4
Answer:
(b) 0.05 M NaCl

20. Which of the following solutions shows maximum depression in freezing point ?
(a) 0.5 M Li2SO4
(b) 1 M NaCl
(c) 0.5 M Al2 (SO4)3
(d) 0.5 M BaCl2
Answer:
(c) 0.5 M Al2 (SO4)3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

21. If the freezing point of 0.1 m solution is 272.814 K, then the freezing point of 0.2 m solution will be
(a) 545.628 K
(b) 265.64 K
(c) 272.628 K
(d) 0.482 K
Answer:
(c) 272.628 K

22. At a freezing point,
(a) Vapour pressure of a solution = Vapour pressure of a solid
(b) Vapour pressure of a liquid = Vapour pressure of a solid
(c) Vapour pressure of a liquid > Vapour pressure of a solid
(d) Vapour pressure of a solid > Vapour pressure of a liquid
Answer:
(b) Vapour pressure of a liquid = Vapour pressure of a solid

23. In osmosis
(a) solvent molecules pass from high concentration of solute to low concentration
(b) solvent molecules pass from a solution of low concentration of solute to a solution of high concentration of solute
(c) solute molecules pass from low concentration to high concentration
(d) solute molecules pass from high concentration to low concentration
Answer:
(b) solvent molecules pass from a solution of low concentration of solute to a solution of high concentration of solute

24. As temperature increases
(a) Osmotic pressure and vapour pressure decrease
(b) Vapour pressure and osmotic pressure increase
(c) Vapour pressure increases but osmotic pressure decreases
(d) Osmotic pressure increases but vapour pressure decreases
Answer:
(b) Vapour pressure and osmotic pressure increase

25. A mango kept in a salt solution shrinks. Hence the liquid content in mango with respect to the salt solution is
(a) isotonic
(b) hypertonic
(c) hypotonic
(d) equimolar
Answer:
(c) hypotonic

26. The osmotic pressure of 5% glucose solution at 300 K is
(a) 6.93 × 105 Nm-2
(b) 6.93 × 102 Nm-2
(c) 6.83 Pa
(d) 6.00 × 103 Pa
Answer:
(a) 6.93 × 105 Nm-2

27. 0.1 M solution of A has osmotic pressure xNm-2 at 300 K. If 200 ml of A and 100 ml of 0.2 M solution of nonreactive solute B are mixed then the osmotic pressure will be
(a) 3x
(b) 0.05 x
(c) 1.33 x
(d) 0.75 x
Answer:
(c) 1.33 x

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

28. The solution A is twice hypertonic to the solution B at a given temperature. If the solution A contains 8.6 × 1022 molecules, then the number of molecules present in B are,
(a) 8.6 × 1022
(b) 1.73 × 1023
(c) 3.24 × 1022
(d) 4.3 × 1022
Answer:
(d) 4.3 × 1022

29. Isotonic solutions are the solutions having the same
(a) surface tension
(b) vapour pressure
(c) osmotic pressure
(d) viscosity
Answer:
(c) osmotic pressure

30. If Kb for water is 0.52 Km-1, the boiling point of 0.2 m solution of a nonvolatile solute will be
(a) 371.96 K
(b) 373.104 K
(c) 373.52 K
(d) 374.0 K
Answer:
(b) 373.104 K

31. The vapour pressure of water is 15.5 mm at 20 °C. The lowering of vapour pressure of 0.02 m K Br solution will be
(a) 0.0112 mm Hg
(b) 0.0056 mm Hg
(c) 0.056 mm Hg
(d) 0.31 mm Hg
Answer:
(a) 0.0112 mm Hg

32. Which of the following 0.1 M aqueous solutions will exert highest osmotic pressure ?
(a) Al2(SO4)3
(b) Na2SO4
(c) MgCl2
(d) KCl
Answer:
(a) Al2(SO4)3

33. If equimolar solutions of urea, NaCl, sucrose and BaCl2 have boiling points A, B, C and D, then
(a) A = C < B < D
(b) A = D < B < C
(c) A > B > C < D
(d) A < B < C < D
Answer:
(a) A = C < B < D

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

34. The molar mass of acetic acid obtained by measuring depression in freezing point is 115.8 gmol-1. Hence the degree of association is
(a) 0.482
(b) 0.964
(c) 0.883
(d) 1.12
Answer:
(b) 0.964

35. Δ Tb/m for NaBr solution will have value (Kb = 0.52 K kg mol-1)
(a) 0.52 K mol-1
(b) 0.104 K kg mol-1
(c) 1.24 kg mol-1
(d) 1.04 K kg mol-1
Answer:
(d) 1.04 K kg mol-1

36. 0.2 M urea solution can be isotonic with
(a) 0.1 M KBr solution
(b) 0.1 M glucose solution
(c) 0.15 m NaCl solution
(d) 0.2 M KBr solution
Answer:
(a) 0.1 M KBr solution

37. The osmotic pressure of 0.1 M HCl solution at 27 °C will be
(a) 2.46 atm
(b) 0.164 atm
(c) 4.92 atm
(d) 0.0082 atm
Answer:
(c) 4.92 atm

38. If a, b, c and d are the van’t Hoff factors for Na2SO4, glucose and K4[Fe(CN)6] then
(a) a > b > c
(b) a < b < c
(c) b < a < c
(d) c < a < b
Answer:
(c) b < a < c

39. The osmotic pressure of 0.2 M KCl solution at 310 K is
(a) 10.17 atm
(b) 5.084 atm
(c) 8.36 atm
(d) 12.2 atm
Answer:
(a) 10.17 atm

40. A temperature at which 0.1 M KCl solution will have osmotic pressure 10 atm will be
(a) 408 °C
(b) 263 °C
(c) 310 °C
(d) 337 °C
Answer:
(d) 337 °C

41. 5 % solution of glucose is isotonic with a solution of urea (M = 60). Hence the weight of urea present in the solution is
(a) 1.67 g
(b) 6.0 g
(c) 18.6 g
(d) 1.2 g
Answer:
(a) 1.67 g

42. Abnormal molar mass is produced by
(a) association of solute
(b) dissociation of solute
(c) both association and dissociation of solute
(d) separation by semipermeable membrane
Answer:
(c) both association and dissociation of solute

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Solutions

43. The van’t Hoff factor for an aqueous solution of an electrolyte is
(a) less than 1
(b) zero
(c) greater than 1
(d) equal to 1
Answer:
(c) greater than 1

44. The value of van’t Hoff factor will be minimum for
(a) 0.05 M AlCl3
(b) 0.2 M NaNO3
(c) 5.0 M glucose
(d) 0.1 M H2SO4
Answer:
(c) 5.0 M glucose

45. van’t Haff factor for K4[FeC(N)6] dissociated 10% is
(a) 1.1
(b) 1.4
(c) 0.86
(d) 1.6
Answer:
(b) 1.4

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
Annual General Meeting is held _________ in a year.
(a) once
(b) twice
(c) thrice
Answer:
(a) once

Question 2.
Annual General Meeting is convened by _________
(a) Creditors
(b) Board of Directors
(c) Committee
Answer:
(b) Board of Directors

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 3.
First Annual General Meeting shall be held within _________ months of the closing of the financial year.
(a) 6
(b) 9
(c) 15
Answer:
(b) 9

Question 4.
The quorum for the Annual General Meeting of a public company with 10,000 shareholders is _________ members.
(a) 5
(b) 30
(c) 15
Answer:
(b) 30

Question 5.
First Board Meeting is held within _________ days of the date of its incorporation.
(a) 30
(b) 15
(c) 45
Answer:
(a) 30

Question 6.
The Gap between two Board Meetings should not be more than _________ days.
(a) 30
(b) 60
(c) 120
Answer:
(c) 120

Question 7.
With the help of technology _________ meeting is held for Board of Directors.
(a) Visual
(b) Virtual
(c) Audio
Answer:
(b) Virtual

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 8.
The Secretary has to get the signatures of the members present at the meeting in _________ ‘Attendance Book’.
(a) Directors
(b) Members
(c) Creditors
Answer:
(b) Members

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Directors (1) 21 days
(b) Annual General Meeting (2) Statutory Report
(c) Auditor (3) Preference shareholders
(d) Notice – Board Meeting (4) Extra-Ordinary General Meeting
(e) Class Meeting (5) General Meeting
(6) 7 days
(7) Annual Report
(8) Debenture holders
(9) Annual General Meeting
(10) Committee Meeting

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Directors (10) Committee Meeting
(b) Annual General Meeting (7) Annual Report
(c) Auditor (9) Annual General Meeting
(d) Notice – Board Meeting (6) 7 days
(e) Class Meeting (3) Preference shareholders

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
A meeting in which Directors are elected.
Answer:
Annual General Meeting

Question 2.
A meeting of Shareholders is held after the financial year is over.
Answer:
Annual General Meeting

Question 3.
A meeting of the Board of Directors was held with the help of technology.
Answer:
Virtual Meeting

Question 4.
The quorum for Annual General Meeting of a public company with 4000 shareholders.
Answer:
15 Members

Question 5.
The Gap between two Annual General Meetings should not be more than.
Answer:
15 months

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 6.
The quorum for Board Meetings.
Answer:
1/3rd rd or 2 directors (whichever is higher)

Question 7.
The Gap between the two Board Meetings should not be more than.
Answer:
120 days

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
30 clear days’ notice should be given in case of the Annual General meeting.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Shareholders can appoint a proxy to attend and vote at the meeting on their behalf.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Board Meetings are called once a year.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Debenture holders are the owners of the company.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Directors have to perform duties related to Annual General Meeting.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Quorum is just before the commencement of the meeting.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 7.
Secretary takes down the notes of the proceedings of the meeting.
Answer:
True

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Shareholders Meeting, Directors Meeting, Committee Meeting.
Answer:
Shareholders meeting

Question 2.
Board Meeting, Committee Meeting, Class Meeting.
Answer:
Class Meeting

Question 3.
AGM, EOGM, Committee Meeting.
Answer:
Committee Meeting

Question 4.
General Meeting, Class Meeting, Creditors Meeting.
Answer:
Creditors Meeting

Question 5.
Debenture holders Meeting, Creditors Meeting, Class Meeting.
Answer:
Class Meeting

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
Auditor is appointed in _________
Answer:
Annual General Meeting

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 2.
An Extra-Ordinary General Meeting is held _________
Answer:
under special circumstances

Question 3.
Minutes of the meeting is the duty of _________
Answer:
Secretary

Question 4.
Directors are appointed in _________
Answer:
Annual General Meeting

Question 5.
Minutes of the meeting has to be drafted by the secretary in _________
Answer:
15 days

Question 6.
Auditor is appointed for a period of _________
Answer:
1 year

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) …………………….. Annual General Meeting
(2) Proxy ……………………….
(3) ……………………. Annual Report
(4) Minutes ……………………….
(5) …………………… Notes of the proceedings of a meeting
(6) Notice of Board Meeting ……………………….

(Shareholder, 15 days, Secretary, 7 days, Auditor, Annual General Meeting)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Auditor Annual General Meeting
(2) Proxy Shareholder
(3) Annual General Meeting Annual Report
(4) Minutes 15 days
(5) Secretary Notes of the proceedings of a meeting
(6) Notice of Board Meeting 7 days

1H. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
In a Partnership Firm, there is the separation of ownership and management.
Answer:
In a Joint Stock Company, there is the separation of ownership and management.

Question 2.
The interval between 2 Annual General Meetings should be no more than 12 months.
Answer:
The interval between 2 Annual General Meetings should be no more than 15 months.

Question 3.
Annual General Meeting is called to transact “special business.”
Answer:
Extra Ordinary General Meeting is called to transact “special business.”

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 4.
Meetings of debenture holders, depositors, etc. are called Shareholders Meeting.
Answer:
Meetings of debenture holders, depositors, etc. are called Creditor’s Meeting.

2. Explain the following terms/concepts.

Question 1.
Class Meeting
Answer:
A Meeting of a particular class of shareholders, held to make changes in their rights and duties, is called a class meeting. It is held to get their consent for the changes affecting their interest.

Question 2.
Annual General Meeting (AGM)
Answer:
Meeting of equity shareholders which are held once every year is called AGM. It is held to review and discuss the progress made by the company during the financial year. It is held to take decisions like:

  • to adopt Annual a/c, Director’s Report, and Auditor’s Report
  • to declare dividend
  • to elect directors
  • to appoint auditors and fix their remuneration.

Question 3.
Extra Ordinary General Meeting
Answer:
A meeting held to discuss and decide special or urgent matters like alteration in MOA or AOA, removal of directors or auditor before expiry of his term, voluntary winding up of company, etc is called an extraordinary general meeting. Such meetings can be called by the Board of Directors or by BOD on the requisition of members or by Requisitionist themselves or by National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) or Government.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Question 4.
Director’s Meeting
Answer:
The meeting which is held to discuss the policy matters of the company is called as Director’s meeting. Such meetings are classified into Board meetings and Committee meetings. The First Board meeting is to be called within 30 days from the date of incorporation.

3. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State any four legal provisions relating to Extra-Ordinary General Meeting.
Answer:
Legal Provisions relating to Extra-Ordinary General Meeting:
(i) Time for holding a meeting:
Extra-Ordinary General Meeting is between two Annual General Meetings under special circumstances. It can be held at any time as per the requirements of the company.

(ii) Authority to Convene:

  • The Board of Directors has the right to call an Extra-Ordinary General Meeting by sending a proper notice to the shareholders.
  • Extra-Ordinary General Meeting can be called by the members holding at least 1/10th of the paid-up capital or 1/10th of voting power in the company. Board must call Extra-Ordinary General Meeting within 45 days of receiving the requisition from the members.
  • If the Board fails to call such a meeting then the requisitionists themselves call this meeting within 3 months from the date of deposit of the requisition. The company shall pay all the expenses incurred for holding Extra-ordinary General Meeting.
  • National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT) can order such meetings on its own or at the request of a director or any members having voting rights.

(iii) Notice:
The notice must be given to all those who are entitled to receive it, at least 21 clear days in advance of the meeting. It is sent to the members at their registered address by post or through electronic mode like Email, etc.

(iv) Quorum:
According to the Companies Act, 2013, the quorum for Extra-Ordinary General Meeting of a public company is as follows:

No. of Shareholders Quorum
Upto 1000 5 Members
1000 – 5000 15 Members
More than 5000 30 Members

For a private company minimum of two members should be present in person.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

4. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain the functions of a secretary related to the Extra-Ordinary General Meeting.
Answer:
Functions (duties) of a secretary related to Extra Ordinary General Meeting:
Duties Before the Meeting:

  • Board Meeting: The secretary has to convene a board meeting in consultation with the Chairman. The board has to decide the day, date, time, and place of the meeting.
  • Notice: The secretary drafts the notice, agenda, and other required documents. He gets it approved by the chairman. Then he sends 21 clear days’ notice and other documents to the members before the meeting.
  • Public Notice: He has to publish notice of the extraordinary general meetings in leading newspapers for the information of the general public.
  • Arrangement: The secretary has to make arrangements such as booking the hall, refreshments, documents, etc.

Duties During the Meeting:

  • Quorum: The secretary checks the quorum at the beginning of the meeting and informs the same of the chairman.
  • Attendance: The secretary has to get signatures of members present at the meeting in ‘Members Attendance Book’.
  • Reading Notice: The secretary reads out the notice and agenda of the meeting as per the direction of the chairman.
  • Assist Chairman: The secretary assists the chairman by providing necessary information, records, document, etc.
  • Notes of Proceedings: The secretary should take down the notes of the proceedings of the meeting. He has to draft the minutes on the basis of these notes.
  • Poll: The secretary has to make necessary arrangements for taking poll if it is demanded.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 8 Company Meetings – II

Duties After the Meeting:

  • Drafting Minutes: The secretary drafts the minutes of the meeting on the basis of the notes taken down during the proceedings of the meeting.
  • Implementation of Decisions: The secretary instructs the concerned department for implementing the decisions taken at the meeting.
  • Filing Resolutions: The secretary has to file the certified copy of resolutions passed at the meeting to the Registrar of Companies.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 1.
Write the definition of systematics given by G. Simpson in 1961.
Answer:
Systematics is the study of kinds and diversity of organisms and their comparative and evolutionary relationship.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Quesiton 2.
Explain the term taxonomy.
Answer:

  1. Taxonomy means classification following certain rules or principles.
  2. The word taxonomy comes from two Greek words, taxis meaning arrangement and nomous meaning law or rule.
  3. The term taxonomy was coined by A.P. de Candolle (Swiss Botanist) [1778-1841].

Question 3.
Who coined the term taxonomy?
Answer:
The term taxonomy was coined by A.P. de Candolle (Swiss Botanist) [1778-1841].

Question 4.
Define the term classification. What is the basis of classification?
Answer:
1. Classification is the arrangement of organisms or groups of organisms in distinct categories in accordance with a particular and well-established plan.
2. It is based on the similarities and differences among the organisms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 5.
What are the three types of classification systems?
Answer:
The three types of classification systems are:
(i) Artificial system:
(a) It is based on few visible, easily observable characters, which are non-evolutionary such as habit, colour, form, etc.
(b) It does not consider the affinities (relationships) among different organisms.
E.g. Linnaeus system of classification.

(ii) Natural system:
It is based on objectively significant characters with respect to their affinities with other organisms.
E.g. Bentham and Hooker’s system of classification.

(iii) Phylogenetic system:
It is based on the phylogenetic relationship between different organisms with respect to common evolutionary descent (ancestor).
E.g. Engler and Prantl’s classification.

Question 6.
What is domain? Name the three domains of life.
Answer:
1. Domain is a unit larger than Kingdom in the system of classification.
2. Three domains of life are Archaea, Bacteria and Eukarya.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 7.
Who proposed the three-domain system?
Answer:
Carl Woese proposed the three-domain system.

Question 8.
State one similarity and difference between archaea and bacteria?
Answer:
Both archaea and bacteria are prokaryotic. They differ in their cell wall structures.

Question 9.
Which domain has eukaryotic cells?
Answer:
Domain Eukarya has eukaryotic cells.

Question 10.
what is chemotaxonomy? Explain with example.
Answer:

  1. It is method of biological classification based on the similarities and differences in structure of certain chemical compounds present among the organisms being classified.
  2. Thus, it is a classification based on chemical constituents of organisms.
  3. For e.g. Cell wall with peptidoglycan is present in Bacteria while it is absent in Archaea. Among Eukarya, fungi have chitinous cell wall, while plants have cellulosic cell wall.

Question 11.
Write a short note on numerical taxonomy.
Answer:
Numerical taxonomy:

  1. It is based on quantification of characters and develops an algorithm for classification.
  2. The aim of this was to create a taxonomy using numeric algorithms like cluster analysis rather than using subjective evaluation of their properties.
  3. It was proposed by Sokel and Sneath in 1963.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 12.
What is cladogram? Give a diagrammatic representation of three domains of life with the help of cladogram.
Answer:
1. It is a representation of hypothetical relationship denoting a comparison of organisms and their common ancestors.
2. It has a typical branching pattern.

Question 13.
Write in detail about the Phylogeny.
Answer:
Phylogeny:

  1. It is the evolutionary relationship of organism.
  2. It is an important tool in classification as it considers not merely the morphological status but also the relationship of one group of organisms with other groups of life.
  3. The system helps to understand the evolution and also focuses on the similarities of their metabolic functioning.
  4. Woese’s three domain concept as well as Whittaker’s five kingdom system are examples of phylogenetic relationship.

Question 14.
What is the use of DNA barcoding?
Answer:
DNA barcoding helps to study newly identified species as well as understanding ecological and evolutionary relationships between living organisms.

Question 15.
What are the steps involved in the process of DNA barcoding?
Answer:
The process of DNA barcoding includes two basic steps:
1. Collecting DNA barcode data of known species.
2. Matching the barcode sequence of the unknown sample against the barcode library for identification.

Question 16.
What are the applications of DNA barcoding?
Answer:
The applications of DNA barcoding are as follows:

  1. It helps to protect endangered species.
  2. It plays an important role in preservation of natural resources.
  3. It is also used for pest control in agriculture.
  4. It is used for identification of disease vectors.
  5. It is used for authentication of natural health products.
  6. It is also used for identification of medicinal plants.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 17.
What is taxonomic category?
Answer:

  1. Category is a rank or level in the hierarchial classification of organisms.
  2. Each category is referred to as a unit of classification.
  3. Category is a part of taxonomic arrangements hence, called taxonomic category.
  4. All categories together constitute the taxonomic hierarchy.

Question 18.
What are the compulsory taxonomic categories?
Answer:
Kingdom, division, class, order, family, genus, species are the compulsory categories.

Question 19.
What are the facultative taxonomic categories?
Answer:
Sub-order, sub-family, etc. are the facultative categories which are used when required.

Question 20.
Define taxonomic hierarchy.
Answer:
The manner of scientific grouping of different taxonomic categories in a descending order on the basis of their ranks or positions in classification is called taxonomic hierarchy.

Question 21.
Define the term Taxon. Give some examples of taxa at different hierarchical levels.
Answer:
1. Taxon is a group of living organisms of any rank in the system of classification.
2. In plant kingdom, each taxonomic group such as angiospermae, dicotyledonae, polypetalae, malvaceae represents a taxon.

Question 22.
Write the classification of:
Answer:
1. China Rose
2. Cobra

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 23.
Explain the following terms:

  1. Species
  2. Genus
  3. Family
  4. Order
  5. Class
  6. Division/Phylum
  7. Sub kingdom
  8. Kingdom

Answer:
(i) Species:
(a) Species is the principal natural taxonomic unit, ranking below a genus.
(b) It is a group of organisms that can interbreed under natural condition to produce fertile offspring.
(c) It was thought to be an indivisible, stable and static unit.
(d) However, in the modem taxonomy, subdivision of species such as sub-species, varities and populations are seen and given more importance.

(ii) Genus:

(a) Genus is a taxonomic rank or category larger than species used in the biological classification of living and fossil organisms.
(b) Genus is a group of species bearing close resemblance to one another in their morphological characters but they do not interbreed.
(c) For e.g. Tiger, Leopard, Lion all three belong to same genus Panthera. They have common characters yet are different from each other because their genus is same but species is different.
(d) Another example is genus Solarium. Brinjal and potato both belong to this genus.

(iii) Family:

(a) It is one of the major hierarchial taxonomic rank.
(b) A family represents a group of closely related genera.
(c) For e.g. genera like Hibiscus, Gossypium, Sida, Bombax are included in same family Malvaceae.
(d) Although, there are many similarities between cat and dog, cat belongs to the family of leopards, tigers and lions, i.e. family Felidae and dog belongs to different family i.e. Canidae.

(iv) Cohort/Order:

(a) It is taxonomic rank used in the classification of organisms and recognised by nomenclature codes.
(b) An order is a group of closely related families showing definite affinities.
(c) Members belonging to same order but different families may show very few dissimilarities.
(d) For e.g. family Papaveraceae, Brassicaceae, Capparidaceae, etc with parietal placentation are grouped in order Parietales.
(e) Families of dogs and cats though are different, they belong to same order Carnivora.

(v) Class:

(a) The class is the distinct taxonomic rank of biological classification having its own distinctive name.
(b) Class is the assemblage of closely allied orders.
(c) For e.g. Orders Carnivora and order Primates belong to class Mammalia. Thus monkeys, gorillas, gibbons (Primates) and dogs, cats, tigers (Carnivora) belong to same class.

(vi) Division/ Phylum:

(a) The division is a category composed of related classes.
(b) For e.g. division Angiospermae includes two classes Dicotyledonae and Monocotyledonae.
(c) In animal classification, instead of division, the category Phylum is used.

(vii) Sub-kingdom:

(a) Different divisions having some similarities form sub-kingdom.
(b) The divisions Angiospermae and Gymnospermae forms the sub-kingdom Phanerogams or Spermatophyta (all seed producing plants).

(viii) Kingdom:

(a) It is the highest taxonomic category composed of different sub-kingdoms.
(b) For e.g. sub-kingdom Phanerogams and Cryptogams form the Plant kingdom or Plantae which includes all the plants, while all animals are included in kingdom Animalia.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 24.
Define nomenclature.
Answer:
The art of giving name to the organism is called nomenclature.

Question 25.
What is meant by vernacular name?
Answer:
Vernacular names are the names which are given to organisms in a particular region and language by local people.

Question 26.
What are the disadvantages of vernacular names of organisms?
Answer:
Disadvantages of vernacular names/ local names/ common names:

  1. Vernacular names do not indicate the necessary information about the organism.
  2. It does not indicate proper relationship of the organisms.
  3. Vernacular names are not universal, e.g. Pansy (Viola tricolor L.) grown in most European and American gardens has about 50 common english names. In Ayurveda, mango (Mangifera indica L.) is known by over 50 different names which are in Sanskrit language.
  4. Vernacular names have limited usage.
  5. Local names are different and confusing.

Question 27.
Who proposed binomial system of nomenclature?
Answer:
Swedish naturalist Carl Linnaeus proposed binomial system of nomenclature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 28.
What is binomial nomenclature? Give the rules for binomial nomenclature.
Answer:
1. A system of nomenclature of plants and animals in which the scientific name consists of two words or parts or epithets is called binomial nomenclature.
2. This system of nomenclature was developed by Carl Linnaeus. He gave certain principles for this nomenclature in his book ‘Species Plantarum’.

Rules of binomial nomenclature:

  1. The name of the organism is composed of two Latin or Greek words.
  2. Generic epithet is a simple noun which should come first and always begin with a capital letter.
  3. Specific epithet is the descriptive adjective which should come later and begin with a small letter.
  4. The generic and specific epithet must be underlined separately if hand written or in italics when printed.
  5. The generic as well as specific epithet should not have less than three letters and more than thirteen letters.
  6. Usually the name of the author who names a plant or animal is also written in full or abbreviated form after scientific name. e.g. Mangifera indica L. Where L stands for Linnaeus.

Question 29.
In Mangifera indica L., what does letter ‘L’ indicate?
Answer:
In Mangifera indica L., letter L indicates author’s name i.e. Linnaeus.

Question 30.
Which kingdoms were included in two kingdom system of classification? Who introduced it?
Answer:
The two-kingdom system of classification included Kingdom plantae and Kingdom animalia. This system was introduced by Carl Linnaeus.

Question 31.
What was the drawback of two kingdom system of classification?
Answer:
Two kingdom system was found inadequate for classification of some organisms like bacteria, fungi, Euglena, etc.

Question 32.
Who suggested five kingdom system of classification?
Answer:
R.H. Whittaker suggested five kingdom system of classification.

Question 33.
Match the following.

Column I Column II
1. Vibrio a. Rod-shaped
2. Bacillus b. Spherical
3. Spirillum c. Spiral shaped
d. Comma or kidney-shaped

Answer:

Column I Column II
1. Vibrio d. Comma or kidney-shaped
2. Bacillus a. Rod-shaped
3. Spirillum c. Spiral shaped

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 34.
Identify the different shapes of bacterial cells shown in the given figures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms 1
Answer:
Figure a: Coccus;
Figure b: Coccobacillus;
Figure c: Vibrio
Figure d: Bacillus;
Figure e: Spirillum; Figure f: Spirochete

Question 35.
What are Archaebacteria?
Answer:

  1. These are the most primitive type of bacteria.
  2. They are differentiated from other bacteria on the basis of their different cellular features.
  3. These bacteria are mostly found in the extreme environmental conditions, hence called extremophiles.
  4. Bacteria that can withstand high salinities are called halophiles, while those that withstand extreme temperature are known as thermophiles.
  5. Methanogenic bacteria found in gut of ruminants (cows and buffaloes) help in production of methane in biogas plants.

Question 36.
Why are archaebacteria called extremophiles?
Answer:

  • These bacteria are mostly found in the extreme environments, hence called extremophiles.
  • They have capacity to survive in very severe conditions.
  • They are found in a variety of places from volcanic craters to salty lakes and hot springs.

Question 37.
Write in detail about Eubacteria.
Answer:
Eubaceria:

  1. These are commonly referred as true bacteria.
  2. They have cell wall made up of peptidoglycan.
  3. Eubacteria are mostly heterotrophic, few are autotrophic.
  4. The autotrophs can be photosynthetic like Chlorobium (Green sulphur bacteria) and Chromatium or chemosynthetic like sulphur bacteria.
  5. These are mostly multicellular filamentous forms living in fresh water.
  6. Filaments show heterocyst which helps in nitrogen fixation.
  7. The body is covered by mucilaginous sheath.
  8. The genetic material is typical prokaryotic.
  9. The photosynthetic pigments include Chl-a, Chl-b, carotenes and xanthophylls.
  10. Most of them are decomposers that help in breaking down large molecules in simple molecules or minerals.

Question 38.
Write a short note on useful and harmful bacteria.
Answer:
(i) Useful bacteria:
Most of the bacteria act as a decomposer. They breakdown large molecules in simple molecules or minerals. Examples of some useful bacteria:
Lactobacillus’. It helps in curdling of milk.
Azotobacter. It helps to fix nitrogen for plants.
Streptomyces: It is used in antibiotic production such as streptomycin.
Methanogens: These are used for production of methane (biogas) gas from dung.
Pseudomonas spp. and Alcanovorax borkumensis: These bacteria have the ability to destroy the pyridines and other chemicals. Hence, used to clear the oil spills.

(ii)Harmful bacteria:
This includes disease causing bacteria. They cause various diseases like typhoid, cholera, tuberculosis, tetanus, etc. Examples of some harmful bacteria:
Salmonella typhi: It is a causative organism of typhoid.
Vibrio cholerae: It causes cholera.
Mycobacterium tuberculosis’. It causes tuberculosis.
Clostridium tetani: It causes tetanus.
Clostridium spp.: It causes food poisoning.
Many forms of mycoplasma are pathogenic.
Agrobacterium , Erwinia, etc are the pathogenic bacteria causing plant diseases.
Animals and pets also suffer from bacterial infections caused by Brucella, Pastrurella, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 39.
Identify label X and Y in the given figure of Cyanobacteria (Nostoc).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms 2

Question 40.
what is Mycoplasma?
Answer:

  1. These are the smallest living cells known.
  2. They lack cell wall.
  3. Many forms are pathogenic.
  4. They are resistant to common antibiotics because they lack cell wall.

Question 41.
Identify the following diagram, label it and write detail information in your words.
Answer:
The given figure represents Paramoecium.
Characteristics:

  1. It belongs to kingdom Protista. It is further classified as animal like protist.
  2. It lacks cell wall.
  3. It shows heterotrophic and holozoic nutrition.
  4. It is a ciliated protozoan where locomotion is due to cilia.
  5. It has gullet (a cavity) which opens on the cell surface.

Question 42.
Which kingdom shows link with all eukaryotic members?
Answer:
Kingdom Protista shows link with all eukaryotic kingdoms such as kingdom plantae, fungi and animalia.

Question 43.
Unicellular eukaryotic organisms are included in which kingdom?
Answer:
Unicellular eukaryotic organisms are included in kingdom Protista.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

 

Question 44.
Give different types of Protists with examples.
Answer:
Protists are of different types:
(i) Plant like protists (Photosynthetic protists):
(a) They are termed as phytoplanktons, also known as Chrysophytes.
(b) They are autotrophic (photosynthetic) in nature and form major producers of ocean ecosystem.
(c)Most of them are referred as Diatoms because they have body wall made up of two soap-box like fitting silica covers. E.g. Diatoms.

1. Dinoflagellates:
(i) They are aquatic (mostly marine) and autotrophic (photosynthetic).
(ii) They have wide range of photosynthetic pigments which can be yellow, green, brown, blue and red.
(iii) The cell wall is made up of cellulosic stiff plates.
(iv) A pair of flagella is present, hence they are motile.
(v) They are responsible for famous ‘red tide’. E.g. Gonyaulax. It makes sea appear red.

2. Euglenoids:
(i) They lack cell wall but have a tough covering of proteinaceous pellicle.
(ii) Pellicle covering provides flexibility and contractibility to Euglena.
(iii) They possess two flagella, one short and other long.
(iv) They behave as heterotrophs in absence of light but possess pigments, similar to that of higher plants, for photosynthesis.

(ii) Animal like protists (Consumer protists):
(a) They are the primitive animal forms.
(b) They are also termed as protozoans.
(c) These are heterotrophic and lack cell wall.
(d) Amoeboid protozoans have pseudopodia as locomotory organs. E.g. Amoeba, Entamoeba.
Amoeba is free living form, but Entamoeba is endoparasite and causes amoebic dysentery.
(e) Flagellated protozoans have flagella as locomotory organ. E.g. Trypanosoma.
(f) Cilliated protozoans have cilia for locomotion. E.g. Paramoecium.
(g) Plasmodium is a Sporozoan protozoa. It causes malaria. It forms spores in one of its life stages.

(iii) Fungi like protists (Consumer decomposer protists):
(a) They form a group called Myxomycetes.
(b) They are saprophytic in nature, found on decaying leaves.
(c) Their cells aggregate to form a large cell mass called plasmodium.
(d) The spores of plasmodium are very tough and survive extreme conditions, e.g. Slime molds.

Question 45.
Why diatoms are used in filtration and polishing?
Answer:
Diatoms forms a substance called Diatomaceous earth. These are the shells of diatoms containing silica that left behind for many years. Diatomaceous earth is granular; hence it is used in polishing and filtration.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 46.
Label the given figures representing ventral and dorsal view of Gonyaulax.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms 4

Question 47.
Identify the following diagram, label it and write detail information in your words.
Answer:
The given figure represents Euglena.
Characteristics:
(i) It belongs to kingdom Protista. It is further classified into euglenoids.

1. Dinoflagellates:

  1. They are aquatic (mostly marine) and autotrophic (photosynthetic).
  2. They have wide range of photosynthetic pigments which can be yellow, green, brown, blue and red.
  3. The cell wall is made up of cellulosic stiff plates.
  4. A pair of flagella is present, hence they are motile.
  5. They are responsible for famous ‘red tide’. E.g. Gonyaulax. It makes sea appear red.

2. Euglenoids:

  1. They lack cell wall but have a tough covering of proteinaceous pellicle.
  2. Pellicle covering provides flexibility and contractibility to Euglena.
  3. They possess two flagella, one short and other long.
  4. They behave as heterotrophs in absence of light but possess pigments, similar to that of higher plants, for photosynthesis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 48.
Write the characteristics of Kingdom plantae.
Answer:
Characteristics of Kingdom plantae:

  1. Kingdom plantae is dominated by autotrophs.
  2. Some members are insectivorous plants. E.g. Venus fly trap, pitcher plant, bladderwort, while some are heterotrophic parasitic members like Cuscuta.
  3. Members of this kingdom are eukaryotic, multicellular, having eukaryotic cells containing chlorophyll.
  4. Their cell wall is mostly made up of cellulose.
  5. They exhibit alternation of generation i.e. life cycle has two distinct phases.
  6. It is divided into two major groups Cryptogams and Phanerogams.

Question 49.
Give the general characters of Kingdom Fungi with examples.
Answer:
General characters of Kingdom Fungi:
1. Type of organisms: It is a unique kingdom of eukaryotic heterotrophic organisms, showing extracellular digestion. They may be unicellular or multicellular and filamentous. These are commonly found in warm and humid places.
2. Nucleus: The cells may be multinucleate or uninucleate.
3. Body: Multicellular organisms consist of a body called mycelium in which a number of thread or fibre-like structures called hyphae are present. The hyphae may be with septa (septate) or without septa (aseptate). The non-septate multinucleated hyphae are called coenocytic hyphae.
4. Cell wall: The cell wall in fungi is composed of chitin or fungal cellulose.
5. Cell organelles: The fungi contain well organized membrane bound cell organelles except the chloroplasts.
6. Nutrition: The fungi exhibit heterotrophic mode of nutrition and most of the members are saprophytes and absorb food which is decomposed (digested) outside. Some are parasitic or predators.
7. Reproduction: They reproduce both sexually as well as asexually. Asexual reproduction takes place by fragmentation, fission and budding.
8. Some fungi are symbiotic. These fungi either live with algae as lichens or as mycorrhiza in association with roots of higher plants.

Question 50.
Identify the following diagram, label it and write detail information in your words.
Answer:
The given figure represents Mucor.
Characteristics:

  1. It belongs to class phycomycetes of kingdom fungi.
  2. Mycelium is made up of aseptate coenocytic hyphae.
  3. It commonly grows on decaying fruits,vegetables, in soil, on various food- stuff-like bread, jellies, jams, etc.
  4. In favourable conditions mucor reproduces asexually by formation of spores within sporangia. It can also reproduce by sexual means.

Question 51.
Identify the following diagram, label it and write detail information in your words.
Answer:
The given figure represents Aspergillus.
Characteristics:

  1. It belongs to class ascomycetes of kingdom Fungi.
  2. It is multicellular.
  3. The hyphae are branched and septate.
  4. Aspergillus grows well in soil, decaying vegetation, hay, dung, on
  5. plants, etc.
  6. Asexual reproduction takes place by spores called conidia which are produced at the tip of hyphae called conidiophores.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 52.
Identify the following diagram, label it and write detail information in your words.
Answer:
The given figure represents Agaricus (Mushroom).
Characteristics:

  1. It belongs to class basidiomycetes of kingdom Fungi.
  2. It has branched septate hyphae.
  3. It grows in soil, on rotten wood, etc.
  4. It is edible and rich in proteins.
  5. Vegetative reproduction takes place by fragmentation.

Question 53.
Explain how fungi exhibit heteromorphic mode of nutrition?
Answer:

  1. Most of the members of kingdom fungi are saprophytes.
  2. They absorb food which is decomposed (digested) outside.
  3. Some are parasites or predators and some are symbiotic.
  4. In fungi, chloroplast is absent, thus they cannot synthesize their own food by photosynthesis. Due to this, fungi exhibit heteromorphic mode of nutrition.

Quesiton 54.
Identify the given picture and explain in detail.
Answer:
The given picture represents Lichens.

  1. Lichen is an association of an alga and fungus.
  2. It is the best example of symbiosis or mutualism.
  3. They are found in extreme environments like snow clad poles.
  4. The algal component of lichen is phycobiont, mostly belongs to cyanobacteria (blue-green algae) or green algae and fungal component is mycobiont.
  5. Algae prepares the food and supplies it to the fungal component, while fungal component provides shelter to algae and also absorbs water and minerals for algae.
  6. The association is intense and it is difficult to identify them as separate living beings.
  7. They are very sensitive to pollutions, hence not found in polluted areas.
  8. They are used as pollution indicators.
  9. They play an important role in soil formation by using specific acid productions.
    [Note: Lichens cannot be categorized as acellular organisms]

Question 55.
Write the general characters of Kingdom Animalia with examples.
Answer:
General characters of Kingdom Animalia:

  1. Types of organisms: The organisms are multicellular and eukaryotic.
  2. Habitat: The organisms may be aquatic, terrestrial, amphibious or aerial in habitat.
  3. Cell organelles: The organisms do not possess cell wall, plastids and central vacuole.
  4. Locomotion: Majority of the animals are motile. However, few like sponges are sedentary.
  5. Sense orgAnswer: They possess sense organs, nervous system and respond to stimuli by exhibiting certain behaviour.
  6. Reproduction: They mostly reproduce sexually by producing gametes, while some can reproduce asexually.
  7. Nutrition: They are heterotrophic, mostly holozoic, sometimes parasitic.
  8. Growth: It is determinate, (follow definite pattern)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 56.
Observe and discuss:
Complete the following table on the basis of previous knowledge.

Characters Monera Protista Fungi Plantae Animalia
Cell type Prokaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic
Cell wall Present in some organisms Present (cellulose)
Nuclear membrane Absent Present Present Present
Body organization Unicellular Multicellular/ loose tissue Tissue /organ Tissue            /organ system
Mode of nutrition Autotrophic Photosynthetic, Heterotrophic Autotrophic (Photosynthetic)
Ecological role Decomposers Decomposers Consumers

Answer:

Characters Monera Protista Fungi Plantae Animalia
Cell type Prokaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic Eukaryotic
Cell wall Present (Peptidoglycan) Present in some organisms Present (chitin) Present (cellulose) Absent
Nuclear

membrane

Absent Present Present Present Present
Body organization Unicellular Unicellular Multicellular/ loose tissue Tissue /organ Tissue  /organ system
Mode of nutrition Heterotrophic (saprophytic/ parasitic)

Autotrophic (Photoautotrophic/ Chemoautotrophic)

Autotrophic Photosynthetic, Heterotrophic Heterotrophic (saprophytic/ parasitic) Autotrophic (Photosynthetic) Heterotrophic (holozoic)
Ecological role Decomposers Producers and consumers Decomposers Producers Consumers

Question 57.
Who referred virus as ‘contagium vivum fluidum’?
Answer:
M. W. Beijerinck referred virus as ‘contagium vivum fluidum (infectious living fluid).’

Question 58.
Who demonstrated that viruses are inert outside the host cell and can be crystallised?
Answer:
Stanley demonstrated that viruses are inert and can be crystallised.
[Note: Students can scan the adjacent QR code for detail classification of given tree diagram.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 59.
What is the structure of virus?
Answer:

  1. Viruses are acellular and ultramicroscopic.
  2. The genetic material in viruses is either single or double-stranded RNA or double-stranded DNA.
  3. Their genetic material is protected by a protein coat called capsid.
  4. Capsid is made up of smaller units called capsomeres.
  5. Capsomeres are arranged in polyhedral or helical forms thus, imparting that particular shape to the virus.

Question 60.
Give examples of:
1. Diseases caused by viruses in plants:
2. Diseases caused by viruses in animals:
Answer:
1. Diseases caused by viruses in plants: Leaf curling, yellowing, mosaic formation, etc.
2. Diseases caused by viruses in animals: Swine flu, Small pox, mumps, herpes, common cold, AIDS, etc.

Question 61.
Write a short note on viroids.
Answer:
Viroids:

  1. These are mainly plant pathogens.
  2. Viroids were discovered by Theodor Diener.
  3. The first viroid discovered was PSTV (Potato spindle tuber viroid) which causes a disease in potato.
  4. Viroids are very small, circular, single stranded RNA which are without any protein coat.
  5. Viroids are smaller in size than viruses.

Question 62.
Apply Your Knowledge:

Question 1.
In your laboratory you accidentally discover an old permanent slide without a label. You are curious to identify it, and you place the slide under the microscope. You observe the following features:
1. Well-organized nucleus
2. Unicellular
3. Biflagellate – one placed longitudinally and the other transversely.
Answer:
All unicellular eukaryotes form a connecting link between prokaryotic Kingdom Monera and complex eukaryotic Kingdoms Plantae, Fungi and Animalia. Since the specimen shows the presence of two flagella, one placed longitudinally and the other transversely, the given organism can be dinoflagellate and has to be placed under Kingdom Protista.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 2.
Name the following:
1. The kingdom which includes the smallest living forms.
2. The protists which behave as heterotroph in absence of light but performs photosynthesis in presence of light
3. These are infectious single stranded RNA, smaller than virus
Answer:
1. Kingdom Monera
2. Euglena
3. Viroids

Question 63.
Quick Review
Answer:
Taxonomic Hierarchy

Kingdom → Sub-kingdom → Division/phylum → Class → Cohort /order → Family → Genus → Species

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms 5

Question 64.
Exercise

Question 1.
Define Systematics.
Answer:
Systematics is the study of kinds and diversity of organisms and their comparative and evolutionary relationship.

Question 2.
What is classification?
Answer:
Classification is the arrangement of organisms or groups of organisms in distinct categories in accordance with a particular and well-established plan.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 3.
Explain different methods of classification.
Answer:
The three types of classification systems are:
(i) Artificial system:
(a) It is based on few visible, easily observable characters, which are non-evolutionary such as habit, colour, form, etc.
(b) It does not consider the affinities (relationships) among different organisms.
E.g. Linnaeus system of classification.

(ii) Natural system:
It is based on objectively significant characters with respect to their affinities with other organisms.
E.g. Bentham and Hooker’s system of classification.

(iii) Phylogenetic system:
It is based on the phylogenetic relationship between different organisms with respect to common evolutionary descent (ancestor).
E.g. Engler and Prantl’s classification.

Question 4.
Domain eukarya has which cells?
Answer:
Domain Eukarya has eukaryotic cells.

Question 5.
Name three domains of life.
Answer:
Three domains of life are Archaea, Bacteria and Eukarya.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 6.
Write a short note on chemotaxonomy.
Answer:
1. It is method of biological classification based on the similarities and differences in structure of certain chemical compounds present among the organisms being classified.
2. Thus, it is a classification based on chemical constituents of organisms.
3. For e.g. Cell wall with peptidoglycan is present in Bacteria while it is absent in Archaea.
Among Eukarya, fungi have chitinous cell wall, while plants have cellulosic cell wall.

Question 7.
What is numerical taxonomy? Who proposed it?
Answer:
Numerical taxonomy:

  1. It is based on quantification of characters and develops an algorithm for classification.
  2. The aim of this was to create a taxonomy using numeric algorithms like cluster analysis rather than using subjective evaluation of their properties.
  3. It was proposed by Sokel and Sneath in 1963.

Question 8.
Write a note on cladogram?
Answer:
1. It is a representation of hypothetical relationship denoting a comparison of organisms and their common ancestors.
2. It has a typical branching pattern.

Question 9.
Write a short note on phylogeny.
Answer:
Phylogeny:

  1. It is the evolutionary relationship of organism.
  2. It is an important tool in classification as it considers not merely the morphological status but also the relationship of one group of organisms with other groups of life.
  3. The system helps to understand the evolution and also focuses on the similarities of their metabolic functioning.
  4. Woese’s three domain concept, as well as Whittaker’s five-kingdom system, are examples of phylogenetic relationship.

Question 10.
Explain DNA barcoding.
Answer:
DNA barcoding is a new method for identification of any species based on its DNA sequence, which is obtained from a tiny tissue sample of the organism under study.
DNA barcoding helps to study newly identified species as well as understanding ecological and evolutionary relationships between living organisms.
The process of DNA barcoding includes two basic steps:
(i) Collecting DNA barcode data of known species.
(ii) Matching the barcode sequence of the unknown sample against the barcode library for identification.

The applications of DNA barcoding are as follows:

  1. It helps to protect endangered species.
  2. It plays an important role in preservation of natural resources.
  3. It is also used for pest control in agriculture.
  4. It is used for identification of disease vectors.
  5. It is used for authentication of natural health products.
  6. It is also used for identification of medicinal plants.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 11.
Explain the term taxonomic category.
Answer:

  1. Category is a rank or level in the hierarchial classification of organisms.
  2. Each category is referred to as a unit of classification.
  3. Category is a part of taxonomic arrangements hence, called taxonomic category.
  4. All categories together constitute the taxonomic hierarchy.

Question 12.
Give the classification of cobra.
Answer:
Cobra

Question 13.
Give the classification of china-rose.
Answer:
China Rose

Question 14.
What is taxon? Give any one example of it.
Answer:
1. Taxon is a group of living organisms of any rank in the system of classification.
2. In plant kingdom, each taxonomic group such as angiospermae, dicotyledonae, polypetalae, malvaceae represents a taxon.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 15.
Which are the units of classification?
Answer:
(i) Species:
(a) Species is the principal natural taxonomic unit, ranking below a genus.
(b) It is a group of organisms that can interbreed under natural condition to produce fertile offspring.
(c) It was thought to be an indivisible, stable and static unit.
(d) However, in the modem taxonomy, subdivision of species such as sub-species, varities and populations are seen and given more importance.

(ii) Genus:

(a) Genus is a taxonomic rank or category larger than species used in the biological classification of living and fossil organisms.
(b) Genus is a group of species bearing close resemblance to one another in their morphological characters but they do not interbreed.
(c) For e.g. Tiger, Leopard, Lion all three belong to same genus Panthera. They have common characters yet are different from each other because their genus is same but species is different.
(d) Another example is genus Solarium. Brinjal and potato both belong to this genus.

(iii) Family:

(a) It is one of the major hierarchial taxonomic rank.
(b) A family represents a group of closely related genera.
(c) For e.g. genera like Hibiscus, Gossypium, Sida, Bombax are included in same family Malvaceae.
(d) Although, there are many similarities between cat and dog, cat belongs to the family of leopards, tigers and lions, i.e. family Felidae and dog belongs to different family i.e. Canidae.

(iv) Cohort/Order:

(a) It is taxonomic rank used in the classification of organisms and recognised by nomenclature codes.
(b) An order is a group of closely related families showing definite affinities.
(c) Members belonging to same order but different families may show very few dissimilarities.
(d) For e.g. family Papaveraceae, Brassicaceae, Capparidaceae, etc with parietal placentation are grouped in order Parietales.
(e) Families of dogs and cats though are different, they belong to same order Carnivora.

(v) Class:

(a) The class is the distinct taxonomic rank of biological classification having its own distinctive name.
(b) Class is the assemblage of closely allied orders.
(c) For e.g. Orders Carnivora and order Primates belong to class Mammalia. Thus monkeys, gorillas, gibbons (Primates) and dogs, cats, tigers (Carnivora) belong to same class.

(vi) Division/ Phylum:

(a) The division is a category composed of related classes.
(b) For e.g. division Angiospermae includes two classes Dicotyledonae and Monocotyledonae.
(c) In animal classification, instead of division, the category Phylum is used.

(vii) Sub-kingdom:

(a) Different divisions having some similarities form sub-kingdom.
(b) The divisions Angiospermae and Gymnospermae forms the sub-kingdom Phanerogams or Spermatophyta (all seed producing plants).

(viii) Kingdom:

(a) It is the highest taxonomic category composed of different sub-kingdoms.
(b) For e.g. sub-kingdom Phanerogams and Cryptogams form the Plant kingdom or Plantae which includes all the plants, while all animals are included in kingdom Animalia.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 16.
Explain the following terms by giving one example of each:
1. Sub-kingdom
2. Genus
3. Order
Answer:
1. Sub-kingdom:

(a) Different divisions having some similarities form sub-kingdom.
(b) The divisions Angiospermae and Gymnospermae forms the sub-kingdom Phanerogams or Spermatophyta (all seed producing plants).

2. Genus:

(a) Genus is a taxonomic rank or category larger than species used in the biological classification of living and fossil organisms.
(b) Genus is a group of species bearing close resemblance to one another in their morphological characters but they do not interbreed.
(c) For e.g. Tiger, Leopard, Lion all three belong to same genus Panthera. They have common characters yet are different from each other because their genus is same but species is different.
(d) Another example is genus Solarium. Brinjal and potato both belong to this genus.

3. Cohort/Order:

(a) It is taxonomic rank used in the classification of organisms and recognised by nomenclature codes.
(b) An order is a group of closely related families showing definite affinities.
(c) Members belonging to same order but different families may show very few dissimilarities.
(d) For e.g. family Papaveraceae, Brassicaceae, Capparidaceae, etc with parietal placentation are grouped in order Parietales.
(e) Families of dogs and cats though are different, they belong to same order Carnivora.

Question 17.
‘A family represents a group of closely related genera’. Give one example to justify the statement.
Answer:
(c) For e.g. genera like Hibiscus, Gossypium, Sida, Bombax are included in same family Malvaceae.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 18.
What does letter ‘L’ indicates in Man gif era indica L., ?
Answer:
In Mangifera indica L., letter L indicates author’s name i.e. Linnaeus.

Question 19.
1. Define binomial nomenclature system.
2. Who proposed it?
3. Why a unique name for a particular individual is essential in a multilingual country like India?
Answer:
1. The name of the organism is composed of two Latin or Greek words.
2. Generic epithet is a simple noun which should come first and always begin with a capital letter.
3. The generic and specific epithet must be underlined separately if hand written or in italics when printed.

Question 20.
Why is binomial nomenclature useful for classification of organisms?
Answer:
Binomial nomenclature is important because:

  1. The binomials are simple, meaningful and precise.
  2. They are standard since they do not change from place to place.
  3. These names avoid confusion and uncertainty created by local or vernacular names. The organisms are known by the same name throughout the world.
  4. The binomials are easy to understand and remember.
  5. It indicates phylogeny (evolutionary history) of organisms.
  6. It helps to understand inter-relationship between organisms.

Question 21.
Which are the two kingdoms of organisms given by Carl Linnaeus? What was the drawback of this system?
Answer:
The two-kingdom system of classification included Kingdom plantae and Kingdom animalia. This system was introduced by Carl Linnaeus. Two kingdom system was found inadequate for classification of some organisms like bacteria, fungi, Euglena, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 22.
Name the five kingdoms given by Whittaker?
Answer:
Five kingdom system of classification was proposed by R.H. Whittaker in 1969. This system shows the phylogenetic relationship between the organisms.
The five kingdoms are:

  1. Kingdom Monera
  2. Kingdom Protista
  3. Kingdom Plantae
  4. Kingdom Fungi
  5. Kingdom Animalia

Question 23.
Unicellular prokaryotic organisms are included in which kingdom?
Answer:
(i) Size: The organisms included in this kingdom are microscopic, unicellular and prokaryotic.

Question 24.
Explain kingdom Monera with the help of given points:
i. Nucleus
ii. Reproduction
iii. Nutrition
Answer:
(i) Nucleus: These organisms do not have well defined nucleus. DNA exists as a simple double stranded circular single chromosome called as nucleoid. Apart from the nucleoid they often show presence of extrachromosomal DNA which is small circular called plasmids.
(ii) Reproduction: The mode of reproduction is asexual or with the help of binary fission or budding. Very rarely, sexual reproduction occurs by conjugation method.
(iii) Nutrition: Majority are heterotrophic, parasitic or saprophytic in nutrition. Few are autotrophic that can be either photoautotrophs or chemoautotrophs.

Question 25.
Give examples of archaebacteria and eubacteria.
Answer:
Examples:
Archaebacteria: e.g. Methanobacillus, Thiobacillus, etc.
Eubacteria: e.g. Chlorobium, Chromatium, and Cyanobacteria e.g. Nostoc, Azotobacter, etc.

Question 26.
What is mycoplasma?
Answer:
1. These are the smallest living cells known.
2. They lack cell wall.
3. Many forms are pathogenic.
4. They are resistant to common antibiotics because they lack cell wall.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 27.
Enlist different types of protozoa.
Answer:
(ii) Animal like protists (Consumer protists):
(a) They are the primitive animal forms.
(b) They are also termed as protozoans.
(c) These are heterotrophic and lack cell wall.
(d) Amoeboid protozoans have pseudopodia as locomotory organs. E.g. Amoeba, Entamoeba.
Amoeba is free living form, but Entamoeba is endoparasite and causes amoebic dysentery.
(e) Flagellated protozoans have flagella as locomotory organ. E.g. Trypanosoma.
(f) Cilliated protozoans have cilia for locomotion. E.g. Paramoecium.
(g) Plasmodium is a Sporozoan protozoa. It causes malaria. It forms spores in one of its life stages.

Question 28.
Which are the different types of protists?
Answer:
Protists are of different types:
(i) Plant like protists (Photosynthetic protists):
(a) They are termed as phytoplanktons, also known as Chrysophytes.
(b) They are autotrophic (photosynthetic) in nature and form major producers of ocean ecosystem.
(c)Most of them are referred as Diatoms because they have body wall made up of two soap-box like fitting silica covers. E.g. Diatoms.

1. Dinoflagellates:
(i) They are aquatic (mostly marine) and autotrophic (photosynthetic).
(ii) They have wide range of photosynthetic pigments which can be yellow, green, brown, blue and red.
(iii) The cell wall is made up of cellulosic stiff plates.
(iv) A pair of flagella is present, hence they are motile.
(v) They are responsible for famous ‘red tide’. E.g. Gonyaulax. It makes sea appear red.

2. Euglenoids:
(i) They lack cell wall but have a tough covering of proteinaceous pellicle.
(ii) Pellicle covering provides flexibility and contractibility to Euglena.
(iii) They possess two flagella, one short and other long.
(iv) They behave as heterotrophs in absence of light but possess pigments, similar to that of higher plants, for photosynthesis.

(ii) Animal like protists (Consumer protists):
(a) They are the primitive animal forms.
(b) They are also termed as protozoans.
(c) These are heterotrophic and lack cell wall.
(d) Amoeboid protozoans have pseudopodia as locomotory organs. E.g. Amoeba, Entamoeba.
Amoeba is free living form, but Entamoeba is endoparasite and causes amoebic dysentery.
(e) Flagellated protozoans have flagella as locomotory organ. E.g. Trypanosoma.
(f) Cilliated protozoans have cilia for locomotion. E.g. Paramoecium.
(g) Plasmodium is a Sporozoan protozoa. It causes malaria. It forms spores in one of its life stages.

(iii) Fungi like protists (Consumer decomposer protists):
(a) They form a group called Myxomycetes.
(b) They are saprophytic in nature, found on decaying leaves.
(c) Their cells aggregate to form a large cell mass called plasmodium.
(d) The spores of plasmodium are very tough and survive extreme conditions, e.g. Slime molds.

Question 29.
What are dinoflagellates?
Answer:
Protists are of different types:
(i) Plant like protists (Photosynthetic protists):
(a) They are termed as phytoplanktons, also known as Chrysophytes.
(b) They are autotrophic (photosynthetic) in nature and form major producers of ocean ecosystem.
(c)Most of them are referred as Diatoms because they have body wall made up of two soap-box like fitting silica covers. E.g. Diatoms.

1. Dinoflagellates:
(i) They are aquatic (mostly marine) and autotrophic (photosynthetic).
(ii) They have wide range of photosynthetic pigments which can be yellow, green, brown, blue and red.
(iii) The cell wall is made up of cellulosic stiff plates.
(iv) A pair of flagella is present, hence they are motile.
(v) They are responsible for famous ‘red tide’. E.g. Gonyaulax. It makes sea appear red.

Question 30.
Explain animal like protists.
Answer:
(ii) Animal like protists (Consumer protists):
(a) They are the primitive animal forms.
(b) They are also termed as protozoans.
(c) These are heterotrophic and lack cell wall.
(d) Amoeboid protozoans have pseudopodia as locomotory organs. E.g. Amoeba, Entamoeba.
Amoeba is free living form, but Entamoeba is endoparasite and causes amoebic dysentery.
(e) Flagellated protozoans have flagella as locomotory organ. E.g. Trypanosoma.
(f) Cilliated protozoans have cilia for locomotion. E.g. Paramoecium.
(g) Plasmodium is a Sporozoan protozoa. It causes malaria. It forms spores in one of its life stages.

Question 31.
Give examples of insectivorous plants.
Answer:
(ii) Some members are insectivorous plants. E.g. Venus fly trap, pitcher plant, bladderwort, while some are heterotrophic parasitic members like Cuscuta.

Question 32.
What are the two major group in which kingdom plantae is divided?
Answer:
(vi) It is divided into two major groups Cryptogams and Phanerogams.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 33.
Explain fungi like protist.
Answer:
(iii) Fungi like protists (Consumer decomposer protists):
(a) They form a group called Myxomycetes.
(b) They are saprophytic in nature, found on decaying leaves.
(c) Their cells aggregate to form a large cell mass called plasmodium.
(d) The spores of plasmodium are very tough and survive extreme conditions, e.g. Slime molds.

Question 34.
What are the characteristics of euglenoids?
Answer:
Euglenoids:

  1. They lack cell wall but have a tough covering of proteinaceous pellicle.
  2. Pellicle covering provides flexibility and contractibility to Euglena.
  3. They possess two flagella, one short and other long.
  4. They behave as heterotrophs in absence of light but possess pigments, similar to that of higher plants, for photosynthesis.

Question 35.
Explain in detail general characters of Kingdom Fungi.
Answer:
Euglenoids:

  1. They lack cell wall but have a tough covering of proteinaceous pellicle.
  2. Pellicle covering provides flexibility and contractibility to Euglena.
  3. They possess two flagella, one short and other long.
  4. They behave as heterotrophs in absence of light but possess pigments, similar to that of higher plants, for photosynthesis.

Question 36.
Why do fungi exhibit heterotrophic mode of nutrition?
Answer:
Nutrition: The fungi exhibit heterotrophic mode of nutrition and most of the members are saprophytes and absorb food which is decomposed (digested) outside. Some are parasitic or predators.

Question 37.
Name the four classes of kingdom fungi.
Answer:
Fungi are classified into four types on the basis of their structure, mode of spore formation and fruiting bodies as follows:
1. Phycomycetes:
Members of this class are commonly called as algal fungi.
These are consisting of aseptate coenocytic hyphae.
They grow well in moist and damp places on decaying organic matter as well as in aquatic habitats or as parasites on plants.
e.g. Mucor, Rhizopus (bread mold), Albugo (parasitic fungus on mustard).

2. Ascomycetes:
These are commonly called as sac fungi.
These are multicellular. Rarely they are unicellular (e.g. Yeast).
Hyphae are branched and septate.
They can be decomposers, parasites or coprophilous (grow on dung).
Some varieties of this class are consumed as delicacies such as morels and truffles.
Neurospora is useful in genetic and biochemical assays.
e.g. Aspergillus, Penicillium, Neurospora, Claviceps, Saccharomyces (unicellular ascomycetes).

3. Basidiomycetes:
These are commonly called as club fungi.
They have branched septate hyphae.
e.g. Agaricus (mushrooms), Ganoderma (bracket fungi), Ustilago (smuts), Puccinia (rusts), etc.

4. Deuteromycetes:
It is a group of fungi which are known to reproduce only asexually.
They are commonly called imperfect fungi.
They are mainly decomposers, while few are parasitic, e.g. Alternaria.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 38.
Explain in detail the class of kingdom fungi which includes yeast.
Answer:
Ascomycetes:

  1. These are commonly called as sac fungi.
  2. These are multicellular. Rarely they are unicellular (e.g. Yeast).
  3. Hyphae are branched and septate.
  4. They can be decomposers, parasites or coprophilous (grow on dung).
  5. Some varieties of this class are consumed as delicacies such as morels and truffles.
  6. Neurospora is useful in genetic and biochemical assays.
    e.g. Aspergillus, Penicillium, Neurospora, Claviceps, Saccharomyces (unicellular ascomycetes).

Question 39.
Why deuteromycetes are called imperfect fungi?
Answer:
Deuteromycetes:

  • It is a group of fungi which are known to reproduce only asexually.
  • They are commonly called imperfect fungi.
  • They are mainly decomposers, while few are parasitic, e.g. Alternaria.

Question 40.
What are lichens?
Answer:
The given picture represents Lichens.

  1. Lichen is an association of an alga and fungus.
  2. It is the best example of symbiosis or mutualism.
  3. They are found in extreme environments like snow clad poles.
  4. The algal component of lichen is phycobiont, mostly belongs to cyanobacteria (blue-green algae) or green algae and fungal component is mycobiont.
  5. Algae prepares the food and supplies it to the fungal component, while fungal component provides shelter to algae and also absorbs water and minerals for algae.
  6. The association is intense and it is difficult to identify them as separate living beings.
  7. They are very sensitive to pollutions, hence not found in polluted areas.
  8. They are used as pollution indicators.
  9. They play an important role in soil formation by using specific acid productions.
    [Note: Lichens cannot be categorized as acellular organisms]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 41.
What is the fungal partner in lichen called?
Answer:
The algal component of lichen is phycobiont, mostly belongs to cyanobacteria (blue-green algae) or green algae and fungal component is mycobiont.

Question 42.
What is the algal partner in lichen called?
Answer:
The algal component of lichen is phycobiont, mostly belongs to cyanobacteria (blue-green algae) or green algae and fungal component is mycobiont.

Question 43.
Why lichens are considered as pollution indicators?
Answer:
They are very sensitive to pollutions, hence not found in polluted areas.

Question 44.
Holozoic mode of nutrition is observed in which kingdom?
Answer:
Nutrition: They are heterotrophic, mostly holozoic, sometimes parasitic.

Question 45.
Who coined the name contagium vivum fluidum?
Answer:
M. W. Beijerinck referred virus as ‘contagium vivum fluidum (infectious living fluid).’

Question 46.
What is the genetic material in viruses?
Answer:
Viruses possess their own genetic material in the form of either DNA or RNA, but never both. The genetic material in viruses is covered by a protein coat (capsid), hence called nucleoprotein.

Question 47.
What are bacteriophages?
Answer:
Bacteriophage:
(a) They have tadpole-like shape.
(b) They infect bacteria and hence are called as bacteriophage.
(c) Bacteriophages were discovered by Twort.
(d) Bacteriophages have double stranded DNA as the genetic material.
(e) Its body consists of head, collar and tail.

Question 48.
Give example of viral disease caused in humans.
Answer:
Diseases caused by viruses in animals: Swine flu, Small pox, mumps, herpes, common cold, AIDS, etc.

Question 49.
Who discovered viroids?
Answer:
Viroids were discovered by Theodor Diener.

Question 50.
What is the genetic material in viroids?
Answer:
Viroids are very small, circular, single stranded RNA which are without any protein coat.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 51.
Multiplechoice Questions:

Question 1.
The term ‘Taxonomy’ was coined by
(A) Carl Linnaeus
(B) A.P. de Candolle
(C) Carl Woese
(D) R.H Whittaker
Answer:
(B) A.P. de Candolle

Question 2.
Arrangement of organisms into distinct categories is called
(A) Taxonomy
(B) Taxon
(C) Nomenclature
(D) Classification
Answer:
(D) Classification

Question 3.
The domain known for its survival in very extreme condition like high temperature, salinity, etc. is
(A) Eukarya
(B) Archaea
(C) Bacteria
(D) Cyanobacteria
Answer:
(B) Archaea

Question 4.
Kingdom Protista, Fungi, Plantae and Animalia are included under domain
(A) Eukarya
(B) Archaea
(C) Bacteria
(D) Cyanobacteria
Answer:
(A) Eukarya

Question 5.
Which system of classification was based upon easily observable characters?
(A) Natural
(B) Phylogenetic
(C) Artificial
(D) DNA barcoding
Answer:
(C) Artificial

Question 6.
System based upon chemical constituents of organisms is
(A) Cladogram
(B) Phylogeny
(C) DNA barcoding
(D) chemotaxonomy
Answer:
(D) chemotaxonomy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 7.
Woese’s three domain and Whittaker’s five kingdom concept is based upon
(A) Visible characters
(B) Phylogenetic relationship
(C) Numerical taxonomy
(D) DNA barcoding
Answer:
(B) Phylogenetic relationship

Question 8.
A taxonomic group of any rank is called
(A) grade
(B) category
(C) variety
(D) taxon

Question 9.
One of the following has correct descending sequence hierarchy
(A) class, division, order, family
(B) division, class, order, family
(C) order, family, class, division
(D) family, order, class, genus
Answer:
(B) division, class, order, family

Question 10.
Which among the following is an order?
(A) Malvales
(B) Polypetalae
(C) Angiospermae
(D) Hibiscus
Answer:
(A) Malvales

Question 11.
The basic unit of classification
(A) genus
(B) species
(C) kingdom
(D) family
Answer:
(B) species

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 12.
As we go higher in taxonomical ladder i.e. from species to kingdom, the number of common characters
(A) remains constant
(B) goes on increasing
(C) goes on decreasing
(D) increases till class and then starts decreasing
Answer:
(C) goes on decreasing

Question 13.
Group of species which resemble closely in morphological characters but do not interbreed is called
(A) genus
(B) species
(C) family
(D) order
Answer:
(A) genus

Question 14.
Highest category of taxonomy is
(A) species
(B) class
(C) order
(D) kingdom
Answer:
(D) kingdom

Question 15.
Carl Linnaeus introduced binomial system of nomenclature in his book
(A) Species Plantarum
(B) ICBN
(C) Plantarum Linnaeus
(D) Species Linnaeus
Answer:
(A) Species Plantarum

Question 16.
Before 2011, scientific names were confirmed by
(A) ICBN
(B) IBC
(C) ICZN
(D) IBA
Answer:
(A) ICBN

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 17.
Which code is also known as “Shenzhen code”?
(A) ICBN
(B) IBC
(C) ICZN
(D) IBA
Answer:
(B) IBC

Question 18.
In Helianthus annuus, ‘annuus ’ indicates
(A) genus
(B) species
(C) family
(D) class
Answer:
(B) species

Question 19.
In five kingdom classification, unicellular prokaryotes are included in kingdom
(A) Protista
(B) Fungi
(C) Monera
(D) Animalia
Answer:
(C) Monera

Question 20.
The bacteria that can withstand high salinities are called
(A) Saltophiles
(B) Thermophiles
(C) Halophiles
(D) Psychrophiles
Answer:
(C) Halophiles

Question 21.
The bacteria that can withstand extreme temperature are known as
(A) Saltophiles
(B) thermophiles
(C) Halophiles
(D) both (A) and (C)
Answer:
(B) thermophiles

Question 22.
Bacillus is
(A) comma shaped
(B) rod shaped
(C) kidney shaped
(D) spiral
Answer:
(B) rod shaped

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 23.
Which organism belongs Monera?
(A) Cyanobacteria
(B) Mushroom
(C) Euglena
(D) Moss
Answer:
(A) Cyanobacteria

Question 24.
_________ is an example of plant like protists.
(A) Diatoms
(B) Ustilago
(C) Entamoeba
(D) Euglena
Answer:
(A) Diatoms

Question 25.
Fungi like protist are also called as ________.
(A) Myxomycetes
(B) Mycomycetes
(C) Mycoplasm
(D) Yeast
Answer:
(A) Myxomycetes

Quesiton 26.
The body of a fungus is made up of
(A) hyphae
(B) sporangium
(C) rhizoid
(D) fruiting body
Answer:
(A) hyphae

Question 27.
Agaricus belongs to class
(A) Deuteromycetes
(B) Phycomycetes
(C) Basidiomycetes
(D) Ascomycetes
Answer:
(C) Basidiomycetes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 28.
Which of the following is harmful fungus that causes diseases in plants?
(A) Puccinia
(B) Mushroom
(C) Yeast
(D) Streptomyces
Answer:
(A) Puccinia

Question 29.
Which of the following is NOT true about kingdom animalia?
(A) Members are heterotrophs.
(B) They lack chlorophyll as well as cell wall.
(C) Growth is indeterminate.
(D) Most of the members have capacity of locomotion.
Answer:
(C) Growth is indeterminate.

Question 30.
Which of the following are virus free varieties of banana produced by tissue culture technique?
(A) Shrimanti
(B) Basarai
(C) G-9
(D) All of these
Answer:
(D) All of these

Question 31.
The fungal component of lichen is called
(A) phycobiont
(B) photobiont
(C) mycobiont
(D) symbiont
Answer:
(C) mycobiont

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 52.
Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Which of the following is against the rules of ICBN?
(A) Generic and specific names should be written starting with small letters.
(B) Hand written scientific names should be underlined.
(C) Every species should have a generic name and a specific epithet.
(D) Scientific names are in Latin and should be italized.
Hint: The generic name should start with a capital letter while the species name should start with small letter.
Answer:
(A) Generic and specific names should be written starting with small letters.

Question 2.
Select the correctly written scientific name of Mango which was first described by Carolus Linnaeus: [NEET Odisha 2019]
(A) Mangifera indica
(B) Mangifera Indica
(C) Mangifera indica Car. Linn.
(D) Mangifera indica Linn
Hint: The author’s name appears after the specific epithet i.e. at the end of the biological name in this manner – Mangifera indica Linn.
Answer:
(D) Mangifera indica Linn

Question 3.
Match the organisms in Column I with habitats in Column II.

Column I Column II
1. Halophiles (a) Hot springs
2. Thermoacidophiles (b) Aquatic environment
3. Methanogens (c) Guts of ruminants
4. Cyanobacteria (d) Salty areas

Select the correct answer from the options given below:
(A) i – b, ii – d, iii – c, iv – a
(B) i – d, ii – a, iii – c, iv – b
(C) i – a, ii – b, iii – c, iv – d
(D) i – c, ii – d, iii – b, iv – a
Answer:
(B) i – d, ii – a, iii – c, iv – b

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 4.
Which of the following statements is CORRECT?
(A) Lichens are not good pollution indicators.
(B) Lichens do not grow in polluted areas.
(C) Algal component of lichens is called mycobiont.,
(D) Fungal component of lichens is called phycobiont.
Hint: Lichens bare good pollution indicators as they do not grow in polluted areas.
Answer:
(B) Lichens do not grow in polluted areas.

Question 5.
Match Column – I with Column – II. Choose the correct answer from the options given below:

Column – I Column – II
1. Saprophyte (a) Symbiotic association of fungi with plants roots
2. Parasite (b) Decomposition of dead
3. Lichens (c) Living on living plants or animals
4. Mycorrhiza (d) Symbiotic association of algae and fungi

(A) i – q, ii – p, iii – r, iv – s
(B) i – q, ii – r, iii – s, iv – p
(C) i – p, ii – q, iii – r, iv – s
(D) i – r, ii – q, iii – p, iv – s
Answer:
(B) i – q, ii – r, iii – s, iv – p

Question 6.
Lowest category in the hierarchial system of classification is
(A) species
(B) order
(C) kingdom
(D) genus
Answer:
(A) species

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 7.
Which group of fungi is called imperfect fungi?
(A) Ascomycetes
(B) Phycomycetes
(C) Deuteromycetes
(D) Basidiomycetes
Answer:
(C) Deuteromycetes

Question 8.
Which one of the following is an Incorrect pair?
(A) Three kingdom system of classification → Haeckel
(B) Three domain system of classification → Adolf Mayr
(C) Five Kingdom system of classification → R.H.Whittaker
(D) Two kingdom system of classification → Carolus Linnaeus
Hint: Three domain system of classification → Carl Woese
Answer:
(B) Three domain system of classification → Adolf Mayr

Question 9.
In the system of classification, which one of the following is NOT a category?
(A) Kingdom
(B) Series
(C) Angiospermae
(D) Genus
Hint: Angiospermae is a taxon.
Answer:
(C) Angiospermae

Question 10.
Which one of the following characteristics is NOT shown by a virus?
(A) They are acellular.
(B) They can be crystallised.
(C) Active outside the host’s body.
(D) Have genetic material.
Hint: Viruses are inert outside the host cell.
Answer:
(C) Active outside the host’s body.

Question 11.
Select the WRONG statement.
(A) Pseudopodia are locomotory and feeding structures in Sporozoans.
(B) Mushrooms belong to Basidiomycetes.
(C) Cell wall is present in members of Fungi and Plantae.
(D) Mitochondria are the powerhouse of the cell in all kingdoms except Monera.
Hint: Pseudopodia are locomotory and feeding structures in Protozoans.
Answer:
(A) Pseudopodia are locomotory and feeding structures in Sporozoans.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 2 Systematics of Living Organisms

Question 12.
Which of the following are found in extreme saline conditions?
(A) Archaebacteria
(B) Eubacteria
(C) Cyanobacteria
(D) Mycobacteria
Hint: Bacteria found in extremely saline conditions are called halophiles. Archaebacteria includes bacteria that survive in most harsh habitats such as extreme salty area, hot springs and marshy area.
Answer:
(A) Archaebacteria

Question 13.
Which among the following are the smallest living cells, known without a definite cell wall, pathogenic to plants as well as animals and can survive without oxygen?
(A) Bacillus
(B) Pseudomonas
(C) Mycoplasma
(D) Nostoc

Question 14.
Viroids differ from viruses in having
(A) DNA molecules with protein coat
(B) DNA molecules without protein coat
(C) RNA molecules with protein coat
(D) RNA molecules without protein coat
Hint: Viroids are smaller than viruses. They are regarded as sub-viral agents or free RNA, without protein coat (usually found in viruses). They are infectious RNA. e.g. Potato spindle tuber disease.
Answer:
(D) RNA molecules without protein coat

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 7 Company Meetings – I

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 7 Company Meetings – I Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 7 Company Meetings – I

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
The business to be transacted at the meeting is called _____________
(a) Agenda
(b) Minutes
(c) Notice
Answer:
(a) Agenda

Question 2.
A proxy form must be deposited in the registered office of the company at least _____________ hours before the meeting.
(a) 48
(b) 24
(c) 12
Answer:
(a) 48

Question 3.
A copy of the special resolution must be filed with the registrar within _____________ days of the passing resolution.
(a) 30
(b) 60
(c) 90
Answer:
(a) 30

Question 4.
Quorum for a private company is _____________ members.
(a) 15
(b) 5
(c) 2
Answer:
(c) 2

Question 5.
Point of order can be raised by _____________
(a) Chairman
(b) Secretary
(c) Member
Answer:
(c) Member

Question 6.
One share one vote’ is a voting method following under _____________
(a) voting by show of hands
(b) voting by ballot
(c) voting by-poll
Answer:
(c) voting by-poll

Question 7.
A motion which is changed due to an amendment is called _____________ motion.
(a) Formal
(b) Substantive
(c) Closure
Answer:
(b) Substantive

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Agenda (1) Alteration in the original motion
(b) Amendment (2) Extra vote for chairman
(c) Point of Order (3) Rejected a motion
(d) Casting Vote (4) Objection raised by a member in the meeting
(e) Resolution (5) List of items to be transacted at the meeting
(6) Alteration in a Resolution
(7) Suggestion given by the member in the meeting
(8) Accepted Motion
(9) Only important items to be discussed at the meeting
(10) Extra vote for Directors

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) Agenda (5) List of items to be transacted at the meeting
(b) Amendment (1) Alteration in the original motion
(c) Point of Order (4) Objection raised by a member in the meeting
(d) Casting Vote (2) Extra vote for chairman
(e) Resolution (8) Accepted Motion

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
A list of items to be transacted at the meeting.
Answer:
Agenda

Question 2.
The minimum number of members to be present for a valid meeting.
Answer:
Quorum

Question 3.
The person who presides over the meeting.
Answer:
Chairman

Question 4.
A proposal is put before the meeting for discussion and decision.
Answer:
Motion

Question 5.
A motion finally passed at the meeting.
Answer:
Resolution

Question 6.
An alteration was proposed to the original motion.
Answer:
Amendment

Question 7.
A motion which brings to the notice of the Chairman the irregularities at the meeting.
Answer:
Point of Order

Question 8.
A person appointed by a member to attend and vote at the meeting.
Answer:
Proxy

Question 9.
An extra vote for the Chairman in case of tie-in votes.
Answer:
Casting vote

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
A proxy can vote under the poll method.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Notice of the meeting must be given 14 days in advance.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
An agenda is sent along with the notice.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Secretary has to sign the minutes book.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Motion is a final decision of the meeting.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Alteration can be done only by adding some new words.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
Point of Order is an objection raised by a member.
Answer:
True

Question 8.
Chairman can exercise casting votes in case of tie-in votes.
Answer:
True

Question 9.
A proxy cannot speak at the meeting.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
Secrecy can be maintained under voting by the show of hands method.
Answer:
False

Question 11.
A proxy need not be a member of the company.
Answer:
True

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Ordinary, Resolution, Special Resolution, Formal Motion.
Answer:
Formal Motion

Question 2.
Voting by voice, Voting by Ballot, Casting vote.
Answer:
Casting vote

Question 3.
Formal Motion, Substantive Motion, Resolution.
Answer:
Resolution

Question 4.
Voting by Poll, Voting by show of hands, Virtual voting.
Answer:
Virtual voting

Question 5.
Bare Statement Agenda, Draft Minutes Agenda, Minutes.
Answer:
Minutes

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
A person who presides over the meeting is known as _____________
Answer:
Chairman

Question 2.
Agenda is sent along with _____________
Answer:
Notice

Question 3.
Quorum for a private company is _____________
Answer:
2 members

Question 4.
A person responsible for proper conduct and to maintain order in the meeting is _____________
Answer:
Chairman

Question 5.
A motion which is changed due to amendment is called _____________
Answer:
Substantive motion

Question 6.
A resolution passed by simple majority is called _____________
Answer:
Ordinary Resolution

Question 7.
A special resolution, within 30 days of its passing must be filed with _____________
Answer:
Registrar of Companies

Question 8.
A representative of a member in a meeting is called _____________
Answer:
Proxy

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Voting by voice ……………………..
(2) ………………… 21 clear days
(3) Up to 1000 shareholders  ……………………
(4) …………………….. 15 days
(5) More than 5000 shareholders …………………….
(6) …………………… Writing
(7) Voting by Poll …………………….
(8) …………………… Objection
(9) Resolution by circulation ……………………
(10) ………………… Chairman

(Casting vote, Point of order, Directors, Motion, Secret method, Quorum is 5 members, Notice, Yes or No, Quorum is 30 members, Minutes)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Voting by voice Yes or No
(2) Notice 21 clear days
(3) Up to 1000 shareholders Quorum is 5 members
(4) Minutes 15 days
(5) More than 5000 shareholders Quorum is 30 members
(6) Motion Writing
(7) Voting by-poll Secret method
(8) Point of order Objection
(9) Resolution by circulation Directors
(10) Casting vote Chairman

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What is a quorum?
Answer:
Quorum is the minimum number of members required to be present for a valid meeting.

Question 2.
What is a proxy?
Answer:
A proxy is a person, who can attend and vote at the meeting on behalf of an absent member.

Question 3.
What is motion?
Answer:
A motion is a proposal put before the meeting for discussion and decision.

Question 4.
What is Resolution?
Answer:
A motion accepted in a meeting is called Resolution.

1I. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
The minimum number of members required to be present at a meeting’s called proxy.
Answer:
The minimum number of members required to be present at a meeting’s called Quorum.

Question 2.
Director draft s the minutes of a meeting.
Answer:
Secretary draft s the minutes of a meeting.

Question 3.
Voting by show of hands is a capitalistic method.
Answer:
Voting by show of hands is a democratic method.

Question 4.
The ordinary resolution requires a 75% majority of votes.
Answer:
A special resolution requires a 75% majority of votes.

Question 5.
Agenda is a record of business transacted at the meeting.
Answer:
Minutes is a record of business transacted at the meeting.

Question 6.
A notice period of general meeting needs 7 clear days.
Answer:
A notice period of general meeting needs 21 clear days.

1J. Arrange in proper order.

Question 1.
(a) Chairman
(b) Agenda
(c) Amendment
Answer:
(a) Agenda
(b) Chairman
(c) Amendment

Question 2.
(a) Point of order
(b) Quorum
(c) Motion
Answer:
(a) Quorum
(b) Motion
(c) Point of order

2. Distinguish between the following.

Question 1.
Motion and Amendment
Answer:

Basis Motion Amendment
1. Meaning Motion is a written proposal placed before the meeting for decision and discussion. An amendment is an alteration or modification proposed to the original motion.
2. Purpose The main purpose of the motion is to discuss and to make proper decisions. The main purpose of an amendment is to revise or modify the main motion.
3. Right to speak Every member can speak only once either in favour or against the motion. Only those members who have not spoken on the original motion can speak on an amendment.
4. Effect When a motion is accepted by the majority in the meeting, it becomes a resolution. When an amendment is approved by the majority, it becomes a part of the resolution.
5. Mover Mover of the motion can speak twice on his own motions. Mover of the amendment can speak only once on his own amendment.

Question 2.
Ordinary Resolution and Special Resolution
Answer:

Basis Ordinary Resolution Special Resolution
1. Meaning The resolution which is passed by a simple majority of votes is called Ordinary resolution. The resolution which is passed by 3/4th majority of votes is called a Special resolution.
2. Majority It requires more than 50% of the majority. It requires at least a 75% majority of votes.
3. Filing It is not filed with the Registrar of companies. It is filed with the Registrar of companies within 30 days of passing the resolution.
4. Business transacted It is necessary for routine and ordinary business. It is necessary for special business.
5. Examples Appointment of auditors, declaration of dividend, the election of directors, etc. Change in the name of the company, alteration in object clause, reduction in spare capital, etc.

3. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State the importance of the Agenda.
Answer:
Agenda is a list of items to be discussed or things to be done or the business to be transacted at the meeting. It is sent along with the notice. A secretary prepares the agenda in consultation with the Chairman.
Importance of Agenda:

  • Members come to know about the matter to be discussed at the meeting.
  • Members can come well prepared for the meeting, as the agenda is sent along with notice (21 clear days) before the meeting.
  • The agenda helps the chairman to conduct the meeting efficiently.
  • Items can be discussed as per the order mentioned in the agenda.
  • All items are discussed at the meeting. Routine matters are discussed first, followed by special matters.

Question 2.
State the provisions regarding Quorum.
Answer:
Quorum is the minimum number of members required to be present for transacting a valid business. Without a quorum, the proceeding of the meeting becomes invalid. The quorum should be present throughout the meeting i.e. from beginning till the end of the meeting. Secretary must check the quorum before the commencement of the meeting.

Provision relating to Quorum (Companies Act, 2013)
(i) Quorum for General Meeting:

In the case of a Public Company: Quorum depends on a number of shareholders.

No. of shareholders Quorum
Up to 1000 5 members
1000 – 5000 15 members
More than 5000 30 members

In the case of a Private Company: Two members personally present shall be the quorum for the meeting.

(ii) Quorum for Board Meeting:
According to the provision in the Companies Act, a quorum for the board meeting is l/3rd of its total directors or two directors whichever is higher. Any fraction should be rounded to one.

4. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Resolution cannot be amended
Answer:
(i) When a motion is accepted in a meeting it becomes a resolution.
(ii) When a motion is under discussion it can be amended.
(iii) Resolution is a final decision, it cannot be changed.
(iv) Motion is passed in the meeting after a required discussion on a particular matter.
(v) A resolution cannot be amended as it is a final decision taken in the meeting.
Thus, the resolution cannot be amended.

Question 2.
Quorum is required throughout the meeting.
Answer:

  • a minimum number of members required for a valid meeting is a quorum.
  • Members present in the beginning should be present during the entire period of the meeting.
  • If the quorum is not present, the meeting stands adjourned for the next week same day, same time, and same place.
  • In the absence of a quorum, if any meeting is conducted it is considered an invalid meeting.
  • If any resolution is passed in the absence of a quorum, then such resolution is considered an invalid and illegal resolution.
  • Thus, a quorum is required throughout the meeting.

Question 3.
The chairman has the right of casting vote.
Answer:

  • A casting vote is a special type of vote given only by the Chairman of the meeting.
  • It is an additional vote given to the Chairman in case of equality of votes in favour and against a motion.
  • The chairman can use his vote only in the case of a tie.
  • This means when the votes cast for and against the resolution are equal.
  • It is a decisive vote as the final decision depends on the manner in which it is used by the Chairman.
  • The purpose of the casting vote is to have some definite decision on the matter for discussion before the meeting.
  • As per the provision in the Articles of Association, this vote can be exercised only by the chairman of the meeting.
  • Hence, the chairman has the right of casting vote.
  • Thus, the chairman has the right of casting vote.

Question 4.
Minutes of a meeting, once approved cannot be changed.
Answer:

  • Minutes are the factual and official records of the proceedings of the meeting in the form of decisions and resolutions.
  • Minutes are the legal evidence of the proceedings conducted in a meeting.
  • They cannot be changed once they are finalized and confirmed by the Chairman.
  • If any rectification is to be done and is necessary, it is carried out by passing a resolution in the next meeting and recording the same in the minute’s book.
  • Thus, the minutes of a meeting, once approved cannot be changed.

Question 5.
The agenda is useful to the chairman of the meeting.
Answer:

  • Agenda means a list of items to be done at the meeting.
  • It is a programme of the meeting.
  • It is prepared by the secretary in consultation with the chairman.
  • It is a guideline to the chairman of the meeting.
  • It enables the chairman to conduct the business of the meeting in an orderly manner.
  • Routine matters which can be discussed and decided in fewer times are arranged first in the serial order, after that special business or time-consuming matters.
  • This makes it easy for the chairman to go through it and discuss the matters.
  • Thus, the agenda is useful to the chairman of the meeting.

5. Answer the following questions.

Question 1.
Explain the kind of motion.
Answer:
A motion is a proposal put before the meeting for discussion and decision. A person who proposes a motion is called a proposer or a mover of a motion.
Kinds of Motion:

  • Formal Motion
  • Substantive Motion

(i) Formal Motion:
Formal motions are moved for the purpose of preventing or delaying or speeding up discussion on a motion.
Types of Formal Motion:
(a) Closure Motion:
This motion is moved when sufficient time is spent on the discussion of a particular motion. Any member can propose that ‘The question be now put’ to vote. This is a closure motion. The main object of this motion is to avoid waste of time and to arrive at a quick decision. If this motion is put to vote and if the majority approves, no further discussion is permitted.

(b) Previous Question Motion:
The main purpose of this motion is to prevent discussion on the main motion. When a member feels that it is unwise to consider the main motion, they may move the previous question. The wording of this motion is ‘The question be not now put’. If it is carried, the discussion on the main motion is dropped. If the previous question is lost, the original motion is put to vote.

(c) Next Business Motion:
The purpose of the motion is similar to the previous question motion. The wording of the motion is ‘The meeting to proceed to next business. Such a motion is moved when a member feels that the main motion under discussion is of little importance and other items of importance remain to be transacted. If it is carried, the original motion is dropped at once and the meeting proceeds to the next business.

(d) Adjournment of Debate Motion:
The main aim of this motion is to postpone the debate. The wordings of this motion are ‘The debate on the subject is adjourned’. The mover of the motion feels that some extra information is needed for further discussion and the discussion should be delayed for some time. If this motion is carried, the debate will be adjourned. If it is lost, the debate continues.

(e) Adjournment of Meeting:
The main aim of this motion is to postpone the meeting for a particular period or indefinite period. The wording of this motion is ‘The meeting be now adjourned’. If it is carried the meeting is postponed to a future date. If it is lost, the meeting continues.

(ii) Substantive Motion:
A motion that is changed due to an amendment is called a substantive motion. When an amendment is passed, it is incorporated in the original motion and the substantive motion is put to vote. If it is passed, it becomes a resolution.

Question 2.
Explain the essentials of notice of a meeting.
Answer:
Notice is an advance intimation given by the company informing the day, date, time, and place of meeting and business to be transacted at the meeting. It is given in writing to all those who are entitled to receive it.
(i) Essentials of the notice of a meeting:

  • Nature and type of meeting.
  • The exact day, date, time, and place of the meeting.
  • The agenda of the meeting.
  • A statement of a member entitled to attend the meeting and appoint a proxy.
  • Any intention to pass a special resolution must be mentioned in the notice.
  • Statutory note and explanation, if any special business is to be transacted.

(ii) Proper authority to send notice:
The Board of Directors is the proper authority to send the notice. Under exceptional circumstances, members of the National Company Law Tribunal or Central Government may send a notice for the meeting.

(iii) Proper authority to receive notice:

  • All shareholders in case of the shareholders meeting.
  • Auditors, in case of Annual General Meeting.
  • The legal representative of the deceased or insolvent person.
  • First name in Register of members, in case of joint holders.
  • All directors in case of Board Meeting and General Meeting.

(iv) Period of Notice:
In the case of a general meeting, notice must be sent 21 clear days before the actual meeting (day of sending and day of meeting are excluded). In the case of a Board meeting, 7 days’ notice is required.

(v) Modes of serving notice:

  • It can be sent either personally or by ordinary post at the registered address of the member in India.
  • If no registered address in India, then it can be sent to the address, given by the members.
  • It can be sent by registered post if requested by the member. Charges for the same are to be paid in advance.
  • It is to be advertised in all leading newspapers, (English and regional language) where the registered office is situated.
  • It can also be sent through electronic mode i.e. email.

(vi) A statement to be sent along with notice:
In case any special business is to be transacted in the general meeting, an explanatory statement to that effect is to be annexed to the notice.

(vii) Omission to give notice:
If notice is not served to one or more members deliberately, the meeting stands invalid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

1A. Select the correct answer from the options given below and rewrite the statements.

Question 1.
DIN means __________
(a) Director Identification Number
(b) Secretary Identification Number
(c) Doctor Identification Number
Answer:
(a) Director Identification Number

Question 2.
Private company requires __________ Directors.
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 1
Answer:
(b) 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 3.
COO means __________
(a) Chief Operating Officer
(b) Chief Financial Officer
(c) Chief Organization Officer
Answer:
(a) Chief Operating Officer

Question 4.
CS means __________
(a) Company Secretary
(b) Company Standard
(c) Chief Store Manager
Answer:
(a) Company Secretary

1B. Match the pairs.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) DIN (1) Whole-time Director
(b) Executive Director (2) Chief Executive Officer
(c) Key Managerial Personnel (3) Alternate Director
(d) Company Secretary (4) Director Identification Number
(e) Chief Financial Officer (5) Member of ICWA
(6) Officer responsible for Company’s finance
(7) Member of ICSI
(8) Officer responsible for Company’s Management

Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(a) DIN (4) Director Identification Number
(b) Executive Director (1) Whole-time Director
(c) Key Managerial Personnel (2) Chief Executive Officer
(d) Company Secretary (7) Member of ICSI
(e) Chief Financial Officer (6) Officer responsible for Company’s finance

1C. Write a word or a term or a phrase that can substitute each of the following statements.

Question 1.
DIN means.
Answer:
Director Identification Number

Question 2.
This is an audit that checks the compliance of the company.
Answer:
Secretarial Audit

Question 3.
It aims to achieve and integrate corporate practices to all companies.
Answer:
Secretarial Standard

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 4.
As a principal officer of the company.
Answer:
Secretary

Question 5.
A Director who is in Whole Time Employment of the company.
Answer:
Whole Time Director

Question 6.
A first secretary appointed by the promoter.
Answer:
Pro-tem Secretary

Question 7.
Written proceeding of the meeting.
Answer:
Minutes

Question 8.
A person holding shares of nominal value ₹ 20,000.
Answer:
Small shareholders

Question 9.
Shares are required to be bought by the directors.
Answer:
Qualification shares

Question 10.
The person nominated on the Board by a dominant shareholder.
Answer:
Nominee Director

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 11.
The director is in full-time employment with the company.
Answer:
Executive Director or Whole Time Director

Question 12.
Director designated as ‘Outside Director’.
Answer:
Nonexecutive Director

Question 13.
Fees paid to Directors for attending a Board meeting
Answer:
Sitting fees

1D. State whether the following statements are True or False.

Question 1.
A Directors include whole-time employment of company is called WTD.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
DIN is required for Directorship.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Secretarial audit checks the compliance of the company.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 4.
Secretary is not the principal officer of the company.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Not providing guidance to the Board of Directors of the company is a general duty of the secretary.
Answer:
False

1E. Find the odd one.

Question 1.
Directors as Agents, as managing partners, As a company secretary.
Answer:
As a company secretary

Question 2.
First Directors, Casual vacancy, Audit.
Answer:
Audit

Question 3.
Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Promoter.
Answer:
Promoter

1F. Complete the sentences.

Question 1.
Statutory duties of secretary is to make all meetings __________
Answer:
minutes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 2.
There is no prohibition on having more than one in a company __________
Answer:
Managing Director

Question 3.
CFO is __________
Answer:
Chief Financial Officer

Question 4.
WTD means __________
Answer:
Whole Time Director

Question 5.
KMP is __________
Answer:
Key Managerial Personnel

1G. Select the correct option from the bracket.

Question 1.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Managing Director …………………………..
(2) ……………………. ICSI passed
(3) Manager …………………………..
(4) Secretarial Audit Checks the Legislations

(Substantial powers, Fulltime employee, Secretary, Checks the legislations)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) Managing Director Substantial powers
(2) Secretary ICSI passed
(3) Manager Full-time employee
(4) Secretarial Audit Checks the Legislations

Question 2.

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) First Director ……………………….
(2) ……………………. Key Managerial Personnel
(3) Pro-tem Secretary ……………………….
(4) Secretarial Standards ……………………….

(First Secretary, Appointed by the Promoter, Formulated by ICSI, Whole Time Director)
Answer:

Group ‘A’ Group ‘B’
(1) First Director Appointed by the Promoter
(2) Whole Time Director Key Managerial Personnel
(3) Pro-tem Secretary First Secretary
(4) Secretarial Standards Formulated by ICSI

1H. Answer in one sentence.

Question 1.
What do you mean by Nominee Director?
Answer:
The person nominated on the board by a major/dominant shareholder is known as the nominee director.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 2.
What do you mean by Independent Director?
Answer:
Independent Director is a director other than managing director, whole-time director, or a nominee director.

Question 3.
Which Companies have to appoint a Woman Director?
Answer:
Every listed company and the public company has a paid-up share capital of Rs. 100 crores or more and whose turnover is Rs. 300 crores or more, have to appoint a Woman Director.

Question 4.
What do you mean by Alternate Director?
Answer:
It means a director who is nominated by the board to act in the place of a director in his absence.

Question 5.
Who is in full-time employment with the company?
Answer:
The executive director (WTD) is in full-time employment with the company.

Question 6.
What do you mean by Qualification shares?
Answer:
Qualification shares are those shares that are to be bought by the intending director, so as to become a director of a company.

1I. Correct the underlined word and rewrite the following sentences.

Question 1.
RIN is the unique identification number of the director.
Answer:
DIN is the unique identification number of the director.

Question 2.
Whole-time Director is not involved in the day-to-day management of the company.
Answer:
Non-Executive Director is not involved in the day-to-day management of the company.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 3.
A company having paid-up share capital of ₹ 10 crores or more has to appoint a Woman Director.
Answer:
A company having paid-up share capital of ₹ 100 crores or more has to appoint a Woman Director.

Question 4.
Big Shareholder’s Directors is not a mandatory appointment.
Answer:
Small Shareholder’s Directors is not a mandatory appointment.

Question 5.
Directors are regarded as an employee of the company.
Answer:
Directors are regarded as an elected representatives of shareholders of the company.

Question 6.
A small shareholder is a person holding shares of a maximum of ₹ 50,000.
Answer:
A small shareholder is a person holding shares of a maximum of ₹ 20,000.

Question 7.
The manager needs to be the director of the company.
Answer:
The managing director needs to be the director of the company.

2. Explain the following Terms/Concepts.

Question 1.
Pro-tem Secretary
Answer:
The first secretary appointed by the promoters of the company is termed as Pro-tem Secretary. He may or may not be appointed as a regular secretary by the Board.

Question 2.
Sitting Fees
Answer:
Fees paid to the director for attending Board or Committee meeting is called as Sitting fees. It may extend up to Rs. one lakh also.

3. Answer in brief.

Question 1.
State the importance of DIN.
Answer:
Importance of DIN:

  • It helps the investors to take accurate and appropriate decisions, as through DIN they get to know the composition of top management of the company.
  • It helps to handle the problems arising due to the company creating fraud after raising capital from the investors.
  • It helps to detect and handle offenses committed by a particular Director.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 2.
What are the general duties of a Company Secretary?
Answer:
General duties depend on the size and nature of the business.
Some of the general duties are as follows:

  • To provide guidance to the Board and Director with respect to their duties, responsibilities, and powers.
  • To represent before different regulators and authorities and discharge different duties under the Act.
  • To assist the Board in the conduct of the affairs of the company.
  • To assist and advise the Board in ensuring good corporate governance.
  • To perform all the duties that may be assigned by the Board from time to time.

Question 3.
State the rights of a Company Secretary.
Answer:
Rights of a Company Secretary: Rights are given to the Secretary by the Companies Act, Board of Directors, and the Shareholders.
The rights of the Company Secretary are given below:

  • Right to control and supervise the working of his department.
  • Right to be indemnified by the company if any loss is suffered by Secretary while performing or discharging his duties.
  • Right to sign a document requiring authentication.
  • Right to get remuneration as an employee of the company.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Secretarial Practice Important Questions Chapter 6 Directors and Key Managerial Personnel of a Company

Question 4.
State the importance of Secretarial Audit?
Answer:
Importance of Secretarial Audit:

  • It provides a mechanism that monitors the compliance requirements.
  • It detects errors and mistakes in compliance with companies’ rules and regulations mechanism.
  • It prevents the company from the risk and losses due to non-compliance.
  • It builds the confidence of regulators, management, and stakeholders.
  • Investors feel relaxed that the company is following a disciplined approach towards management.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 1.
What are alcohols? How are they classified?
Answer:
Alcohols are the hydroxy derivatives of hydrocarbons in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by hydroxyl group.

Examples : CH3 – OH methyl alcohol, CH3 – CH2 – OH ethyl alcohol. Depending on the basis of hydroxyl groups present in a molecule, alcohols are classified into monohydric, dihydric, trihydric and polyhydric alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 2.
What are monohydric alcohols? How are they classified?
Answer:
Alcohols having only one hydroxyl group in their molecules are called monohydric alcohols. Monohydric alcohols are classified according to the type of hybridization of the carbon atom to which the hydroxyl group is attached.

(1) Alcohols containing Csp3 – OH bond : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 – hybridised carbon atom of alkyl group. These alcohols are represented as R-OH. They are further classified as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols in which – OH group is attached to primary, secondary and tertiary carbon atoms respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 2

(a) Allylic alcohols : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 -hybridised carbon atom next to the carbon-carbon double bond i.e., to allylic carbon. Allylic alcohols may be primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 3

(b) Benzylic alcohols : In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp3 -hybridised carbon atom next to an aromatic ring. Benzylic alcohols may be primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 4

(2) Alcohols containing Csp3 – OH bond: In these alcohols -OH group is attached to a sp2 – hybridised carbon atom,
i.e., vinylic carbon. These alcohols are also called vinylic alcohols.
e.g., CH2 = CH – OH vinyl alcohol.

Question 3.
What are phenols (carbolic acids)?
Answer:
Hydroxy derivatives of aromatic hydrocarbons in which the hydroxyl group is directly attached to the aromatic ring are called phenols.
Examples:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 5

Question 4.
What is phenol? OR Define carbolic acid.
Answer:
The hydroxy derivative of benzene in which the OH group is directly attached to benzene ring is called phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 6

Question 5.
How are phenols classified? Give suitable examples.
Answer:
Phenols are classified on the basis of number of hydroxyl (- OH) groups present in a molecule of phenol.
(1) Monohydric phenols : Phenols contain one hydroxyl group in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 8

(2) Dihydric Phenols : Phenols contain two hydroxyl groups in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 9

(3) Trihydric phenols : Phenols contain three hydroxyl groups in their molecule.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 10

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 6.
What are ethers? How are ethers classified?
Answer:
They are alkoxy derivatives of alkanes in which a hydrogen atom of alkane (R – H) is replaced by alkoxy group ( – O – R) and divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups or two aryl groups or one alkyl and one aryl group. Ethers are organic oxides R – O – Ar, Ar – O – Ar.
E.g. R – O – R or C2H5 – O – C2H5.

Ethers are classified into two groups as follows :
(1) Simple or symmetrical ether : The ethers in which both alkyl (or aryl) groups attached to the oxygen atom are same are called simple ethers.
E.g. (R – O – R), CH3 – O – CH3, dimethyl ether; C6H5 – O -C6H5 diphenyl ether.

(2) Mixed or unsymmetrical ethers : The ethers in which the two alkyl (or aryl) groups attached to the oxygen atom are different are called mixed ethers.
E.g. (R – O – R), CH3 – O – C2H5 ethyl methyl ether; C2H5 – O – C6H5 ethyl phenyl ether.

Question 7.
What is the general formula of ethers?
Answer:
The general formula of ethers is CnH2n + 2 O. For example, dimethyl ether CH3 – O – CH3 has molecular formula C2H6O.

Common nomenclature system :
(1) In this system, monohydric alcohols (R — OH) are named as alkyl alcohols.
(2) According to the attachment of hydroxyl group to a carbon atom they are named with prefixes as n-(normal or primary) alcohol, sec-(secondary) alcohol, tert-(tertiary) alcohol.
(3) Alcohols with two hydroxyl groups are named as glycols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 12

Carbinol system : In this system alcohols are considered as derivatives of methyl alcohol which is called carbinol. The alkyl group attached to the carbon carrying – OH group are named in alphabetical order. Then the suffix carbinol is added.

For example :Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 13

IUPAC system of nomenclature :

  • In this system, alcohols are named as alkanols.
  • A longest continuous chain of carbon atoms containing – OH group is chosen as a parent hydrocarbon and alcohol is considered as a hydroxy derivative of this alkane.
  • The carbon atoms are numbered from a terminal carbon atom nearest to a carbon atom attached to – OH group so that the position of – OH group is indicated by the lowest locant.
  • ‘e’ of an alkane is preplaced by ‘oT, giving alkanol. The number of OH groups is indicated by prefix, di, tri, etc. before ‘oT. The positions of -OH groups are indicated by appropriate locants.
  • The different substituents are arranged in the alphabetical order, and their positions are indicated by proper numbers.
  • Their names are hyphened on either sides except the last substituent.
  • For cyclic alcohols are named by using prefix cyclo to the parent alkane considering – OH group attached to carbon atom C – 1.

Question 8.
Give common and IUPAC names for the following :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 14
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 15

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 9.
Classify the following alcohols as primary, secondary and tertiary and write their IUPAC names.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 16

Question 10.
Give the structures of the following :
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) 2-Methylbutan-l-ol
(4) Pentan-3-ol
(5) Butan-2-ol
(6) 3-Methylbutan-2-ol
(7) Hexan-l-ol
(8) 3-Methylpentan-3-ol
(9) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
(10) Butan-l-ol (H-Butyl alcohol)
(11) 2-Methylpropan-l-ol
(12) 2,3-Dimethylbutan-l-ol
(13) 2, 3-Dimethylbutan-2-oI
(14) 2-MethyIhexan-l-ol
(15) 2,2,3-Trimethylpentan-3-ol
(16) 2,3,3-Trimethylbutan-2-ol
(17) 3-EthyI-4-methylpentan-l-ol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 17
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 18

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 11.
Give the IUPAC names of the following alcohols. Classify them as primary (1°), secondary (2°) and tertiary (3°) alcohols. Identify allylic and benzylic alcohols amongst them.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 19
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 20

Question 12.
Write all the possible structural isomers of alcohol having molecular formula C6H140. Give their IUPAC names. Classify them as primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols. Identify optically active alcohols amongst them.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 21
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 22

The optical isomers of C6H14O are (2), (3), (6), (7), (12).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 13.
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 23

Question 14.
Write IUPAC names of following alcohols :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 24

Question 15.
Write the structures of following alcohols : (1 mark each)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 25

The IUPAC system name of phenol is benzenol. The common name phenol is also accepted by IUPAC. The common names have prefixes ortho, meta and para in substituted phenols. IUPAC system uses the locant 2-, 3-, 4-, etc. to indicate the positions of substituents.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 16.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 26
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 27

Question 17.
Write IUPAC name of the following compounds :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 28

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 18.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of isomeric phenols represented by the molecular formula C8H10O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 29

Common and IUPAC system of nomenclature of ethers

In the common system of nomenclature, the ethers are named by writing names of the alkyl groups attached to the oxygen atom in alphabetical order and word ether is added. If two alkyl groups are same, prefix di- is used. According too the IUPAC system of nomenclature, ethers are named as alkoxyalkanes. The larger alkyl group is considered to be parent alkane. The name of the smaller alkane is prefixed by the name of alkoxy group and its locant.

Question 19.
Give common name and JUPAC name for the I11owing ethers :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 30

Question 20.
Give the IUPAC name of the following ethers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 31

Question 23.
Give the structures and IUPAC names of all metameric ethers represented by formula C5H12O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 38

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 24.
How many isomeric compounds can be represented by formula C4H10O?
Answer:
A compound with the molecular formula C4H10O can show two functional isomers as a monohydric alcohol and ether.

Isomers of C4H10O as alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 39
Isomers of C4H10O as ether :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 40

Hence, the total number of isomers of C4H10O are seven

Question 25.
Write the structural formula and IUPAC names of all possible isomers of the compound with molecular formula C3H8O.
Answer:
Possible isomers of C3H8O with structural formulae and IUPAC names :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 41

Question 26.
Write structures of alcoholic and ether isomers of a compound having molecular formula C7H8O.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 42

Question 27.
How is alkyl halide converted into alcohol by using
(1) Aqueous NaOH (or KOH),
(2) Moist silver oxide?
Answer:
(1) When an alkyl halide (R – X), is boiled with aqueous NaOH (or KOH) an alcohol is obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 43
(2) Alkyl halide when heated with moist Ag2O, undergoes hydrolysis and forms an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 44

Question 28.
How are following compounds prepared by hydrolysis of alkyl halides
(1) Ethanol
(2) Isopropyl alcohol
(3) tert-butyl alcohol
(4) methyl alcohol
(5) butan-2-ol?
Answer:
(1) Ethanol When ethyl bromide (bromoethane) is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, ethyl alcohol is formed. The reaction is called a hydrolysis reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 45

(2) Isopropyl alcohol : When isopropyl bromide (2-bromopropane) is boiled with aqueous potassium hydroxide, isopropyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 46

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol : When tert-butyl chloride is refluxed with aqueous potassium hydroxide, tert-butyl alcohol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 47

(4) Methyl alcohol : When methyl bromide (bromomethane) is heated with aq KOH, it is hydrolysed to methyl alcohol (methanol).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 48

(5) Butan-2-ol : When 2-Chlorobutane is boiled with aqueous KOH, Butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 29.
How are following compounds prepared from alkyl halides using moist silver oxide?
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-2-ol.
Answer: ‘
(1) Bromoethane (C2H5Br) when boiled with moist Ag2O undergoes hydrolysis and forms C2H5OH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 50

(2) When 2-chloropropane is boiled with moist Ag20, propan-2-ol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 51

Question 30.
What is hydration of alkenes or olefins? How is it carried out? Explain with an example.
OR
How are alcohols prepared from alkenes?
Answer:
The addition of a water molecule across the double bond in an alkene is called hydration of alkenes or olefins.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 52

Hydration does not take place directly. It is carried out by passing an alkene through cold and concentrated H2SO4 which forms deliquescent solid, alkyl hydrogen sulphate, which when boiled with water forms an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 53

Question 31.
How are the following compounds obtained by hydration of alkenes :
(1) Ethyl alcohol
(2) Isopropyl alcohol
(3) Tert-butyl alcohol?
Answer:
(1) When ethene is passed through cold 98 % H2SO4, ethyl hydrogen sulphate is formed, which on heating with water gives ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 54

(2) Propene with cold 80% H2SO4 gives isopropyl hydrogen sulphate which further on boiling with water gives isopropyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 55

(3) 2-Methylpropene (isobutylene) directly reacts with 50 % H2SO4 giving tert-butyl hydrogen sulphate, which when heated with water gives tert-butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 56

Question 32.
Identify C in the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 58

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 33.
Explain hydroboration-oxidation of alkene.
Answer:
When diborane is treated with alkene in the presence of tetrahydrofuran (THF) solvent, an addition product trialkyl borane is formed. Trialkyl borane is then oxidised with alkaline peroxide forms primary alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 62

The addition of diborane to the double bond takes place in such a way that the boron gots attached to the less substituted carbon. The overall reaction gives Anti-Markovnikov’s product from unsymmetrical alkenes.

Question 34.
How is propan-l-ol prepared using diborane?
Answer:
When diborane is treated with propene, in the presence of THF an addition product tripropyl borane is formed. Tripropyl borane is then oxidised to propan-l-ol using hydrogen peroxide in the presence of dil NaOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 63
The addition of diborane to the double bond takes place in such a way that the boron gets attached to the less substituted carbon. The alcohol formed by the addition of water to the alkene in a way opposite to the Markovnikov’s rule.

Question 35.
How is ethanol prepared using diborane?
Answer:
When diborane is treated with ethene in the presence of THF an addition product triethylborane is formed.Triethylborane is then oxidised with hydrogen peroxide to form ethyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 64

Question 36.
Predict the major product when 2-methylbut-2-ene is converted into an alcohol in each of the following methods :
(1) acid catalysed hydration
(2) hydroboration by BH3 – THF complex.
Answer:
(1) Acid catalysed hydration :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 66
(2) Hydroboration by BH3 – THF complex :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 67

Question 37.
How are alcohols prepared from aldehydes and ketones?
OR
How are the following compounds obtained using Ni as catalyst and at high temperature
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-2-ol?
Answer:
Aldehyde and ketones are carbonyl compounds containing a carbonyl group  C = O. The reduction of the carbonyl group gives an alcohol.

(1) Primary alcohols are prepared by the reduction of aldehydes.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 68

Example : When acetaldehyde is reduced with hydrogen in the presence of nickel as catalyst and at high temperature, ethyl alcohol (ethanol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 69

(2) Secondary alcohols are prepared by the reduction of ketones.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 70

Example : When acetone is reduced with hydrogen in the presence of nickel as catalyst and at high temperature, isopropyl alcohol (propan-2-ol) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 71

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 38.
How will you convert carboxylic acids and esters to primary alcohols? Explain with suitable examples.
Answer:
Carboxylic acids and esters are not easily reduced by catalytic hydrogenation or by NaBH4. However, relatively more reactive and an expensive LiAlH4 is used to convert carboxylic acids and esters to primary alcohols. When acetic acid is reduced in the presence of LiAlH4 and followed by their acid hydrolysis, ethyl alcohol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 72

When ethyl acetate is reduced in the presence of LiA1H4 and followed by their acid hydrolysis. n-propyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 73

[Since LiA1H4 is an expensive reagent. commercially acids are reduced to alcohol by converting them to esters, followed by their reduction. (catalytic hydrogenation)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 74

Question 39.
How is Crotoflyl alcohol obtained from crotonaldehyde?
Answer:
When crotonaldehyde is reduced in the presence of lithium aluminium hydride, the produc obtained is hydrolysed to give crotonyl alcohol. Here. LiA1H4 does not reduce carbon-carbon double bond.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 75

Question 40.
WrIte the structure of aldehyde that yields
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 79
Answer:
The structure of aldehyde:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 80

Question 41.
How are the following compounds prepared using Grignard reagent
(1) Ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) Propan-2-ol
(4) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol?|
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, CH3 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute HCl forms ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 81

(2) Propanol-l-ol : Formaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent, C2H5 – Mg – I in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute HC1 forms Propan-l-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 82

(3) Propan-2-ol : An acetaldehyde on reaction with Grignard reagent in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute acid HC1, forms propan-2-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 83
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 84

(4) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol : Acetone on reaction with Grignard reagent in dry ether forms a complex which on further hydrolysis with dilute acid HCl, forms a tertiary butyl alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 85

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 42.
Give a mechanism of following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 86
Answer:
Grignand reagent reacts with aldehyde or ketone to form an adduct which on hydrolysis with dil. acid gives the corresponding alcohol.

In the first step, the nucleophilic addition of Grigard reagent to the carbonyl group resulting in the formation of an adduct, which on hydrolysis yields an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 87

Question 43.
Write the structure of carbonyl compounds that can be converted by reduction methods into following alcohols :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 89
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 90
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 91

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 92
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 93

Question 44.
Using Grignard reagent, suggest synthesis of following alcohols from aldehydes or ketones. Wherever possible, suggest more than one combination.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 94
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 95
(b) Synthesis of propan- 1-01:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 96
(c) Synthesis of butan-2-ol:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 97
(d) Synthesis of 2-methylhexan-2-oI:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 98

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 45.
How will you obtain butan-2-ol from
(1) Propanal
(2) butan-2-one
(3) but-2-ene?
Answer:
(1) Propanal : When propanal is treated with methyl magnesium iodide in the presence of dry ether, a complex is formed, which on acid hydrolysis butan 2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 99
(2) Butan-2-one: When butan-2-one is hydrogenated at 413 K in the presence of catalyst finely divided nickel butan-2-ol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 100
(3) But-2-ene : When but-2-ene is passed through cold concentrated sulphuric acid, isobutyl hydrogen sulphate is formed. Isobutyl hydrogen sulphate on heating with water gives butan-2-ol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 101

Question 46.
Write the structure of aldehyde, carboxylic acid and ester that yield the following alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 102
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 103

Question 47.
How will you prepare?
(1) 2-Ntethylbutan-1-oI from an alkene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 104

(2) CycIoheyImethanoI from a Grignard reagent.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 105

(3) 1-Phenyl ethanol from acelaldehyde.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 106

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 48.
How are following conversions brought about?
(1) Benzyl chloride to benzyl alcohol. (NCERT)
OR
How is benzyl alcohol prepared from benzyl chloride?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 107

(2) Benzyl alcohol to Benzoic acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 108

(3) 1-Ethyl cyclohexanol from cyclohexanone.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 109

Question 49.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from chlorobenzene (Dow’s process)? OR
Write chemical reaction for the preparation of phenol from chlorobenzene.
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from chlorobenzene (Dow’s process) : Chlorobenzene is fused with NaOH at about 623 K under a pressure of about 150 atmospheres (1.5 x 107 Nm-2), when sodium phenoxide is formed. Sodium phenoxide is acidified with dil.HCl to obtain phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 110

Question 51.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from benzene sulphonic acid?
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from benzene sulphonic acid : Benzene sulphonic acid is neutralized with the requisite quantity of soda ash (Na2CO3) or NaOH and the solution is evaporated to obtain sodium benzene sulphonate salt. Dry sodium benzene sulphonate is fused with an excess of caustic soda (NaOH) at about 573 K when sodium phenoxide is formed. The fused mass of sodium phenoxide on treatment with dilute HC1 gives phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 112

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 52.
How is phenol (carbolic acid) prepared from aniline (diazotization)?
OR
How is carbolic acid prepared from amino benzene?
Answer:
Preparation of phenol from aniline (diazotization) : When aniline is treated with sodium nitrite and hydrochloric acid (NaNO2 + HC1) at low temperature (0°C – 5°C), benzene diazonium chloride is formed. This reaction is called diazotization. An aqueous solution of benzene diazonium chloride on warming with water or dil. H2S04 gives phenol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 113

Question 54.
Describe the physical properties of alcohols and phenols.
Answer:
The properties of alcohols and phenols are mainly due to the hydroxyl group.

(1) Nature of intermolecular forces : Due to presence of – OH groups, alcohols and phenols are polar molecules. The polar – OH groups are held together by the strong intermolecular forces i.e. hydrogen bonding.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 114

(2) Physical State : Lower alcohols are colourless, toxic liquids having characteristic alcoholic odour. Pure phenol is colourless, toxic, low melting solid having characteristic carbolic or phenolic odour.

(3) Boiling Points : The boiling points of alcohols and phenols increase with increase in their molecular mass.
Methyl alcohol – 65 °C
Phenol -182° C
n-Butyl alcohol-118 °C
o-nitrophenol-217 °C

(4) Solubility : Solubility of alcohols and phenols in water due to their ability to form intermolecular hydrogen bonding.

Question 55.
Arrange the following compounds in order of their increasing boiling points.
Butan-2-ol, ethanol, pentan-l-ol, butan -l-ol, propan-l-ol, methanol.
Answer:
Methanol, ethanol, propan:l-ol, butan-2-ol, butan-1 -ol pentan-l-ol.

Question 56.
Explain the following :
(1) Ethanol has higher boiling point than ethane.
Answer:
(1) The hydroxyl group in alcohols is highly polar. The H-atom has partial positive charge and the oxygen atom has partial -ve charge. The hydroxyl group in ethanol is extensively hydrogen bonded.

(2) Large number of ethanol molecules associated together by intermolecular hydrogen bonding. The energy required to separate the molecules by breaking hydrogen bond into vapour state is higher. This results in increasing the boiling point of ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 116

(3) On the other hand, in ethane (alkane) there is no hydrogen bonding between the molecules. The molecules of ethane are held together by weak van der Waals forces of attraction. Hence, these molecules can be easily separated. Thus, ethanol has higher boiling point than that of ethane.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

(2) Methanol is more soluble in water than propan-l-ol.
Answer:
(1) Methanol being lower members of alcohols is more soluble in water, but as the size of an alkyl group or molecular weight of alcohol increases the solubility decreases.

(2) The solubility of methanol in water is due to polar characters of alcohols (R – O -H ) and water (H – O – H).

(3) The solubility of methanol is due to the formation of intermolecular hydrogen bonding between polar molecules of methyl alcohol and water. Hence, methyl alcohol is a associated liquid.

(4) In methyl alcohol, size of methyl group being very small, -OH group constitutes major part of the molecule giving more solubility. As size of alkyl group increases, the non-polar character increases the solubility decreases. Hence, methanol is more soluble in water than propan-l-ol.

Question 57.
Which of the following pair is more acidic and why?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 270
Answer:
Due to high electronegativity of sp2-hybridized carbon, electron density on oxygen in phenol (I) decreases. This increases the polarity of O – H bond and results in more ionization of phenol than that of cyclohexyl alcohol (II). Therefore, phenol is more acidic than cyclohexyl alcohol.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 120
Answer:
In p-nitrophenol, nitro group (N02) is an electron-withdrawing group present at ortho position which enhances the acidic strength (- I effect). The O – H bond is under strain and release of proton (H+) becomes easily. Hence, o-nitrophenol is more acidic than phenol.

Question 58.
Draw intramolecular hydrogen bonding structures in the following compounds :
(a) o-nitrophenol
(b) o-hydroxy benzoic acid.
Answer:
(a) o-nitrophenol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 121
(b) o-hydroxy benzoic acid :

Question 59.
Explain laboratory test of alcohols and phenols.
Answer:
Laboratory test : Aqueous solution of alcohols and phenols can be tested with litmus paper. Aqueous solution of alcohols is neutral to litmus (neither blue nor red litmus change colour). Aqueous solutions of phenols turn blue litmus red. Thus, phenols have acidic character.

Question 62.
Write the action of aq NaOH on phenol and the product obtained is acidified.
Answer:
Phenols dissolve in aqueous NaOH by forming water soluble sodium phenoxide and are reprecipitated/ regenerated as phenols on acidification with HC1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 124

Question 63.
Explain the action of sodium on ethanol.
Answer:
When cthanol is treated with sodium metal, sodium ethoxide is formed and hydrogen gas is liberated.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 125
Liberation of H2 gas is used to detect the presence of alcoholic -OH group of a molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 64.
How are the following compounds obtained from alcohols using HCI:
(1) C2H5CI
(2) Isopropyl chloride
(3) tert-butyl chloride?
Answer:
(1) Ethyl alcohol, C2H5OH in the presence of Lucas reagent (ZnCl2 + HCI conc.) forms ethyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 126

(2) Isopropyl alcohol reacts with Lucas reagent forms isopropyl chloride.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 127

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol reacts with Lucas reagent forms tert-butyl chloride
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 128

Question 65.
What is Lucas reagent? What are its uses?
Answer:
Lucas reagent is composed of a mixture of concentrated HCl and Lewis acid. anhydrous ZnCI2.

It is used to prepare alkyl chlorides and distinguish between 10, 2° and 3° alcohols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 129

Question 66.
How can alcohols be distinguished with the help of Lucas reagent?
Answer:
Lucas reagent is a mixture of concentrated HCI and anhydrous ZnCl2. It is used to distinguish between primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols.
Alcohol with Lucas reagent forms an alkyl chloride, R -Cl which is insoluble and gives cloudiness and forms separate layer.

The time required for cloudiness to appear is based on the type of the alcohol and its reactivity :

(1) Primary alcohol : It reacts with the Lucas reagent very slowly and on heating forms alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of a layer takes place after a long time on heating.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 130

(2) Secondary alcohol : It reacts with the Lucas reagent much faster to form alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of layer takes place slowly.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 131

(3) Tertiary alcohol : It reacts immediately with the Lucas reagent at room temperature to form alkyl chloride. The cloudiness and separation of layer takes place instantaneously.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 132

Question 67.
What is esterificatlon? how Is an ester obtained from alcohol or phenol?
Answer:
(1) When an alcohol or phenol is heated with a carboxylic acid in the presence of conc.sulphuric acid an ester is obtained. The reaction is called esterification. This is reversible reaction and the formation of an ester is favoured
using excess of alcohol in the presence of conc. H2SO4.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 138

(2) Alcohols and phenols react with acid anhydrides in presence of acid catalyst to form eser.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 139

(3) The reaction of alcohol and phenols with acid chloride is carried out in the presence of pyridine (base), which neutralizes HCl.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 140

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 68.
Explain the action of the following on ethanol :
(1) Acetic acid
(2) Acetic anhydride
(3) Acetyl chloride.
Answer:
(1) Acetic acid : When ethanol is treated with acetic acid in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 141

(2) Acetic anhydride : When ethanol is treated with acetic anhydride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 142

(3) Acetyl chloride : When ethanol is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of pyridine, ethyl acetate (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 143

(Pyridine neutralises HC1 formed during reaction)

Question 69.
Explain the action of the following phenol :
(1) Acetic acid
(2) Acetic anhydride
(3) Acetyl chloride
Answer:
(1) Acetic acid : When phenol is treated with acetic acid in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 144
(2) Acetic anhydride : When phenol is treated with acetic anhydride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 145
(3) Acetyl chloride : When phenol is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of cone, sulphuric acid, (ester) is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 146
(Pyridine neutralizes HC1 formed during reaction.)

Question 70.
What is the action of acetic anhydride on salicyclic acid?
Answer:
When acetic anhydride is treated with salicyclic acid in presence of glacial acetic acid, acetyl salicyclic acid (aspirin) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 147
Aspirin is a common analgesic, antipyretic drug. Reactions involving breaking of C – O bond of alcohol :

Question 71.
How are the following compounds prepared by using HBr from corresponding alcohols :
(1) Ethyl bromide
(2) Isopropyl bromide
(3) Tert-butyl bromide (2-Methyl-propan-2-ol)?
Answer:
(1) When ethyl alcohol is heated with HBr, ethyl bromide is formed. (HBr is prepared in situ by adding NaBr to HCl or H2SO4)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 148

(2) Isopropyl alcohol on heating with HBr forms isopropyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 149

(3) Tert-butyl alcohol on heating with HBr forms tert-butyl bromide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 150

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 72.
Explain the action of hydroiodic acid on the following :
(1) Propan-2-ol
(2) 3-Methyl butan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Propan-2-ol : When propan-2-ol is heated with hydroiodic acid, 2-iodopropane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 151

(2) 3-Methyl butan-2-ol : When 3-Methyl butan-2-ol is heated with hydroiodic acid, 2-Iodo-2-methyl butane is obtained. Here, secondary alcohol is converted into a tertiary alkyl halide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 152

Question 73.
Describe the action of PCl3 on
(1) ethanol
(2) Propan-l-ol
(3) Propan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with PCl3, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 153

(2) Propan-l-ol : When propan-l-ol is treated with PCl3, n-propyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 154

(3) Propan-2-ol : When Propan-2-ol is treated with PCl3, 2-Chloropropane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 155

Question 74.
Describe the action of PCl5 on
(1) ethanol
(2) propan-2-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with PCl5, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 156

(2) Propan-2-ol : When propan-2-ol is treated with PCl5, 2-chloropropane is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 157

Question 75.
Describe the action of SOCl2 on
(1) ethanol
(2) propan-l-ol.
Answer:
(1) Ethanol : When ethanol is treated with SOCl2 in the presence of pyridine, ethyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 158

(2) Propan-l-ol : When propan-l-ol is treated with SOCl2 in the presence of pyridine, w-propyl chloride is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 159

Question 76.
Explain dehydration of alcohols.
OR
What is dehydration of alcohols? Give the chemical reactions showing dehydration of primary (1°), secondary (2°) and tertiary (3°) alcohols.
Answer:
Removal of water from an alcohol is called dehydration of alcohol. Alcohols having a /i-hydrogen is heated with dehydrating agents like concentrated H2SO4 (or H3PO4 or P2O5 or Al2O3). The ease of dehydration of alcohols is in the following order : tert-alcohol (3°) > secondary (2°) > primary (1°)
(1) Primary (1°) alcohol is dehydrated by heating it with 95% H2SO4 at 453 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 160
(2) Secondary alcohol (2°) is dehydrated by heating with 60% H2SO4 at 373 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 161
(3) A ternary alcohol can be easily dehydrated by heating with 20% H2SO4 at 363 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 162

An alcohol can be dehydrated by passing vapours alcohols over heated alumina (Al2O3).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 163

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 77.
Explain oxidation of primary and secondary alcohols.
Answer:
(1) Primary alcohol on oxidation with CrO3 forms aldehyde. However, a better reagent to bring about this oxidation is PCC (pyridinium chlorochromate).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 169

(2) Secondary alcohol on oxidation with chromic anhydride (CrO3) forms ketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 170

Question 78.
What is the action of acidified K2Cr2O7 on the following :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 171
How are following alcohols distinguished :
(1) ethyl alcohol
(2) isopropyl alcohol
(3) tert-butyl alcohol?
OR
How will you distinguish primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols by oxidation process?
Answer:
Primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are distinguished on the basis of their oxidation products, when their oxidation is carried out using K2Cr2O7 and dil. H2SO4. Acidified potassium dichromate, K2Cr2O7 is an oxidising agent.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 172

(1) Ethyl alcohol is a primary alcohol and on oxidation, it first forms acetaldehyde, which on further oxidation forms acetic acid. In this both, aldehyde and acid have same number of carbon atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 173

(2) Isopropyl alcohol is a secondary alcohol and on oxidation it gives a ketone, acetone with the same number of carbon atoms. Acetone resists further oxidation as it involves breaking of C-C bond.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 174

(3) The oxidation of tert-butyl alcohol is difficult, since it does not have a-hydrogen atom. It is oxidised by using acidic and stronger oxidising agents like KMn04, CrO3 at high temperature, which dehydrate tertiary alcohol to alkene and then oxidise it to a ketone, acetone with less number of carbon atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 175

Question 79.
What happens when vapours of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are passed over heated copper at 573 K?
Answer:
When vapours of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols are passed over heated copper at 573 K, dehydrogena¬tion of primary and secondary alcohol takes place while tertiary alcohols undergo dehydrogenation to given an alkene.

Primary alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 176

Secondary alcohol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 177

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Reactions of phenols :

Question 80.
(1) Explain the action of bromine in carbon disulphide (CS2) on phenol (carbolic acid). OR Give equation of the reaction of bromine in CS2 with phenol.
Answer:
When phenol is stirred at a low temperature with bromine dissolved in a polar solvent such as carbon disulphide or CCl4 at (273 K), a mixture of o-bromophenol and p-bromophenol is formed, p-bromophenol is the major product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 179

Question 81.
Explain the action of bromine water on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
Name the reagent used in the bromiriation of phenol to 2, 4, 6 tribromophenol.
Answer:
When phenol is treated with bromine water, a yellowish white precipitate of 2, 4, 6 – tribromophenol is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 180

Question 82.
Explain the action of dilute nitric acid on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
Give equation of the reaction of dilute HNO3 with phenol.
Answer:
When phenol is treated with dilute nitric acid, a mixture of o-nitrophenol and p-nitrophenol is formed. In this reaction, p-nitrophenol is formed as the major product.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 181

Question 83.
Explain the action of cone, nitric acid (nitrating mixture) on phenol (carbolic acid).
OR
How is phenol converted into picric acid?
Answer:
When phenol is warmed with a mixture of cone, nitric acid and cone, sulphuric acid (a nitrating mixture or the mixed acid), 2, 4, 6 – trinitrophenol, commonly called picric acid, is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 182

Question 84.
Explain the action of concentrated sulphuric acid on phenol at different temperatures.
Answer:
(a) At room temperature : When phenol is treated with cone. H2SO4 at room temperature (about 300 K), o-phenol sulphonic acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 183
(b) At 373 K : When phenol is treated with cone. H2SO4 at about 373 K, p-phenol sulphonic acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 184

Question 85.
Explain (1) Kolbe’s reaction (2) Reimer-Tiemann reaction.
Answer:
(1) Kolbe’s reaction : When phenol reacts with sodium hydroxide, sodium phenoxide is obtained. Phenoxide ion being more reactive than phenol towards electrophilic substitution. Phenoxide undergoes electrophilic substitution with carbon dioxide at 398 K under pressure of 6 atm (a weak electrophile) forms salicylic acid as major product.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 185

(2) Reimer-Tiemann reaction : Phenol is heated with chloroform along with aqueous NaOH, this is followed by acidification with dil. HC1 when salicyladehyde (2-hydroxy benzaldehyde) is formed as the major product, which can be separated from p-isomer by steam distillation. The stability of o-isomer is due to intramolecular hydrogen bonding.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 186

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 86.
Explain the action of zinc dust on phenol.
OR
How is phenol converted into benzene?
Answer:
When phenol is heated with zinc dust, benzene is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 187

Question 87.
Explain the action of chromic acid on phenol.
OR
How is phenol converted into benzoquinone?
Answer:
When phenol is oxidised by chromic acid, a diketone, p-benzoquinone is formed. It is a conjugated diketone.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 188

Question 88.
Explain catalytic hydrogenation of phenol.
Answer:
When a mixture of vapours of phenol and hydrogen is passed over nickel catalyst at 433 K., cyclohexanol is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 189

Question 89.
How is diethyl ether (ethoxyethane) obtained from alcohol?
Answer:
When excess of ethyl alcohol is distilled with concentrated sulphuric acid (H2SO4) at 413 K, diethyl ether is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 190

Question 91.
Write a note on Williamson’s synthesis.
OR
How are ethers prepared from Alkyl halides?
OR
How are simple ethers and mixed ethers prepared by Williamson’s synthesis?
Answer:
Williamson’s synthesis : When an alkyl halide (R – X) is heated with sodium alkoxide (R – O – Na), an ether is obtained, this reaction is known as Williamson’s synthesis. This method is used to prepare simple (or symmetrical) ethers and mixed (unsymmetrical) ethers.

Sodium alkoxide is obtained by a reaction of sodium with an alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 194

(A) Simple (Symmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide having similar alkyl groups are heated, symmetrical ether is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 195
Sodium ethoxide on heating with ethyl bromide gives diethyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 196

(B) Mixed (Unsymmetrical) ether : When an alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide or sodium phenoxide having different alkyl groups are heated, unsymmetrical ether (dialkyl ethers or alkyl aryl ether) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 197
Sodium ethoxide on heating with methyl bromide gives ethyl methyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 198
Sodium phenoxide on heating with ethyl bromide gives ethyl phenyl ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 199

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 92.
How is anisole obtained from phenol?
OR
How is methoxy benzene prepared from carbolic acid?
Answer:
Phenol reacts with sodium hydroxide, sodium phenoxide is formed. When sodium phenoxide is heated with methyl iodide, anisole is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 200

Question 93.
Explain the limitations for the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers.
OR
What care is to be taken in the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers by Williamson’s synthesis? Explain.
OR
Illustrate with examples the limitations of Williamson’s synthesis for the preparation of certain types of ethers.
Answer:
(1) In the preparation of unsymmetrical ethers by Williamson’s synthesis, the proper choice of the reactants namely alkyl halide and sodium alkoxide is necessary.

(2) The best yield of unsymmetrical ether is obtained when primary alkyl halide and tertiary alkoxide are heated, since primary alkyl halides are more susceptible to SN2 reaction.

(3) Secondary or tertiary alkyl halide undergo a and fi (halogen and hydrogen) elimination reaction giving an alkene instead of an ether since a carbon atom is sterically hindered by bulky alkyl groups.

(4) For example : t-butyl methyl ether can be synthesised by reaction of methyl bromide with sodium t-butoxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 201

Question 94.
State physical properties of ethers.
Answer:
(1) Dimethyl ether and ethyl methyl ether are gases. Other ethers are colourless liquids with pleasant odour.
(2) Lower ethers are highly volatile and highly inflammable substances.
(3) Boiling points of ethers show gradual increase with the increase in molecular mass.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 205
(4) The solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass.

Question 95.
Explain, ethers posses a small net dipole moment.
Answer:
In ethers, Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 206 bond angle is 110° and not 180°, bond dipole moments of the two C – O bonds do not cancel each other, therefore, ethers possess a smal net dipole moment, (for example, dipole moment of diethyl ether is 1.18 D)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 207

Question 96.
Explain, the solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass.
Answer:
The solubility/miscibility of ethers in water is similar to that of alcohols of comparable molecular mass. This is because ethers can form hydrogen bonds with water through ethereal oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 208

For example, diethyl ether and n-butyl alcohol have respective miscibilities of 7.5 and 9 g per 100 g of water.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 97.
Explain laboratory test for ethers.
Answer:
Ethers are neutral compounds in aqueous medium. Ethers do not react with bases, cold dilute acids, reducing agents, oxidizing agents and active metals. However, ethers dissolve in cold concentrated H2SO4 due to formation of oxonium salts.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 209
This property distinguishes ethers from hydrocarbons.

Question 98.
What is the action of atmospheric oxygen on diethyl ether?
Answer:
When atmospheric oxygen combines with diethyl ether, peroxide of diethyl ether is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 210

Question 99.
What is the action of dilute sulphuric acid on
(1) Dimethyl ether
(2) Diethyl ether
(3) Ethyl methyl ether?
(4) Anisole?
OR
Explain hydrolysis of ethers.
Answer:
Simple ethers on heating with dilute sulphuric acid under pressure undergoes hydrolysis to give alcohol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 211
(1) Dimethyl hydrolysis on hydrolysis give methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 212
(2) Diethyl ether on hydrolysis give ethanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 213
(3) A mixed ether on heating with dii. H2SO4 under pressure undergoes hydrolysis to give mixture of two different alcohols.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 214
Ethyl methyl ether on hydrolysis give a mixture of ethanol and methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 215
(4) Anisole on hydrolysis give a mixture of phenol and methanol.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 216

Question 100.
State the combustion products of diethyl ether.
Answer:
The combustion products of diethyl ether are CO2 and H2O.

Question 101.
What is the action of phosphorus pentachloride on
(1) Diethyl ether
(2) Ethyl methyl ether
(3) Methyl phenyl ether (anisole)?
Answer:
(1) Diethyl ether : When diethyl ether is heated with ethyl methyl ether, ethyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 217
(2) Ethyl methyl ether : When ethyl methyl ether is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, a mixture of ethyl chloride and methyl chloride is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 218
(3) Methyl phenyl ether (Anisole) : When methyl phenyl ether is heated with phosphorus pentachloride, a mixture of methyl chloride, chlorobenzene is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 219

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 102.
Describe the action of hot concentrated HI on
(i) Dialkyl ether
(ii) Alkyl aryl ether.
Answer:
Ether reacts with excess of hot concentrated hydrogen halide to give two alkyl halide molecules.
R – O – R + HX → RX + R – OH
R – OH + HX → RX + H20
Alkyl aryl ether reacts with hot concentrated hydrogen halide to give phenol and alkyl halide.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 220
Ethers with two different alkyl groups react with hot.conc. HI to give alkyl halides.
R – O – R’+ 2H – X → R – X + R’ – X + H2O
The order of reactivity of HX is HI > HBr > HC1

Question 103.
What is the action of hot HI on isopropyl methyl ether?
Answer:
When isopropyl methyl ether is treated with excess of hot hydroiodic acid, a mixture of isopropyl iodide and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 221

Question 104.
Describe the action of hydroiodic acid on the following :
(1) Diethyl ether.
Answer:
When diethyl ether (ethoxy ethane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of ethanol and ethyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 222

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available, then ethyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form ethyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 223

(2) Ethyl methyl ether.
Answer:
When ethyl methyl (methoxy ethane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of ethyl alcohol and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 224

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available, then ethyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form ethyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 225

(3) Methyl n-propyl ether.
Answer:
When methyl n-propyl ether (1-Methoxy propane) is treated with hydroiodic acid, a mixture of n-propyl alcohol and methyl iodide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 226

If excess of hydroiodic acid is available then n-propyl alcohol further reacts with hydroiodic acid at higher temperature to form n-propyl iodide and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 227

(4) Methyl phenyl ether (anisole).
Answer:
When methyl phenyl ether (anisole) is treated with hydroiodic acid, phenol and methyl iodide is formed. Here, phenol does not react further with HI because – OH group is attached to sp2-hybridised carbon atom and it cannot be replaced by iodide (nucleophile).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 228

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 105.
Draw the resonance structures of aromatic ethers.
Answer:
The alkoxy group in aromatic ether is a ring activating and ortho-, paradirecting group toward electrophilic aromatic substitution.

Resonance structures :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 234
+ R Effect of – OR group results in increased electron density at the para- and two ortho-posotions (see resonance structures II, III and IV).

Question 106.
Describe the action of bromine in acetic acid on anisole.
OR
Write the equation of the reaction of bromination of anisole in ethanoic acid medium.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with bromine in acetic acid, /i-bromoanisole (major product) is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 235

Question 107.
Describe the action of methyl chloride on anisole (Friedel-Crafts reaction).
OR
Write the equation of Friedel-Crafts reaction-alkylation of anisole.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with alkyl halide in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride (a Lewis acid) as catalyst, 4-Methoxy toluene is formed as major product. The alkyl groups are introduced at -ortho and -para positions in anisole, the reaction is known as Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 236

Question 108.
Describe the action of Acetyl chloride on anisole (Friedel-Crafts acylation).
OR
Write the equation of the reaction Friedel-Crafts acylation of anisole.
OR
Write a note on Friedel-Crafts acylation.
Answer:
When anisole is treated with acetyl chloride in the presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride (a Lewis acid), 4-Methoxy acetophenone (major product) is obtained. The acetyl groups are introduced at -ortho and -para positions in anisole, the reaction is known as Friedel Craft’s acylation reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 237

Question 109.
Describe the action of cone. HNO3 on anisole.
OR
Write the equation of nitration of anisole.
Answer:
When anisole is reacted with nitrating mixture (cone. HNO3 + cone. Fl2SO4), a mixture of p-nitroanisole and o-nitroanisole is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 238

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 110.
An organic compound with the formula C4H10O3 shows properties of ether and alcohol. When treated with an excess of HBr yields only one compound 1,2 dibromomethane. Write structural formula of ether and that of alcohol.
Answer:
When C4H10O3 is treated with excess of HBr, a single compound 1,2-dibromoethane is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 239

Question 111.
An organic compound ‘A’ having molecular formula C4H10O does not react with sodium metal. On hydrolysis with dilute H2SO4 it gives only one organic compound ‘B’ The compound B on heating with red phosphorus and iodine gives compound ‘C’. The compound C can also be obtained from compound ‘A’ on heating with excess HI. Identify the compounds A, B and C.
Answer:
(1) The organic compound ‘A’ with molecular formula C4H10O may be an alcohol or ether.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 240
(2) Since ‘A’ does not react with sodium (Na), it is not an alcohol. Hence ‘A’ may be an ether.
(3) Since an ether ‘A’ on hydrolysis with dilute H2SO4 gives only one compound ‘B’, the compound ‘A’ must be a symmetrical (simple) ether. Hence compound ‘A’ may be, C2H5 – O – C2H5Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 241

Question 112.
How will you affect the following two-step conversions? Diethyl ether into n-butane :
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 242

Question 114.
Answer in one sentence/word.

(1) Name the alcohol that is used to make propan-2-one.
Answer:
The alcohol used to make propan-2-one is iso-propyl alcohol.

(2) Which is the first oxidation product of secondary alcohol?
Answer:
The first oxidation product of secondary alcohol is ketone.

(3) Name the alcohol that is used to make acetic acid.
Answer:
The alcohol that is used to make acetic acid is ethyl alcohol.

(4) Write the structure of cyclohexane-1, 4-diol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 246

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

(9) Which of the following isomers is more volatile : o-nitrophenol or p-nitrophenol?
Answer:
The isomer o-nitrophenol with lower boiling point is more volatile.

(10) Identify the product of the following reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 247
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 248

(11) Identify the product obtained by industrial synthesis of carboxylation of phenoxide ion followed by acidification.
Answer:
The product is phenol
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 249

(12) What is the product A obtained in the following reaction?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 250
Answer:
The product is phenolMaharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 251

(13) Which positions are occupied by – NO2 group during nitration of carbolic acid?
Answer:
– o – (ortho) and – p – (para) positions are occupied by – NO2 group during nitration of carbolic acid.

(14) Write the name of reactants used for the preparation of ethyl-tert-butyl ether.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 252
are used for the preparation of ethyl-tert-butyl ether.

(15) The product formed in the reaction of reverse of dehydration of alcohol is
Answer:
The product formed in the reaction of reverse of dehydration of alcohol is alkene.

(16) Which rule is obeyed by hydroboration oxidation process?
Answer:
The rule obeyed by hydroboration oxidation process is opposite to the Markovnikov’s rule.

(17) Name the reagents for the complete hydroboration-oxidation reaction in step 1 and step 2.
Answer:
Step 1 : Diborane
Step 2 : Hydrogen peroxide and dil. NaOH.

(18) Write the name of the test by which methanol can be distinguished from ethanol.
Answer:
Iodoform test by which methanol can be distinguished from ethanol.

(19) Write the name of reactant used for preparation of phenol, which gives byproduct used as solvent.
Answer:
Reactant used in the preparation of phenol :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 253

(20) Ether is a good solvent for Grignard reagent. Which property makes it a good solvent?
Answer:
Ether has a low polarity, this property makes it a good solvent.

(21) The C – O – C bond angle in dimethyl ether is
Answer:
The C – O – C bond angle in dimethyl ether is 110°.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

Question 115.
State the uses of methyl alcohol.
Answer:
(1) Methyl alcohol is used as an industrial solvent for dissolving oils, fats, gums, etc.
(2) It is used for dry cleaning and preparation of perfumes and varnishes.
(3) It is used as antifreeze agent for automobile radiators at low temperature.
(4) It is used in the preparation of methyl chloride, dimethyl sulphate and formaldehyde.
(5) It is used to denature ethyl alcohol.

Question 116.
State the uses of ethyl alcohol. OR Write two uses of ethyl alcohol.
Answer:
(1) Ethyl alcohol is used as solvent for dyes, oils, perfumes, cosmetics and drugs.
(2) A mixture of 10-20% ethyl alcohol with petrol is used as motor fuel.
(3) A mixture of ethyl alcohol and calcium acetate in gel form is used as solid fuel.
(4) It is widely used in beverages.
(5) Since ethyl alcohol has low freezing point, it is used in thermometer.
(6) It is an effective tropical antiseptic therefore it is used in many mouth washes.
(7) It kills micro-organisms on wound surface and in the mouth but its low toxicity does not kill the cells of the skin or mouth tissues.
(8) It is used in the preparation of chloroform, iodoform, acetic acid and ethers.
(9) It is used as fuel.

Question 117.
Give the important uses of phenol.
OR
Write two uses of phenol.
Answer:
(1) Phenol is used in the preparation of phenol-formaldehyde polymer which is used in a plastic bakelite.
(2) It is used in the preparation of phenol-phthalein-an indicator and in certain dyes.
(3) It is used in the preparation of drugs such as salol, aspirin, etc.
(4) It is used in the preparation of dettol, which is an antiseptic.
(5) It is used in the preparation of 2,4-dichlorophenoxy acetic acid which is used as selective weed killer.
(6) It is used to prepare picric acid which is used as explosive.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 118.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each sub-question:

1. Which one of the following is a tertiary alcohol?
(a) Pentan-l-ol
(b) Pentan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol
(d) 3-Methylpentan-2-ol
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol

2. Which of the following is a primary alcohol?
(a) 3-ethyl-3-hexanol
(b) 2-butanol
(c) 3-methyl-l-butanol
(d) 1-hexanol
Answer:
(d) 1-hexanol

3. The molecular formula C4H10O represents
(a) aldehydes
(b) alcohols
(c) ethers
(d) both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) both (b) and (c)

4. The general formula of primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols is
(a) CnH2nOH
(b) CnH2n-1OH
(c) CnH2n+1OH
(d) CnHn+1OH
Answer:
(c) CnH2n+1OH

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

5. Which of the following alcohols cannot be prepared by hydration of the corresponding alkene?
(a) Ethanol
(b) Propan- l-ol
(c) Propan-2-ol
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
Answer:
(b) Propan- l-ol

6. Which of the following compounds when treated with CH3MgI in dry ether followed by the hydroly¬sis, will give Propan-2-ol?
(a) HCHO
(b) CH3CHO
(c) CH3CH2OH
(d) CH3COCH3
Answer:
(b) CH3CHO

7. To prepare 3-Ethylpentan-3-ol, the reagents needed are
(a) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3COCH2CH3
(b) CH3MgBr + CH3CH2CH2COCH2CH3
(c) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3CH2COCH2CH3
(d) CH3CH2CH2MgBr + CH3COCH2CH3
Answer:
(c) CH3CH2MgBr + CH3CH2COCH2CH3

8. How is 1-propanol obtained?
(a) Using propanal
(b) Using propanone
(c) Using propene
(d) All of these
Answer:
(a) Using propanal

9.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 260
Answer:
(a)

10. Ketone on reduction gives
(a) 1° alcohol
(b) 2° alcohol
(c) 3° alcohol
(d) all of these
Answer:
(b) 2° alcohol

11. Primary alcohols are prepared by catalytic hydro-genation of aldehydes in presence of ……………………………… as a catalyst
(a) aluminium bromide
(b) fluoroboric acid
(c) dry ether
(d) palladium
Answer:
(d) palladium

12. Lower member of alcohols are
(a) insoluble in water
(b) soluble in water
(c) insoluble in acetaldehyde
(d) insoluble in petrol
Answer:
(b) soluble in water

13. Which of the following compounds contain hydro¬gen bonds?
(a) Ethane
(b) Ethanol
(c) Methoxymethane
(d) Ethylene
Answer:
(b) Ethanol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

14. Which of the following is a trihydric alcohol?
(a) n-propyl alcohol
(b) Glycerol
(c) Glycol
(d) Glycine
Answer:
(b) Glycerol

15. Aldehydes are first oxidation products of
(a) primary alcohols
(b) secondary alcohols
(c) tertiary alcohols
(d) carboxylic acids
Answer:
(a) primary alcohols

16. The oxidation product of alcohol depends on
(a) – OH group of an alcohol
(b) number of carbon atoms in alcohol
(c) number of hydrogen atoms attached to hydroxyl bearing carbon
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) number of hydrogen atoms attached to hydroxyl bearing carbon

17. The order of ease of oxidation is
(a) primary > secondary > tertiary
(b) primary < secondary < tertiary
(c) primary > tertiary > secondary
(d) secondary > tertiary > primary
Answer:
(b) primary < secondary < tertiary

18. Ethyl alcohol \(\frac{\text { conc. } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}}{443 \mathrm{~K}} \mathrm{~A} \stackrel{\mathrm{HBr}}{\longrightarrow}\) Ethyl bromide. Identify A.
(a) Ethyl hydrogen sulphate
(b) Ethylene
(c) Isopropyl hydrogen sulphate
(d) Acetic acid
Answer:
(b) Ethylene

19. One mole of PCl5 reacts with one mole of ethyl alcohol to give
(a) 1 mole Cl2
(b) 1/2 mole Cl2
(c) 1 mole HCl
(d) 1/2 mole HCl
Answer:
(c) 1 mole HCl

20. When ethyl alcohol is reacted with sodium metal and the compound so formed is treated with ethyl bromide, the product formed is
(a) an acid
(b) an alkane
(c) an ether
(d) an ester
Answer:
(c) an ether

21. Dehydration occurs at the lowest temperature and concentration for
(a) methyl alcohol
(b) n-propyl alcohol
(c) iso-propyl alcohol
(d) tert-butyl alcohol
Answer:
(d) tert-butyl alcohol

22. One mole of sodium when reacts with one mole of methyl alcohol, gives
(a) one mole of oxygen
(b) one mole of hydrogen
(c) half mole of hydrogen
(d) half mole of oxygen
Answer:
(c) half mole of hydrogen

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

23. A compound ‘X’(C3H8O) on oxidation gives com-pound ‘ Y’(C3H6O2), hence compound ‘X’ must be
(a) a ketone
(b) an aldehyde
(c) a primary alcohol
(d) a secondary alcohol
Answer:
(c) a primary alcohol

24. The toxicity of alcohols
(a) increases with an increase in their molecular weight
(b) decreases with an increase in their molecular weight
(c) increases with a decrease in their molecular weight
(d) does not depend on their molecular weight
Answer:
(a) increases with an increase in their molecular weight

25. The structural formula of 2-phenyl ethanol is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 261
Answer:
(c)

26. Compound that fails to give effervescence with NaHCO3 is
(a) C6H5COO
(b) CH3COOH
(c) C6H5OH
(d) Picric acid
Answer:
(c)

27. Phenol is a bifunctional compound because
(a) it gives reactions of hydroxyl group (-OH) as well as aromatic ring
(b) it is a strong acid
(c) it is insoluble in NaOH
(d) it is readily soluble in water
Answer:
(a) it gives reactions of hydroxyl group (-OH) as well as aromatic ring

28. Phenol gives characteristic colour with
(a) iodine solution
(b) bromine water
(c) ammonium hydroxide
(d) aqueous ferric chloride solution
Answer:
(d) aqueous ferric chloride solution

29. Ethanol and phenol are distinguished from each other by the action of
(a) neutral ferrous chloride
(b) neutral ferric chloride
(c) ferric hydroxide
(d) ferrous hydroxide
Answer:
(b) neutral ferric chloride

30. Which of the following compounds is used to prepare bakelite resin?
(a) Acetaldehyde
(b) Ethanol
(c) Phenol
(d) Methyl amine
Answer:
(d) Methyl amine

31. Increasing order of acid strength among p-methoxy-phenol, p-methyl phenol and p-nitro- phenol is as
(a) p-nitrophenol > p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol
(b) p-methylphenol > p-methoxyphenol > p-nitrophenol
(c) p-nitrophenol > p-methylphenol > p-methoxyphenol
(d) p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol > p-nitrophenol
Answer:
(d) p-methoxyphenol > p-methylphenol > p-nitrophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

32. The IUPAC name of the compound is Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 262
(a) 3,3-dimethyl-l-hydroxy cyclohexane
(b) l,l-dimethyl-3-cyclohexanol
(c) 3,3-dimethyl-1-cyclohexanol
(d) l,l-dimethyl-3-hydroxy cyclohexane
Answer:
(c) 3,3-dimethyl-1-cyclohexanol

33. Which of the following is the most reactive towards electrophilic attack?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 263
Answer:
(a)

34. In the following reaction, Ethanol \(\stackrel{\mathrm{PBr}_{3}}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{A}\)\(\stackrel{\text { Alc-KOH }}{\longrightarrow} \text { B } \frac{\text { (i) } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4} \text {, room temp. }}{\text { (ii) } \mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}, \text { heat }} \mathrm{C} \text {. }\). The product C is
(a) CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 – CH3
(b) CH3 – CH2 – OSO3H
(c) CH3CH2OH
(d) CH2 = CH2
Answer:
(c) CH3CH2OH

35. What is the general formula of ethers?
(a) CnH2nO
(b) CnH2n+2O
(c) CnH2n-1O
(d) CnH2n-2O
Answer:
(b) CnH2n+2O

36. The Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 264 linkage is present in
(a) proteins
(b) ketones
(c) ethers
(d) aldehydes
Answer:
(c) ethers

37. Methoxy ethane is the functional isomer of
(a) CH3CHOHCH3
(b) CH3CH2CH2OH
(c) CH3 – O – CH3
(d) both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(d) both (a) and (b)

38. An oxygen atom in ether is
(a) sp2-hybridized
(b) sp3-hybridized
(c) sp-hybridized
(d) sp2-d-hybridized
Answer:
(b) sp3-hybridized

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

39. C5H12O represents
(a) only an alcohol
(b) only an aldehyde
(c) only an ether
(d) an alcohol and an ether
Answer:
(d) an alcohol and an ether

40. Ether molecules are
(a) tetrahedral
(b) angular
(c) pyramidal
(d) diagonal
Answer:
(b) angular

41. Which one of the following compounds is not isomeric with Ethoxypropane?
(a) 1-Methoxypropane
(b) 2-Methoxypropane
(c) 2-Methylpropane-2-ol
(d) 2-Methylbutan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-Methylbutan-2-ol

42. The IUPAC name of C2H5 – O – CH2 – CH(CH3)2 is
(a) 1-Ethoxy-1-butane
(b) 2-Ethoxy-2-butane
(c) l-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
(d) 3-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane
Answer:
(c) l-Ethoxy-2-methylpropane

43. The IUPAC name of CH3OC6H5 is
(a) methoxy phenyl ether
(b) phenoxy methane
(c) methoxy benzene
(d) methyl phenyl ether
Answer:
(c) methoxy benzene

44. In CH3(CH2)3 – O -CH3, the parent hydrocarbon of large alkyl group is
(a) n-butane
(b) butane
(c) pentane
(d) n-pentane
Answer:
(a) n-butane

45. Which one of the following alkyl halide gives best yield in Williamson’s synthesis?
(a) CH3 – Br
(b) CH3 – CH(Br) – CH3
(c) CH2 – CH(Br) – CH3 – CH3
(d) (CH3)3 C – Br
Answer:
(a) CH3 – Br

46. Which one of the following ethers cannot be pre¬pared by using diazomethane?
(a) Dimethyl ether
(b) Diethyl ether
(c) Ethyl methyl ether
(d) t-Butyl methyl ether
Answer:
(b) Diethyl ether

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

47. The continuous etherification is carried out at
(a) 473 K
(b) 413 K
(c) 498 K
(d) 403 K
Answer:
(b) 413 K

48. Williamson’s synthesis is used for the preparation of
(a) only unsymmetrical ethers
(b) only symmetrical ethers
(c) both symmetrical and unsymmetrical ethers
(d) only methyl ethers
Answer:
(c) both symmetrical and unsymmetrical ethers

49. Which of the following ethers on hydrolysis gives two different products that are successive members of a homologous series?
(a) Methoxymethane
(b) Ethoxythane
(c) Methoxyethane
(d) 2-Methoxypropane
Answer:
(c) Methoxyethane

50. Which one of the following compounds dissolves in hot dilute sulphuric acid but does not react with sodium metal?
(a) Ethyl bromide
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Ethyl alcohol
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(d) Diethyl ether

51. Identify ‘A’ in the following reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 271
Answer:
(c)

52. The C-O-C bond angle in an ether is
(a) 180
(b) 90°
(c) 104.5°
(d) 109.5°
Answer:
(d) 109.5°

53. Ether free from moisture and alcohol is known as ,
(a) dry ether
(b) absolute ether
(c) pure ether
(d) spirit ether
Answer:
(b) absolute ether

54. The geometry of ether is similar to
(a) ammonia
(b) methane
(c) water
(d) ethyne
Answer:
(c) water

55. Sodium metal does not react with
Answer:
C2H5 – O – C2H3

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

56. Ethers have boiling points
(a) lower than those of alkanes of comparable molecular masses
(b) higher than those of isomeric alcohols
(c) lower than those of isomeric alcohols
(d) higher than those of alkanes of comparable molecular masses
Answer:

57. Ether on hydrolysis gives
(a) aldehyde
(b) alcohol
(c) acid
(d) ester
Answer:
(c) acid

58. Which of the following reactions represent Williamson’s reaction?
(a) R – O – R’ + HI →
\(\text { (b) } \mathrm{R}^{\prime}-\mathrm{OH}+\stackrel{\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{SO}_{4}}{\longrightarrow}\)

(d) R – O – Na + R’X →
Answer:
(c)

59. Which of the following reactions represent the continuous etherification process?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 265
Answer:
(b)

60. Ethers on complete combustion produce
(a) an alcohol and water
(b) an alkene and water
(c) an alkane and an alkene
(d) carbon dioxide and water
Answer:
(d) carbon dioxide and water

61. Diethyl ether is used as a solvent in many organic reactions because it
(a) is liquid at room temperature
(b) has lower boiling point
(c) contains divalent oxygen atom
(d) is inert in nature
Answer:
(d) is inert in nature

62. Which of the following reagents can be prepared using ether as a solvent?
(a) Tollen’s reagent
(b) Grignard’s reagent
(c) Schiff’s reagent
(d) Millon’s reagent
Answer:
(b) Grignard’s reagent

63. Diethyl ether is used as
(a) a hypnotic
(b) an antiseptic
(c) an anaesthetic
(d) an antipyretic
Answer:
(c) an anaesthetic

64. To obtain fuel, diethyl ether is mixed with
(a) ester
(b) ethanal
(c) ethanol
(d) 2-propanone
Answer:
(c) ethanol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

65. Which of the following alcohols is prepared by acid catalyzed hydration of alkenes?
(a) Butan-l-ol
(b) Propan-l-ol
(c) Ethanol
(d) Methanol
Answer:
(c) Ethanol

66. Which of the following alcohols can be prepared by direct hydration of corresponding alkene in presence of 50 % sulphuric acid?
(a) Butan-l-ol
(b) Butan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpropan-1 -ol
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-Methylpropan-2-ol

67. Which of the following alcohols cannot be prepared by reduction of carbonyl compounds?
(a) Pentan-l-ol
(b) Pentan-2-ol
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol
(d) 3-Methylpentan-2-ol
Answer:
(c) 2-Methylpentan-2-ol

68. Which of the following conversions explains the acidic nature of alcohols?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 268
Answer:
(b)

69. Which of the following compounds gives 3-ethyl- pentan-3-ol by the action of ethyl magnesium iodide followed by acid hydrolysis?
(a) Propanone
(b) Butanone
(c) Pentan-2-one
(d) Pentan-3-one
Answer:
(d) Pentan-3-one

70. Benzyl phenyl ether reacts with hydrogen bromide to give
(a) benzyl bromide and phenol
(b) benzyl alcohol and bromobenzene
(c) benzyl bromide and bromobenzene
(d) benzyl alcohol and phenol
Answer:
(a) benzyl bromide and phenol

71. Ethers are considered as
(a) monoalkyl derivatives of water
(b) divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups
(c) alkyl derivatives of fatty acids
(d) condensation products of acid and alcohol
Answer:
(b) divalent oxygen atom is attached to two alkyl groups

72. Which of the following compounds is not isomeric with ethoxyethane?
(a) 1-methoxypropane
(b) 2-methoxypropane
(c) 2-methylpropan-2-ol
(d) 2-methylbutan-2-ol
Answer:
(d) 2-methylbutan-2-ol

73. Which of the following compounds dissolves in hot dilute sulphuric acid but does not reacts with sodium metal?
(a) Ethyl bromide
(b) Acetic acid
(c) Ethyl alcohol
(d) Diethyl ether
Answer:
(d) Diethyl ether

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

74. Which of the following alcohol will have the fastest rate of dehydration?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 266
Answer:
(c)

75. The phenol having lowest acidity is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 267
Answer:
(b)

76. Which of the following reagents is best for the following conversion?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Solutions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers 269
Answer:
(a)

77. 3-Methyl butane-2-ol on heating with HI gives
(a) 2 -iodo-3-methyl butane
(b) 2-iodo-2-methyl butane
(c) l-iodo-3-methyl butane
(d) l-iodo-2-methyl butane
Answer:
(b) 2-iodo-2-methyl butane

78. In phenol carbon atom attached to -OH group undergoes –
(a) sp3-hybridisation
(b) sp-hybridisation
(c) sp2-hybridisation
(d) No hybridisation
Answer:
(c) sp2-hybridisation

79. Which among the following reducing agents is ‘not’ used to reduce acetaldehyde to ethyl alcohol?
(a) Na-Hg and water
(b) Zn-Hg and cone. HCl
(c) H2-Raney Ni
(d) Li-A1H4/H+
Answer:
(b) Zn-Hg and cone. HCl

80. Identify the weakest acidic compound amongst the following :
(a) p-nitrophenol
(b) p-chlorophenol
(c) p-cresol
(d) p-aminophenol
Answer:
(d) p-aminophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

81. Natalite is a mixture of
(a) diethyl ether and methanol
(b) diethyl ether and ethanol
(c) dimethyl ether and methanol
(d) dimethyl ether and ethanol
Answer:
(b) diethyl ether and ethanol

82. The alcohol used in thermometers is
(a) methanol
(b) ethanol
(c) propanol
(d) butanol
Answer:
(b) ethanol

83. Which of the following is the first oxidation product of secondary alcohol?
(a) Alkene
(b) Aldehyde
(c) Ketone
(d) Carboxylic acid
Answer:
(c) Ketone

84. When phenol is heated with cone. HNO3 in presence of cone. H2SO4 it yields
(a) o-nitrophenol
(b) p-nitrophenol
(c) 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol
(d) m-nitrophenol
Answer:
(c) 2, 4, 6-trinitrophenol

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 1.
What are the physical states of matter? How can they be changed into one another?
Answer:

  • There are three physical states of matter namely solid, liquid and gas.
  • They differ in intermolecular or interatomic or interionic forces which are strongest in the solid-state.
  • By raising the temperature of solids to their melting point, solids are converted into liquids while heating liquids to their boiling points, they can be converted into vapour or gaseous state.
  • On the contrary, by cooling the gases to very low temperature and subjecting to high pressure they can be transformed into liquid which on further cooling can be transformed into solid-state.

The equilibrium existing between three states of matter may be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 1

Question 2.
What are the constituents of solids?
Answer:
The smallest constituent particles of various solids are atoms, ions or molecules. All such small constituents are referred to as ‘particles’.

Question 3.
What are the characteristic properties of solids?
Answer:

  • The solid state of matter is characterised by strong interparticle forces of attraction.
  • There is regularity and periodicity in the arrangement of constituent particles of solid.
  • Generally solids are hard, incompressible and rigid except some solids like Na, K, P which are soft.
  • The constituent particles of solids like molecules, atoms or ions have fixed stationary positions in solid and can only oscillate about their equilibrium or mean positions. Hence, they have fixed shape and cannot be poured like liquids.
  • Crystalline solids have sharp melting points and they melt at a definite temperature. Amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points.
  • They are anisotropic or isotropic.

Question 4.
Give classification of solids.
Answer:
Depending on orderly arrangement of the constituent particles, the solids are classified into two types :

  • Crystalline solids. For example, diamond, NaCl, K2SO4, etc.
  • Amorphous solids or non-crystalline solids. For example, tar, glass, plastics, rubber, butter, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 5.
Define :
(1) Crystalline solid.
(2) Amorphous solid.
Answer:
(1) Crystalline solid : A homogeneous solid in which the constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules are arranged in a definite repeating pattern throughout the solid is called crystalline solid. For example, NaCl, KNO3, etc.

(2) Amorphous solid : A substance which appears like solid but does not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure and no regular arrangement of constituent particles in structure is called amorphous solid. For example, glass, rubber, plastics, etc.

Question 6.
Define the term anisotropy.
OR
Define and explain the term anisotropy.
Answer:
Anisotropy : The ability of crystalline solids to change their physical properties when measured in different directions is called anisotropy.

Explanation : This property is due to different arrangement of constituents in different directions. Different types of particles fall on the way of measurements in different directions. Hence the composition of crystalline solid changes with directions changing their physical properties.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 2
Fig. 1.1 : Anisotropy in crystals : Different arrangements of constituent particles about different directions, AB, CD and EF.

Question 7.
Define and explain isotropy.
Answer:
Isotropy : The ability of amorphous solids to exhibit identical physical properties even though measured in different directions is called isotropy.

Explanation : This property arises because there is no long range order of regular pattern of arrangement in them and hence the arrangement is irregular along all the directions. Therefore the magnitude of any physical property would be identical along all directions.

Question 8.
Why does crystalline solid show different refractive indices in different directions ?
Answer:

  1. Crystalline solid has long range order of regular pattern of arrangement which repeats periodically over entire crystal.
  2. Within the given pattern, the arrangements of different atoms or ions or molecules is different in different directions. Hence the properties like refractive indices in the different directions are different.

This shows that the crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature.

Question 9.
Explain the properties of amorphous solids.
Answer:

  1. The constituent particles in amorphous solids are arranged randomly.
  2. They have short range ordered structure.
  3. Amorphous solids are called supercooled liquids having very high viscosity.
  4. They do not have sharp melting points and they melt gradually over a temperature interval.
  5. Amorphous substances appear like solids but they do not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure, hence they are not real solids. Therefore they are pseudo solids.
  6. They are isotropic and exhibit the same magnitude of any property in every direction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 10.
What is isomorphism ?
Answer:
Isomorphism : A phenomenon in which two or more crystalline substances show same crystalline structure is called isomorphism and the crystals are said to be isomorphous. For example, NaNO3 and CaCO3. They have atomic ratios 1 : 1 : 3.

Question 11.
What is isomorphous?
Answer:
Isomorphous : When two or more crystalline substances have the same crystalline structure, they are said to be isomorphous. For example, NaF and MgO, NaNO3 and CaCO3.

Question 12.
What is polymorphism ?
Answer:
Polymorphism : A phenomenon in which when a single substance crystallises in two or more forms under different conditions of solidification is called polymorphism and the substance is called polymorphous. For example, calcite and oragonite are two forms of CaCO3.

Question 13.
What is polymorphous ?
Answer:
Polymorphous: A single substance which crystallises in two or more forms under different conditions of solidification is called polymorphous. Polymorphic forms of an element are called allotropic forms or allotropes. For example, carbon exists as diamond and graphite, or sulphur exists in rhombic and monoclinic allotropic forms.

Question 14.
Identify isomorphous and polymorphous substances in the following :
K2SO4, graphite, β-quartz, Na2SeO4, CaCO3, diamond, cristobalite, CsNO3.
Answer:

Isomorphous Polymorphous
K2SO4, Na2SeO4

CaCO3, CsNO3

Graphite, diamond

Β-quartz, cristobalite

Question 15.
Why does a crystalline solid has a sharp melting point ?
Answer:

  1. Crystalline solid is a homogeneous solid and it has long range order of regular pattern of arrangement which repeats periodically over entire crystal.
  2. The interatomic or intermolecular forces are identical, hence the thermal energy required to break the regular structure by overcoming the intermolecular forces is uniform throughout.
  3. Hence the heat and temperature needed to melt the solid are same, and therefore solids have sharp melting points.

Question 16.
Amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Amorphous solids do not have perfectly ordered crystalline structure.
  2. They have short range order of regular pattern hence periodically repeating regular pattern is over a short distance.
  3. The thermal energy required to break the structure and separate constituent particles is not uniform.
  4. Hence the temperature needed to melt the solid is not same, therefore amorphous solids do not have sharp melting points but melt over a range of temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 17.
Give examples of (1) crystalline solids and (2) amorphous solids.
Answer:
(1) Crystalline solids : Metallic solids (Cu, Fe, etc.) crystalline salts (NaCl, K2SO4, etc.)
(2) Amorphous solids : Glass, plastics, rubber, etc.

Question 18.
Distinguish between crystalline solids and amorphous solids.
Answer:
Crystalline solids:

  1. They have definite characteristic geometrical shape.
  2. They have long range order of regular pattern of arrangement of constituent particles.
  3. They are true solids.
  4. They have sharp melting points.
  5. They are anisotropic in nature.
  6. They have definite heat of fusion.

Amorphous solids:

  1. They have irregular shape.
  2. They have short range order of regular pattern of arrangement of constituent particles.
  3. They are pseudo solids or supercooled liquids.
  4. They do not have sharp melting points.
  5. They are isotropic in nature.
  6. They do not have definite heat of fusion.

Question 19.
How are crystalline solids classified ?
Answer:
Crystalline solids are classified as follows :

  1. Ionic crystals
  2. Covalent network crystals
  3. Molecular crystals
  4. Metallic crystals

Question 20.
What are crystalline solids?
Answer:
The solids in which the constituent particles are charged ions namely cations and anions held together by electrostatic force of attraction are called crystalline solids.

Question 21.
What are the characteristics of ionic crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of ionic crystals are as follows :

  1. The constituents of ionic crystals are charged ions namely cations and anions. They differ in ionic size.
  2. The ions in these crystals are held by strong electrostatic force of attraction.
  3. Ionic crystals have high melting points and they are hard and brittle.
  4. In solid state they are nonconductors of electricity but they are good conductors when melted or dissolved in water.
  5. In aqueous solution they dissociate forming ions.
  6. Example : NaCl, KCl. CaF2, K2SO4, etc.

Question 22.
Explain why ionic solids are hard and brittle.
Answer:

  1. In ionic crystalline solids, constituent particles are positively charged cations and negatively charged anions placed at alternate lattice points.
  2. The ions are held by strong coulombic electrostatic forces of attraction compensating opposite forces. Hence they are hard.
  3. Since there are no free electrons, they are not malleable and on applying a shearing force, ionic crystals break into small units. Hence they are brittle.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 23.
What are covalent network crystals ?
Answer:
The crystals in which the constituent particles are atoms linked by covalent bonds forming a continuous network are called covalent network crystals. For example, diamond, quartz.

Question 24.
What are the characteristics of covalent network crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of covalent network crystals are as follows :

  • The constituent particles in these solids are atoms.
  • The atoms in these crystals are held by covalent bonds forming a rigid three dimensional network which gives a giant molecule. Hence, the entire crystal is a single molecule.
  • These crystals are very hard (or hardest) and most incompressible.
  • They have high melting points and boiling points.
  • Since the electrons are localised they are poor conductors of heat and electricity.
  • Example : Quartz (SiO2), diamond.

Question 25.
Give the examples of network solids.
Answer:
The examples of covalent network solids are as follows :
Quartz (SiO2), diamond, boron nitride carborundum.

Question 26.
What are allotropes ?
Answer:
Allotropes : When a substance exists in two or more forms then they are called allotropes. They are polymorphous. For example, carbon has allotropes diamond and graphite.

Question 27.
What are molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The crystals in which the constituent particles are molecules (or unbonded single atoms) of the same substance held together by intermolecular forces of attraction. For example solidified Cl2, CO2, etc.

Question 28.
What are the characteristics of molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The characteristics of molecular crystals are as follows :

  1. The constituent particles of these solids are molecules (or unbonded single atoms) of the same substance.
  2. The atoms within the molecules are bonded by covalent bonds.
  3. The molecules are held together by intermolecular forces of attraction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 29.
What are intermolecular forces of attraction involved in molecular crystals ?
Answer:
The intermolecular forces involved in molecular crystals are as follows :
(1) Weak dipole-dipole interactions :
The solids constituting polar molecules like HCl, H2O, SO2, etc. which possess permanent dipole moment involve weak dipole-dipole interactions.

(2) Very weak dispersion or London forces :
The solids consisting of nonpolar molecules like CH4, H2, etc. involve weak dispersion forces. They are also involved in monoatomic solids like Ar, Ne.

(3) Intermolecular Hydrogen bonds :

  • In this crystalline solids, the constituent particles are the molecules which contain hydrogen atom linked to highly electronegative atom like F, O or N.
  • In these, molecules are held by hydrogen bonds in which H atom of one molecule is bonded to electronegative atom (like F, N or O) of another molecule.
  • Since hydrogen bonding is weak, these solids have very low melting points and generally at room temperature they exist in the liquid or gaseous state.
  • They are non-conductors of electricity.

Question 30.
What are metallic crystals ?
Answer:
These are crystalline solids formed by atoms of the same metallic element held together by metallic bonds.

Question 31.
What are the characteristics of metallic crystals ?
Answer:

  1. Metallic crystals are solids formed by atoms of the same metallic element held together by metallic bonds.
  2. Metallic crystals have high melting point and boiling point.
  3. Metals are malleable and can be hammered into thin sheets.
  4. Metals are ductile and can be drawn into thin wires.
  5. Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity.
  6. Examples are Cu, Ag, Au, Ni, etc.

Question 32.
Classify the following solids into different types :
(i) Plastic (ii) P4 molecule (iii) S8 molecule (iv) Iodine molecule (v) Tetra phosphorus decoxide (vi) Ammonium phosphate (vii) Brass (viii) Rubidium (ix) Graphite (x) Diamond (xi) NaCl (xii) Silicon.
Answer:

Solid Type
(i) Plastic Covalent network crystal
(ii) P4 molecule Covalent network crystal
(iii) S8 molecule Covalent network crystal
(iv) Iodine molecule Covalent network crystal
(v) Tetra phosphorus decoxide Covalent network crystal
(vi) Ammonium phosphate Ionic crystal
(vii) Brass Metalic crystal
(viii) Rubidium Metalic crystal
(ix) Graphite Covalent crystal
(x) Diamond Covalent crystal
(xi) NaCl Ionic crystal
(xii) Silicon Covalent crystal

Question 33.
Mention the types of the following solids :
(i) CaF2 (ii) SiC (iii) Ice (iv) SO2 (v) CaCO3 (vi) ZnS (vii) HCl (viii) CO2
Answer:

Solid Type
(i) CaF2 Ionic crystal
(ii) SiC Covalent crystal
(iii) Ice Hydrogen bonded molecular crystal
(iv) SO2 Molecular crystal
(v) CaCO3 Ionic crystal
(vi) ZnS Ionic crystal
(vii) HCl Polar molecular crystal
(viii) CO2 Non-polar molecular crystal

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 34.
What is a giant solid ?
Answer:
Covalent solid formed by covalent bonds between neighbouring constituent atoms of non-metallic solid is called a giant solid. For example, graphite.

Question 35.
What is lattice ?
Answer:
Lattice is a geometrical arrangement of points in a three dimensional periodic array.

Question 36.
What is crystal lattice (space lattice) ?
Answer:
Crystal lattice (space lattice) : A regular arrangement of the constituent particles (atoms, ions or molecules) of a crystalline solid having similar environment in three dimensional space is called crystal lattice or space lattice.

Question 37.
What is a lattice point?
Answer:
Lattice point : A position occupied by a crystal constituent particle like an atom, ion or a molecule in the crystal lattice is called lattice point or lattice site.
OR
Any point at the intersection of the lines in the unit cell occupied by a constituent particle like an atom, an ion or a molecule in the crystalline solid is called a lattice point.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 38.
What are the parameters of a unit cell ?
Answer:
A unit cell is characterised by following parameters :
(1) Edges or edge lengths : The intersection of two faces of crystal lattice is called as edge. The three edges denoted by a, b and c represent the dimensions (lengths) of the unit cell along three axes. These edges may or may not be mutually perpendicular.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 3

(2) Angles between the edges (or planes) : There are three angles between the edges of the unit cell represented as α, β and γ.

  • The angle α is between edges b and c.
  • The angle β is between edges a and c.
  • The angle γ is between edges a and b.

The crystal is defined with the help of these parameters of its unit cell.

Question 39.
Represent space lattice and unit cell diagrammatically.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 4

Question 40.
What do you understand by the basis of crystal lattice ?
Answer:

  • A crystal structure is formed by attaching a constituent particle to lattice points.
  • The constituent particles attached to the lattice points form the basis of the crystal lattice.
  • The crystal structure is obtained by attaching a basis to each of the lattice points.

This is represented by the following schematic equation :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 5

Question 41.
What are the types of unit cells?
Answer:
Basically unit cells are of two types as follows :

  1. Primitive unit cells : The unit cells in which the constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules are present only at the corners of the unit cell are called primitive unit cells or simple unit cells.
  2. Body-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at its body-centre is called body-centred unit cell.
  3. Face-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at the centre of each face is called face-centred unit cell or cubic close packed (CCP) unit cell.
  4. Base-centred unit cell : A unit cell in which the constituent particles are present at the corners as well as at the centres of two opposite faces is called end-centred unit cell.

Question 42.
Explain briefly crystal systems.
Answer:
(1) The constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules of the crystal can be arranged in seven different ways changing edges (a, b, c) and angles (α, β, γ) and accordingly they form seven systems or types of the crystal.

(2) These seven crystal system are named as :
(a) Cubic system, (b) Tetragonal system (c) Orthorhombic system (d) Rhombohedral system (e) Monoclinic system (f) Triclinic system (g) Hexagonal system.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 43.
What are Bravais lattices ?
Answer:

  1. There are seven crystal systems according to the edges (a. b, c) and angles (α, β, γ).
  2. The constituents of the crystal may be present at corners, face centres, body centres, edge centres and voids.
  3. By mathematical analysis, it has been proved that only fourteen different kinds of space lattices are possible.
  4. Hence there are fourteen different ways of arrangement of the lattice basis.
  5. These fourteen lattices of seven crystal systems are called Bravais lattices.

Question 44.
Explain Bravais lattices of a cubic system.
OR
Explain unit cells of a cubic system.
Answer:
Cubic lattice : For this, edges are a = b = c and angles are α = β = γ = 90°. In this cubic system, there are three Bravais lattices.
(1) Simple (or primitive) cubic unit cell (SCC) : In this unit cell, atoms are present only at 8 corners of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 6

(2) Body-centred cubic unit cell (BCC) : In this, atoms are present at 8 corners along with one additional atom at the body-centre of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 7

(3) Face-centred cubic unit cell (FCC) : In this unit cell, atoms are present at 8 comers and at 6 face centres.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 8

Question 45.
Give the number of lattice points in one unit cell of the following crystal structures :
(1) Simple cubic
(2) Face-centred cubic
(3) Body-centred cubic.
Answer:
Lattice points in one unit cell represent the positions of atoms, ions or molecules in the unit cell.
(1) Simple cubic unit cell : In this primitive unit cell, the lattice points are at 8 corners of the unit cell. Hence there are 8 lattice points.
(2) Face-centred cubic unit cell : In this unit cell, the lattice points are at 8 comers and 6 face centres.
(In cubic close packing unit cell, the lattice points are also at edge centres and body centre.)
(3) Body-centred cubic unit cell : In this, the lattice points are at 8 comers and one at body centre.

Question 46.
Find the number of atoms per unit cell in the following crystal structures.
(1) Simple cubic unit cell
(2) Body-centred cubic unit cell
(3) Face-centred cubic cell.
Answer:
(1) Number of atoms in primitive simple cubic (scc) unit cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 9
In simple or primitive cubic unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom to the unit cell.
∴ Number of atoms present in the unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Hence the volume of the unit cell is equal to the volume of one atom.

(2) Number of atoms in body-centred cubic (bcc) unit cell:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 58
In this unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners and one additional atom at the body centre. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom, to the unit cell, hence due to 8 corners.
Number of atoms = 8 × \(\frac {1}{8}\)
= 1 atom.
An atom at the body centre wholly belongs to the unit cell.
∴ Total number of atoms present in bcc unit cell = 1 + 1 = 2.
Hence the volume of unit cell is equal to the volume of two atoms.

(3) Number of atoms in face-centred cubic (fcc) unit cell :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 10
In this unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres. Each corner contributes 1/8th atom to the unit cell, hence due to 8 corners,
Number of atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Each face centre contributes half of the atom to the unit cell, hence due to 6 face centres,
Number of atoms = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 3.
∴ Total number of atoms present in fee unit cell = 1 + 3 = 4.
Hence the volume of the unit cell is equal to the volume of four atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 47.
Obtain a relation for the density of the unit cell and radius of atom or sphere for the following :
(1) Simple cubic (scc) crystal
(2) Body centred cubic (bcc) crystal
(3) Face centred cubic (fcc) crystal.
Answer:
(1) Consider a unit cell of a simple cubic crystal. It has 8 atoms at 8 corners of the unit cell.
∴ Total number of atoms in unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
If a is the length of edge of cubic unit cell and r is the radius of the atom, then r = a/2 or a = 2r.
Volume of the unit cell = a3 = (2r)3 = 8r3
If M is atomic mass of the element, then mass of one atom is M/NA where NA is Avogadro number. If there are V atoms in one unit cell then,
Mass of unit cell = n × Mass of one atom = n × \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 11
Since there is one atom present in one unit cell,
ρ = \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3}}\)

(2) Consider a unit cell of body centred cubic (bcc) crystal. It has 8 atoms at 8 comers and one additional atom at the centre of body of unit cell.
Number of atoms due to 8 corners = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1
Body centred atom, wholly belong to the unit cell. Hence total number of atoms in the unit cell is two. If M is atomic mass of an element then M/NA is mass of one atom where NA is Avogadro number.
Mass of unit cell = Mass of 2 atoms in unit cell = 2 M/NA
If a is the edge length or lattice parameter then,
Volume of cubic unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 12

(3) Consider a unit cell of face centred cubic (fcc) crystal.
It has 8 atoms at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres.
∴ Total number of atoms in unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 1 + 3= 4
If M is the atomic mass of an element, then mass of one atom is M/NA, where NA is Avogadro number. Mass of unit cell = Mass of 4 atoms
= \(4 \times \frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
If a is the edge length of this cubic unit cell then,
volume of unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 13

Question 48.
What is coordination number? What is its significance?
Answer:
(1) Coordination number : The number of the closest neighbouring constituent particles like atoms, ions or molecules which are in contact with a particular particle or an atom in the crystal lattice is called coordination number of that particle.
(In the crystal lattice, all atoms may have same or different coordination numbers.)

(2) The magnitude of the coordination number is a measure of compactness of spheres in close-packed structures.

(3) The higher the coordination number, the closer are the spheres to each other.

Question 49.
Explain linear packing in one direction.
OR
Explain close packing in one dimension.
Answer:
Linear packing in one direction or close packing in one dimension :
The constituent particles of the crystal may be of varying shapes but for better understanding we consider particles as hard spheres of equal size.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 14
There is only one way of arranging or packing spheres placed in a horizontal row touching one another. Since one sphere is in contact with two neighbouring spheres except the end atoms, the coordination number in this arrangement is two. This packing may be in any one direction x, y or z.

Question 50.
Explain the following :
Planar packing arrangement of spheres.
OR
Close packing in two dimensions.
OR
AAAA type and ABAB type of two dimensional arrangement.
OR
(i) Square close packing
(ii) Hexagonal close packing.
Answer:
Two dimensional close packing crystal structure can be generated by placing one dimensional linear crystal structure over another to form multiple layers. This staking of linear rows may be taking place in two different ways giving two different two dimensional structures as follows :

(i) AAAA type two dimensional close packing or square close packing :
In this arrangement, various one dimensional rows are placed on one over other so that each sphere in one row is over the another sphere of another row forming planar structure. In this, spheres have horizontal as well as vertical alignment. All the rows of spheres are identical in planar structure. All crests as well as all the depressions or troughs formed by the arrangement are also aligned.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 15

If the first row is labelled as A type, then second and all subsequent rows are also identical, hence are of A type. Therefore this planar two dimensional close packing is called AAAA type packing.

In this arrangement, each sphere is in contact with (or touching) four other spheres around it, hence the coordination number of each sphere is four and the packing is called two dimensional or planar square close packing. In this, packing efficiency is 52.4%.

(ii) ABAB type two dimensional packing or hexag-onal close packing :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 16

In this arrangement, crests of the spheres of one row are placed into the depressions or troughs formed between adjacent spheres of next row. This arrangement is repeated consecutively throughout.

In this arrangement, crests of the spheres of one row are in contact with depressions or troughs of next row.

If one row of spheres is labelled as A then the next row will be B, third row will again be A, fourth row B and so on. Hence this planar or two dimensional close packing is called ABAB… type packing.

In this arrangement, each sphere is in contact with six other spheres around it hence the coordination number of each sphere is six and the packing is called two dimensional or planar hexagonal close packing. In this, the packing efficiency is 60.4% which is more than linear close packing.

Question 51.
Explain close packing in three dimensions.
Answer:
Close packing in three dimensions :
Three dimensional crystal structures are obtained by stacking of two dimensional layers. Simple cubic lattice is obtained by stacking of two dimensional square layers.

The stacking of two dimensional hexagonal close packed layers gives two structures namely hexagonal close packed (hcp) structure and face centred (fcc) structure.

(i) Stacking of square close packed layers :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 17

In this arrangement, the two dimensional AAAA type square closed packed layers are placed one over the other in such a way that the crests of all spheres are in contact with successive layers in all directions. All spheres of different layers are perfectly aligned horizontally and vertically forming unit cells having primitive or simple cubic structure. Since all the layers are identical and if each layer is labelled as layer A, then whole three dimensional crystal lattice will be of AAAA… type.

Each sphere is in contact with six surrounded spheres, hence the co-ordination number of each sphere is six.

(ii) Stacking of two hexagonal close packed layers :
A close packed three dimensional structure can be generated by arranging hexagonal close packed layers in a particular manner.

In this the spheres of second layer are placed in the depression of the first layer.

In this if first layer is labelled as A then second layer is labelled as B since they are aligned differently.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 18

In this, all triangular voids of the first layers are not covered by the spheres of the second layer. The triangular voids which are covered by second layer spheres generate tetrahedral void which is surrounded by four spheres. The triangular voids in one layer have above them triangular voids of successive layers.

The overlapping triangular voids from two layers together form an octahedral void which is surrounded by six spheres.

(iii) Placing third hexagonal close packed layer :
(a) Hexagonal close packing (hcp) : If the crests of spheres of third layer are placed on the triangular shaped tetrahedral voids C of the second layer, then three dimensional closest packing structure is obtained in which the spheres of third layer lie directly above the spheres of first layer, i.e., first and third layers are identical. Following same placing of layers, fourth layer will be identical to second layer.

If the first layer is labelled A and second layer B, then the arrangement of packing will be of ABAB type. This is also called hexagonal close packing (hcp) as shown in the figure. In this, packing efficiency is 74%. The coordination number of each sphere is 12. The metals Be. Mg, Zn, Cd crystallise in HCP crystalline structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 19

(b) Cubic close packing (ccp) : If the crests of spheres of third layer are placed in the positions of tetrahedral void ‘a’ having apex upward of first layers, then the third layer will not be identical to the first, and may be labelled as C, which is different from A and B layers. Fourth layer may be arranged above third layer such that the spheres are aligned, so that the first layer and fourth layer are identical, second and fifth layers are identical and so on.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 20
If first, second and third layers are labelled as A, B and C respectively then the arrangement of packing will be ABCABC type. This is also called cubic close packing (ccp) as shown in the figure. This is similar to face centred cubic (fcc) packing.

In this, arrangement packing efficiency is 74% and the coordination number of each sphere is 12.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 52.
Explain tetrahedral void.
Answer:
(1) Tetrahedral void : The vacant space or void among four constituent particles having tetrahedral arrangement in the crystal lattice is called tetrahedral void.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 21
The arrangement of four spheres around the void is tetrahedral. A tetrahedral void is formed when a triangular void made by three coplanar spheres is in contact with fourth sphere above or below it.

(2) Characteristics of tetrahedral void :

  • The volume of the void is much smaller than that of atom or sphere.
  • Larger the size of sphere, more is the size of void.
  • If R is the radius of the constituent atom, then the radius of the tetrahedral void is 0.225 R.
  • Coordination number of tetrahedral void is four.
  • There are two tetrahedral voids per sphere, in the crystal lattice. If the number of closed packed spheres is N then the number of tetrahedral voids is 2N.

Question 53.
Explain octahedral void.
Answer:
(1) Octahedral void : The vacant space or void at the centre of six spheres (or atoms) which are placed octahedrally is called octahedral void.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 22

(2) Characteristics of octahedral void :

  • The volume of the void is small.
  • There is one octahedral void at the body centre and twelve octahedral void positions at twelve edge centres.
  • If R is the radius of constituent atom, then the radius of the octahedral void is 0.414 R.
  • The coordination number of octahedral void is six.
  • There is one octahedral void per sphere in the crystal lattice. If the number of closed packed spheres is N then the number of octahedral voids is N.

Question 54.
What are number of voids per atom in hep and ccp ?
Answer:
The tetrahedral and octahedral voids occur in hep and ccp/fcc structures. There are two tetrahedral voids associated with each atom. The number of octahedral voids is half that of tetrahedral voids. Thus, there is one octahedral void per atom.

Question 55.
What is packing efficiency?
Answer:
(1) Packing efficiency : It is the fraction of a percentage of the total space (of the unit cell) occupied by the particles (spheres).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 23
( 2) The magnitude of packing efficiency gives a measure of how tightly particles are packed together.

Question 56.
Calculate packing efficiency in body-centred cubic lattice.
Answer:
Step 1 : Radius of sphere :
In the unit cell of body-centred cubic lattice, there are 8 atoms at 8 corners and one atom at the centre of the cube.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 24

The atoms are in contact along the body diagonal BF. Let a be the edge length and r the radius of an atom.
Consider a triangle BCE.
BE2 = BC2 + CE2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2
Consider triangle BEF,
BF2 = BE2 + EF2 = 2a2 + a2 = 3a2
BF = \(\sqrt{3}\)a.
From figure, BF = 4r
∴ 4r = \(\sqrt{3}\)a
∴ r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)

Step 2 : Volume of sphere :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 25

Step 3 : Total volume of particles :
The unit cell of bcc structure contains 2 particles.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 26

Step 4 : Packing efficiency
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 27
∴ Packing efficiency = 68%
∴ Percentage of void space = 100 – 68
= 32%

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 57.
Calculate packing efficiency in face-centred cubic lattice.
Answer:
Step 1 : Radius of sphere :
In the unit cell of face-centred cubic lattice, there 8 atoms at 8 corners and 6 atoms at 6 face centres. Consider the face ABCD.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 28

The atoms are in contact along the face diagonal BD.
Let a be the edge length and r, the radius of an atom.
Consider a triangle BCD.
BD2 = BC2 + CD2
= a2 + a2 = 2a
∴ BD = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
From figure, BD = 4r
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 29

Step 3 : Total volume of particles :
The unit cell of fee crystal lattice contains 4 particles.
∴ Volume occupied by 4 particles = \(4 \times \frac{\pi a^{3}}{12 \sqrt{2}}\)
= \(\frac{\pi a^{3}}{3 \sqrt{2}}\)

Step 4 : Packing efficiency :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 30
∴ Packing efficiency = 74%
∴ Percentage of void space = 100 – 74
= 26%

Edge length and particle parameters in cubic system
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 31a

Coordination number and packing efficiency in systems

Lattice Coordination number of atoms Packing efficiency
1. scc 6 : four in the same layer, one directly above and one directly below 52.4%
2. bcc 8 : four in the layer below and four in the layer above 68%
3. fcc/ccp/hcp 12 : six in its own layer, three above and three below 74%

Question 58.
Calculate the number of particles and unit cells in ‘x’ g of metallic crystal.
Answer:
Consider ‘x’ gram of a metallic crystal of molar mass M and density ρ. If the unit cell of the crystal has edge length ‘a’ then, volume of unit cell = a3.
Mass of one metal atom = \(\frac{M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\). If ‘n’ number of atoms are present in one unit cell then
Mass of unit cell = \(\frac{n \times M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
If ‘a’ is the edge length of the unit cell then, Volume of unit cell = a3
Density of unit cell = ρ = \(\frac{n \times M}{N_{\mathrm{A}}} \times \frac{1}{a^{3}}\)
∴ M = \(\frac{\rho \times N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3}}{n}\)
∵ Molar mass M gram contains NA particles
∴ x gram contains \(\frac{x \times N_{\mathrm{A}}}{M}\) particles.
Substituting the value M,

(i) Number of particles in x g crystal
= \(\frac{x \times N_{\mathrm{A}}}{\rho \times N_{\mathrm{A}} \times a^{3} / n}\)
= \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) particles

(ii) Number of unit cells in x g crystal :
∵ n particles are present in 1 unit cell
∴ \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) are present in, \(\frac{x \times n}{\rho \times a^{3}} \times \frac{1}{n}\)
= \(\frac{x}{\rho \times a^{3}}\) unit cells

(iii) Number of unit cells in V volume of crystal = \(\frac{V}{a^{3}}\)

Alternative method :
Consider ‘x’ g metal of atomic mass M g mol-1.
Number of moles of metal = \(\frac{x}{M}\)
(a) Number of atoms (particles) of metal = \(\frac{x}{M} \times N_{\mathrm{A}}\)
(b) If unit cell contains ‘n’ atoms,
Number of unit cells = \(\frac{x}{M} \times \frac{N_{\mathrm{A}}}{n}\)
(c) If ‘a’ is the edge length then,
Volume of unit cells = a3
∴ Number of unit cells in V volume of crystal = \(\frac{V}{a^{3}}\).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Solved Examples 1.5 – 4.7

Question 59.
Solve the following :
[1 m = 10 dm = 100 cm = 109 nm = 1012 pm, 1Å = 10-8 cm = 100 pm]

(1) A cubic unit cell of a crystal consists of atoms of A and B elements. Atoms of A occupy corners of the unit cell while one B atom is present at the body centre. Determine the formula of the crystalline compound.
Solution :
Given : Atoms of A are at the comers while atom B is at the body centre of the cubic unit cell.
Since \(\frac {1}{8}\)th atom is contributed at each comer and there are 8 comers in unit cell, number of atoms of A due to comers is \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.

In addition there is one atom of B at body centre. Hence this unit cell contains one atom of each, A and B, therefore the formula of the compound is AB.
Ans. The formula of the compound = AB.

(2) Atoms C and D form fee crystalline structure. Atom C is present at the corners of the cube and D is at the face centres of the cube. What is the formula of the compound ?
Solution :
Given : Crystal has fee structure.
Atoms C are at 8 comers while atoms D are at 6 face centres of the cubic unit cell.
At the comer, \(\frac {1}{8}\)th of each C atom is present while at each face centre, half of each D atom is present.
Number of C atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Number of D atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 6 = 3.
Thus unit cell contains one C atom and three D atoms.
Hence the formula of the compound is CD3.
Ans. Formula of the compound = CD3.

(3) A cubic unit cell contains atoms A at the corners, atoms B at face centres and atom C at the body centre. What is the formula of the crystalline compound?
Solution :
Given : Atoms A are at 8 comers, atoms B at the 6 face centres and one atom C at body centre.
Total number of atoms of A = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Total number of atoms of B = \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 3.
One atom of C at the body centre.
Therefore the unit cell contains one atom of A, three atoms of B and one atom of C.
Hence the formula of the compound is AB3C.
Ans. The formula of the crystalline compound is AB3C.

(4) An element A and B constitute bcc type crystalline structure. Element A occupies body centre position and B is at the corners of cube. What is the formula of the compound? What are the coordination numbers of A and B ?
Solution :
Given : Crystalline structure is bcc type.
Atoms A are at 8 comers and atom B is at body centre.
∴ Number of atoms of A in a unit cell
= \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 = 1.
Number of atom B in a unit cell = 1.
Since unit cell contains one atom each of A and B, the formula of the compound is AB.
The coordination number of an atom A at comer is 8.
The coordination number of an atom B at body centre is 8.
Answer. Formula of the compound = AB.
Coordination number of A = 8
Coordination number of B = 8.

(5) Mention the number of atoms in the following unit cells :
(a) scc (b) bcc (c) fcc (d) hcp.
Answer:

Unit cell Number of atoms
(a) scc 1
(b) bcc 2
(c) fcc 4
(d) hcp 3

(6) 0.1 mole of Buckminster fullerene of molar mass 720 gmol-1 contains how many Kg of carbon ?
Solution :
Molar mass of fullerene, C60 = 720 gmol-1
∵ Mass of 1 mole of fullerene = 720 g = 0.72 kg
∴ Mass of 0.1 mole of fullerene = 0.72 × 0.1
= 0.072 kg
Ans. 0.072 kg.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(7) In a cubic crystalline structure of zinc blende (ZnS), sulphide ions are at corners and face centres while zinc ions occupy half of tetrahedral voids.
Find in the unit cell :
(i) Number of Zn2+ ions
(ii) Number of S2- ions
(iii) Number of ZnS molecules
(iv) Molecular formula of zinc blende.
Solution :
Given : S2- ions are at 8 comers and 6 face centres.
Zn2+ ions occupy half of tetrahedral voids.
Number of S2- ions in unit cell
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 32
= 1 + 3 = 4

Cubic unit cell has 8 tetrahedral voids. Since half of them are occupied by Zn2+ ions, there are 4Zn2+ ions in the unit cell.
Hence number of zinc sulphide (ZnS) molecules is 4.
Molecular formula of zinc blende is ZnS.
Ans. (i) Number of Zn2+ ions = 4
(ii) Number of S2- ions = 4
(iii) Number of ZnS molecules = 4
(iv) Molecular formula of zinc blende = ZnS.

(8) In a crystalline compound, atoms A occupy ccp lattices while atoms B occupy 2/3 rd tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound ?
Solution :
In ccp unit, lattice points are 8 comers and 6 face centres where atoms A are present.
∴ Number of A atoms
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 33
In cubic unit cell, there are 8 tetrahedral voids.
Hence,
Number of B atoms = \(\frac {2}{3}\) × 8 = \(\frac {16}{3}\).
Hence the formula should be A4B16/3 or A12B16 or A3B4.
Ans. The formula of the compound is A3B4.

(9) A compound forms hep structure. What is the number of (a) octahedral voids, (b) tetrahedral voids, (c) total voids formed in 0.2 mol of the compound?
Solution :
Number of atoms in 0.2 mol of the compound
= 0.2 × NA = 0.2 × 6.022 × 1023
= 1.2044 × 1023 atoms
(a) Number of octahedral voids
= Number of atoms
= 1.2044 × 1023

(b) Number of tetrahedral voids
= 2 × Number of atoms
= 2 × 1.2044 × 1023
= 2.4088 × 1023

(c) Total number of voids
= 1.2044 × 1023 + 2.4088 × 1023
= 3.6132 × 1023
Ans. (a) Number of octahedral voids
= 1.2044 × 1023
(b) Number of tetrahedral voids = 2.4088 × 1023
(c) Total number of voids = 3.6132 × 1023

(10) Copper crystallises into a fcc structure and the unit cell has length of edge 3.61 × 10-8 cm. Calculate the density of copper. Atomic mass of copper is 63.5 g mol-1.
Solution :
Given : Crystalline structure of Cu is fcc.
Edge length = a = 3.61 × 10-8 cm
Atomic mass of Cu = 63.5 g mol-1
Avogadro number = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Density = d = ?

In fcc structure, there are 8 Cu atoms at 8 comers and 6 Cu atoms at 6 face centres.
∴ Total number of Cu atoms
= \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6 = 1 + 3
= 4
Mass of one Cu atom
= \(\frac{63.5}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 1.054 × 10-22 g
∴ Mass of 4 Cu atoms = 4 × 1.054 × 10-22
= 4.216 × 10-22 g
Mass of unit cell = Mass of 4 Cu atoms
= 4.216 × 10-22g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (3.61 × 10-8)3
= 4.7 × 10-24 cm3
Density of unit cell = \(\frac{\text { Mass of unit cell }}{\text { Volume of unit cell }}\)
∴ ρ = \(\frac{4.216 \times 10^{-22}}{4.7 \times 10^{-23}}\) = 8.97 g cm-3
Ans. Density of Cu = 8.97 g cm-3.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(11) Niobium is found to crystallise with bcc structure and found to have density of 8.55 g cm-3 (OR 8.55 kg m-3). Determine the atomic radius of niobium if its atomic mass is 93.
Solution :
Given : Density of Niobium (Nb) crystal = 8.55 g cm-3
Crystalline stmeture is bcc.
Atomic mass of Nb = 93 g mol-1
Avogadro number = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Atomic radius of Niobium = ?
In bcc unit cell, there are 8 atoms at 8 comers and 1 atom at the body centre.
∴ Number of Nb atoms = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + 1 = 1 + 1 = 2.
Mass of one Nb atom = \(\frac{93}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 1.544 × 10-22
∴ Mass of 2 Nb atoms = 2 × 1.544 × 10-22 = 3.088 × 10-22 g
Mass of unit cell
= Mass of 2Nb atoms = 3.088 × 10-22 g
If a is edge length of bcc unit cell, volume of unit cell = a3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 34
= 0.361 × 10-22 cm3 = 36.1 × 10-24 cm3
∴ a = (36.1 × 10-24)-1/3 = 3.3 × 10-8 cm
If r is the radius of 1 Nb atom, then in bcc structure
r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4}\) × 3.3 × 10-8
= 1.43 × 10-8 cm
= 1.43 × 10-10 m
= 1.43 × 10-10 × 109 nm
= 0.143 nm
Ans. Atomic radius of niobium atom = 0.143 nm

(12) Gold occurs as face centred cube and has a density of 19.30 kg dm-3. Calculate atomic radius of gold. (Molar mass of Au = 197)
Solution :
Given : Density of Au = 19.3 kg dm-3
Molar mass = 197 g mol-1
Avogadro constant = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Atomic radius of Au = ?
In fcc unit cell, there are 8 atoms of Au at 8 comers and 6 atoms at 6 face centres.
Number of Au atoms in the unit cell = \(\frac {1}{8}\) × 8 + \(\frac {1}{2}\) × 6
= 4 atoms
Mass of 1 Au atom = \(\frac{197}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 3.271 × 10-22 g
∴ Mass of 4 Au atoms = 4 × 3.271 × 10-22 g = 1.308 g × 10-21 g
∴ Mass of unit cell = 1.308 × 10-21 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 35
= 6.777 × 10-24 dm3
= 6.777 × 10-23 cm3
∴ a = (6.777 × 10-23)1/3 = (67.77 × 10-24)-1/3
= 4.077 × 10-8 cm
If r is the radius of Au atom, then for fcc unit cell,
r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
= \(\frac{4.077 \times 10^{-8}}{2 \sqrt{2}}\) = 1.442 x 10-8 cm = 144.2 pm
Ans. Radius of Au atom = 144.2 pm.

(13) A compound is formed by two elements X and Y. The atoms of Y form ccp structure. The atoms of A occupy \(\frac {1}{3}\) of tetrahedral voids. Find the formula of the compound.
Solution :
In ccp structure, Y atoms are present at 8 comers and 6 face-centres of the ccp structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 36
There are 8 tetrahedral voids of which \(\frac {1}{3}\)rd are occupied by atoms X. Hence unit cell has \(\frac {8}{3}\) atoms of X and 4 atoms of Y. The formula will be,
X8/3 Y4 or X8Y12 or X2Y3
Ans. Formula of the compound = X2Y3.

(14) A metal crystallises into two cubic faces namely face centered (FCC) and body centered (BCC), whose unit cell edge lengths are 3.5 Å and 3.0 Å respectively. Find the ratio of the densities of FCC and BCC.
Solution :
Given : Edge length of unit cell of fcc metal = 3.5 Å
= 3.5 × 10-8 cm
Edge length of unit cell of bcc metal = 3 Å = 3 × 10-8 cm
Density d = \(\frac{n \times \mathbf{M}}{a^{3} \times \mathbf{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
where, n = Number of Fe atoms in the unit cell
M = Atomic mass of metal
a = Edge length of unit cell
NA = Avogadro number
∴ For fcc unit cell = n = 4
For bcc unit cell = n = 2
∴ \(\frac{\text { Density of fcc unit cell }}{\text { Density of bcc unit cell }}=\frac{d_{\mathrm{fcc}}}{d_{\mathrm{bcc}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 37

(15) The density of silver having atomic mass 107.8 gram mol-1 is 10.8 gram cm-3. If the edge length of cubic unit cell is 4.05 × 10-8 cm, find the number of silver atoms in the unit cell. (NA = 6.022 × 1023, 1Å = 10-8 cm)
Solution :
Given : d = 10.8 g cm-3
M= 107.8 g mol-1
a = 4.05 × 10-8 cm
Number of Ag atoms in unit cell = n = ?
Mass of one Ag atom = \(\frac{107.8}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\)
= 1.79 × 10-22 g
If there are n atoms, then
Mass of unit cell = n × 1.79 × 10-22 g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (4.05 × 10-8)3
= 6.643 × 10-23 cm3
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 38
Ans. Number of silver atoms (Ag) atoms in unit cell = 4.

(16) Aluminium having atomic mass 27 g mol-1 crystallises in face centred packed cubic crystal. Find the number of Al atoms in 10 g aluminium. How many unit cells will be present in it?
Solution :
Given : Atomic mass of Al = 27 g mol-1
Mass of Al = 10 g
Avogadro number = NA = 6.022 × 1023 mol-1
Number of Al atoms = ?
Number of unit cells = ?
1 gram atom of Al = 27 g Al contains 6.022 × 1023
Al atoms
∴ Number of Al atoms in 10 g
= \(\frac{10 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{27}\)
= 2.23 × 1023
In fcc structure, each unit cell contains 4Al atoms.
∴ Number of unit cells = \(\frac{2.23 \times 10^{23}}{4}\)
= 5.575 × 1022
Ans. Number of Al atoms = 2.23 × 1023
Number of unit cells = 5.575 × 1022.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

(17) The density of iron crystal is 8.54 gram cm-3. If the edge length of unit cell is 2.8 Å and atomic mass is 56 gram mol-1, find the number of atoms in the unit cell. What is the type of crystal ?
Solution :
Given :
Density of Fe crystal = d = 8.54 g cm-3
a = 2.8 Å = 2.8 × 10-8 cm
Atomic mass = M = 56 g mol-1
Number of atoms in unit cell, n = ?
Mass of one atom = \(\frac{56}{6.022 \times 10^{23}}\) = 9.3 × 10-23 g
Volume of unit cell = a3 = (2.8 × 10-8)3
= 2.195 × 10-23 cm3
If there are n atoms in the unit cell, then
Mass of unit cell = n × 9.3 × 10-23 g
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 39
Since unit cell contains 2 atoms, the crystal has bcc structure.
Ans. Number of atoms in unit cell = 2
Type of crystal = bcc

Question 60.
What is meant by crystal defects or imperfections?
Answer:

  1. Defect in crystalline structure : Any deviation from orderly and stoichiometrically perfect arrangement of atoms, ions or molecules in the crystal lattice is called a defect in the crystalline structure.
  2. Defects are created during the crystallisation process. If the process occurs at faster rate, the defects are more.
  3. The properties of solids are affected due to imperfactions.

Question 61.
Mention the types of defects in the solids or crystal structures.
Answer:
The defects in crystalline solids are of two types viz., (1) Point defect and (2) Line defect.
(1) Point defects are further classified as :
(a) Vacancy defect or Schottky defect
(b) Interstitial defect or Frenkel defect
(c) Impurity defect :

This is further classified as

  • Substitution impurity defect
  • Interstitial impurity defect.

(2) Line defects are further classified as

  • Edge dislocation
  • Screw dislocation.

Question 62.
What are point defects?
Answer:
Point defects : These defects arise due to irregularities produced in the arrangement of basis of lattice points in crystalline solids.

Question 63.
What are major classes of point defects ?
Answer:
There are three major classes of point defects : stoichiometric point defects, impurity defects and nonstoichiometric point defects.

There are four types of stoichiometric point defects as vacancy defect, self interstitial defect, Schottky defect and Frenkel defect.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 64.
Explain vacancy defect.
Answer:
Vacancy defect :
(1) During crystallisation, some of regular sites in solid remain unoccupied and the missing particle creates a vacancy defect.
(2) The defect can be developed by heating the substance.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 40
(3) The mass of solid decreases due to absence of particles in regular sites.
(4) Since the volume remains the same the density of the substance decreases.

Question 65.
Explain self interstitial defect in elemental solid.
Answer:
Self Interstitial defect in elemental solid : The empty spaces or voids in between the particles at lattice points represent interstitial defective sites or self interstitial defects.

This defect arises in the following two ways :
(1) An extra particle occupies the empty interstitial space. This extra particle is similar to those already present in the crystal.

(2) (i) A particle gets shifted from its original regular site to an empty interstitial space in the crystal.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 41
(ii) This displacement of a particle produces a vacancy defect at its regular site.
(iii) This defect is referred to as a combination of vacancy defect and self interstitial defect.
(iv) Since there is neither loss or gain in mass of the substance, the density of it remains unchanged.

Question 66.
How does Schottky defect arise?
Answer:
(1) Schottky defect arises in ionic solids due to missing of equal number of cations and anions from their regular positions in the crystal lattice creating vacancies.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 42
(2) There arises formation of two holes per loss of ion pair.

(3) Conditions for formation of Schottky defect :
Characteristics of ionic solids showing Schottky defect :

  • High degree of ionic character
  • High coordination number of anion
  • Small difference between ionic size or radii of cation and anion. The ionic ratio \(\frac{r_{\text {cation }}}{r_{\text {anion }}}\) is not below unity.

Question 67.
How does Frenkel defect arise?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 43

  • Frenkel defect : This defect arises when an ion of an ionic compound is missing from its regular site and occupies interstitial vacant position between lattice points.
  • Cations have smaller size than anions, hence generally cations occupy the interstitial sites.
  • This creates a vacancy defect at its original position and interstitial defect at new position.
  • Frenkel defect is regarded as the combination of interstitial defect and vacancy defect.

Conditions for the formation of Frenkel defect :

  • This defect arises in ionic compounds with a large difference between the sizes of cation and anion.
  • The ionic compounds must have ions with low coordination number.

Question 68.
What are the consequences of Frenkel defect ?
Answer:
Consequences of Frenkel defect :

  • Since there is no loss of ions from the crystal lattice, the density of the solid remains unchanged.
  • The crystal remains electrically neutral.
  • This defect is observed in ZnS, AgCl, AgBr, AgI, CaF2, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 69.
Explain nonstoichiometric defect.
Answer:
Nonstoichiometric defect : This defect arises when the ratio of number of one kind of atoms to that of other kind of atoms (or ratio of number of cations to anions) becomes different from the actual stoichiometric formula. This involves the change in stoichiometry of the compound.

There are two types of nonstoichiometric defects as follows :
(1) Metal deficiency defect : This defect arises in compounds of metal which show variable oxidation states. In some metal crystals, positive metal ions are missing from their regular lattice sites. The extra negative charge is balanced by cations of the same metal with higher oxidation state than that of missing cation at site.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 44
Consider a crystal of NiO. When one Ni2+ is missed from its lattice point, it creates a vacant site.

The deficiency of two positive charges is compensated by two Ni3+ ions at other lattice points of Ni2+ ions and the composition of NiO crystal becomes Ni0.97O1.0.

(2) Metal excess defect : There are two types of metal excess defect as follows :
(a) Presence of a neutral atom or an extra positive ion at interstitial position :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 45
There are two types or ways of metal excess defects in ZnO. In the first case, Zn atom is present in the interstitial space as shown in figure.

(b) Metal ions and electrons at interstitial sites :
The second case arises when ZnO is heated, Zn2+ and electrons are obtained,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 46
The excess Zn2+ ions are trapped in interstitial sites in the crystal lattice. Electrons occupy interstitial sites by diffusing into the interstitial sites.
In above both cases, the nonstoichiometric formula of ZnO is Zn1 + x O1.0

Question 70.
Explain defects due to anion vacancies.
OR
Explain colour of crystals or F centres.
Answer:

  • The defect due to anion vacancies imparts colour to the colourless crystal.
  • When a colourless crystal of NaCl is heated in the atmosphere of sodium vapour, the sodium atoms are deposited on the crystal surface.
  • Due to diffusion of Cl ions to the crystal surface vacancies are created at their regular sites.
  • These diffused Cl ions combine with Na atoms on the surface forming NaCl along with releasing electrons from sodium atoms. Na + Cl → NaCl + e

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 47
The released electrons diffuse into the crystal and occupy vacant sites of anions Cl in the crystal.
The anion vacant sites occupied by electrons are called F-centres or colour centres. Due to colour centres NaCl shows yellow colour.
Now NaCl crystal has excess of Na atoms having nonstoichiometric formula Na1+x Cl1.0.

Question 71.
How are solids classified according to electrical conductivity?
Answer:
According to electrical conductivity, solids are classified as follows :
(1) Conductors :

  • The solids having electrical conductivity in the range of 104 to 107 Ohm-1m-1 are called conductors.
  • The examples of conductors are metals and electrolytes.
  • Electrical conductivity in metals is due to free movement of electrons while electrolytes conduct electricity due to migration ions.

(2) Insulators :

  • Solids having very low electrical conductivity in the range of 10-20 to 10-10 Ohm-1 m-1 are called insulators.
  • The examples of insulators are nonmetals and molecular solids.

(3) Semiconductors :

  • Solids having conductivity in the range of 10-6 to 104 Ohm-1m-1 are semiconductors.
  • The conductivity range is intermediate between conductors and insulators.
  • The examples of semiconductors are silicon and germanium.

Question 72.
Explain band theory.
OR
Explain the origin of electrical properties in solids.
Answer:
(1) Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. This is explained on the basis of band theory which involves the presence of free electrons.

(2) According to band theory, the atomic orbitals of metal atoms overlap to form molecular orbitals which are spread all over the crystal structure.

(3) The energy difference between adjacent molecular orbitals decreases as the number of molecular orbitals increases and when it becomes very less, the orbitals merge into one another forming continuous bands which extent over the entire crystal.

(4) There are two types of bands of molecular orbitals as follows :

  • Valence band : The atomic orbitals with filled electrons from the inner shells form valence bands, where there are no free mobile electrons since they are involved in bonding.
  • Conduction band : Atomic orbitals which are partially filled or empty on overlapping form closely placed molecular orbitals giving conduction bands where electrons are delocalised and can conduct, heat and electricity.

(5) Band gap :

  • The energy difference between valence band and conduction band is called band gap.
  • Band gap decides whether electrons from valence band can be promoted to vacant conduction band or not.
  • The conductors like metals have very small or no band gap and electron can be promoted by thermal energy. The nonconductors have large band gap. The insulators have very large band gap.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 48

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 73.
Metals are good conductors of electricity. Explain.
Answer:
(1) Metals are good conductors of electricity since the outermost electrons of atoms in metallic crystal occupy conduction bands.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 49
(2) The number of electrons in conduction bands is very large.
(3) The conduction bands in metals can be labelled as ‘s’ band, overlapping s and p bands etc. according to overlapping of orbitals.
(4) This results in delocalisation of outermost electrons forming metal ions. Hence, this is analogous to metal cations immersed in the sea of electrons.

Question 74.
Why does metallic conductivity decrease by increasing temperature?
Answer:

  1. In metals a large number of outermost electrons of atoms occupy conduction bands.
  2. Band formation in metals results in delocalisation of outermost electrons forming metal ions or cations.
  3. The metallic cations occupying crystal lattice sites vibrate about mean positions.
  4. As temperature increases the vibrational motion increases which interrupts flow of electrons decreasing electrical conductivity.

Question 75.
Explain insulators.
Answer:
(1) In insulators the valence band is completely filled by electronics while conduction band is empty.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 50
(2) The energy gap between valence band and conduction band in insulator is very large.
(3) Thermal energy is not sufficient to promote electrons from valence band to conduction band.
(4) Therefore, the conduction band in insulator remains vacant and does not allow the conduction of electricity.

Question 76.
What are semiconductors ? Mention the types of semiconductors.
Answer:
(1) Semiconductors : The substances like silicon, germanium which have poor electrical conductance at low temperature but the conductance increases with the increase in temperature are called semiconductors.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 51
(2) Their conductivity lies between metallic conductors and insulators.
(3) The energy difference between valence band and conduction band is relatively small, hence the electrons from valence band can be excited to conduction band by heating.

(4) Types of semiconductors : There are two types of semiconductors :
(a) Intrinsic semiconductor
(b) Extrinsic semiconductor

(a) Intrinsic semiconductor :

  • A pure semiconductor material like pure Si, Ge which have a very low but finite electrical conductivity is called intrinsic semiconductor.
  • The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases with the increase in temperature.

(b) Extrinsic semiconductor :

  • Semiconductor doped with different element is called extrinsic semiconductor.
  • By doping with elements like Ga or P, the electrical conductivity is increased.

Question 77.
Explain extrinsic semiconductor and doping.
Answer:
(1) A semiconductor obtained by doping intrinsic semiconductor with elements of third group and fifth group is called extrinsic semiconductor.
(2) This extrinsic semiconductor has higher electrical conductivity than pure intrinsic semiconductor.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 52

(3) There ate two types of extrinsic semiconductors:
(A) n-type semiconductors:
(i) n-type semiconductor contains increased number of electrons in the conduction band.
(ii) When Si semiconductor is doped with 15th group element phosphorus, P, the new atoms occupy some vacant sites in the lattice in place of Si atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 53
(iii) P has five valence electrons, out of which four are involved in covalent bonding with neigh-bouring Si atoms while one electrons remains free and delocalised.
(iv) These free electrons increase the electrical conductivity of the semiconductor.
(v) The semiconductors with extra non-bonding free electrons are called n-type semiconductors.

(B) p-type semiconductor :
(i) p-type semiconductor is obtained by doping a pure semiconductor by an element of 13th group like B.
(ii) 13th group element has less number of valence electrons. When pure Si is doped with B atoms, these atoms occupy Si lattice points.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 54
(iii) Boron (5B) has only 3 valence electrons which form covalent bonds with the neighbouring Si atoms, while one bond has shortage of one electron.
(iv) This creates a vacancy or a hole, hence the electron from neighbouring Si atom jumps into this hole creating a vacancy in itself. This process continues, i.e., positive holes move in one direction while electrons moves in opposite direction.
(v) Due to electron deficient positions, this semiconductor is called p-type semiconductor.
(vi) When p-type semiconductor is connected to the external source of electricity, electrons from neighbouring silicon atoms jump into the holes so that electrons move towards positive electrode and holes migrate towards negative electrode.
(vii) Hence electrical conduction in p-type semiconductor is due to electrons and holes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 78.
What are the uses of semiconductors ?
Answer:
The uses of semiconductors are as follows :

  1. They are used in transistors, digital computers and cameras.
  2. They are used in solar cells and television sets.
  3. By combining n-type and p-type semiconductors, n-p junctions are formed which are effectively used in rectifiers or to convert light energy into electrical energy.

Question 79.
Classify the following semiconductors into n or p-type.
(i) B doped with Si
(ii) As doped with Si
(iii) P doped with Si
(vi) Ge doped with In.
Answer:

Semiconductor Type
(i) B doped with Si p-type
(ii) As doped with Si n-type
(iii) P doped with Si n-type
(iv) Ge doped with In p-type

Question 80.
Explain the origin of magnetic properties in solids.
Answer:
(1) The magnetic properties of a substance arise due to the presence of electrons in their atoms or molecules.

(2) The electrons while revolving around the nucleus in various orbits, also spin around their own axes. Both these motions of electrons result in generating magnetic field and magnetic moments. Hence electron be haves as a tiny magnet.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 55

(3) An atomic orbital can accommodate maximum two electrons with opposite spins, clockwise and anticlockwise. The degenerate orbitals like p, d and f orbitals can accommodate electrons with same spins until they are half filled.

(4) When a substance contains one or more unpaired electrons spinning in same direction, then their magnetic moments and magnetic properties add and the substance is said to be paramagnetic.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 56
If a substance contains all electrons paired then their spins are balanced and magnetic moments and magnetic properties are cancelled and the substance is said to be diamagnetic.

Question 81.
Explain diamagnetism.
Answer:
(1) The magnetic properties of a substance arise due to presence of the electrons.

(2) An electron while revolving around the nucleus, also spins around its own axis and generates a magnetic moment and a magnetic property.

(3) If an atom or a molecule of the substance contains all electrons paired, spinning clockwise and anticlockwise, their magnetic moments and magnetic properties get cancelled. Hence they oppose and repel the applied magnetic field. This phenomenon is called diamagnetism and the substance is said to be diamagnetic.Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State 57
For example : Zn, Cd, H2O, NaCl, etc.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 82.
Select and write the most appropriate answer from the given alternatives for each subquestion :

1. A substance which on cutting will give irregular cleavage is
(a) glass
(b) KBr
(c) ZnS
(d) NaCl
Answer:
(a) glass

2. A solid which has definite heat of fusion is
(a) plastic
(b) CaCl2
(c) glass
(d) soda lime glass
Answer:
(b) CaCl2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

3. In solids the constituent particles may be
(a) atoms
(b) ions
(c) molecules
(d) any one of the above three
Answer:
(d) any one of the above three

4. A single substance that exists in two or more forms is called
(a) polymorphous
(b) amorphous
(c) isomorphous
(d) monomorphous
Answer:
(a) polymorphous

5. Graphite is a
(a) metallic crystal
(b) covalent crystal
(c) ionic crystal
(d) molecular crystal
Answer:
(b) covalent crystal

6. Anisotropy is observed in
(a) Pyrex glass
(b) plastic
(c) K2SO4
(d) fullerene
Answer:
(c) K2SO4

7. The number of crystal systems (or types) is
(a) 4
(b) 7
(c) 8
(d) 12
Answer:
(b) 7

8. The number of Bravais lattices are
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 12
(d) 14
Answer:
(d) 14

9. Face centred cubic crystal is
(a) Cubic lattice of Bravais system
(b) Bravais lattice of HCP
(c) Bravais lattice of cubic system
(d) Cubic lattice with 5 atoms
Answer:
(c) Bravais lattice of cubic system

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

10. The number of tetrahedral sites per sphere in ccp structure is,
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

11. The packing fraction for a body centred cubic structure is
(a) 0.42
(b) 0.53
(c) 0.68
(d) 0.82
Answer:
(c) 0.68

12. If r is the radius of an atom and a is an edge length of fcc unit cell, then
(a) r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)
(b) r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)
(c) r = \(\frac{a}{2}\)
(d) r = \(2 \sqrt{2} a\)
Answer:
(b) r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

13. The ratio of packing efficiency in see, bcc and fee crystalline structures is
(a) 1 : 1.2 : 1.3
(b) 1 : 1.12 : 1.23
(c) 1 : 1.3 : 1.4
(d) 1 : 1.25 : 1.38
Answer:
(c) 1 : 1.3 : 1.4

14. The correct sequence of the atomic layers in cubic close packing is
(a) ABABA
(b) ABACABAC
(c) ABCABC
(d) AABBAABB
Answer:
(c) ABCABC

15. The major binding force in diamond is
(a) Covalent bond
(b) Ionic bond
(c) Metallic bond
(d) Coordinate covalent bond
Answer:
(a) Covalent bond

16. The ratio of close packed atoms to octahedral holes in cubic packing is
(a) 1 : 1
(b) 1 : 2
(c) 2 : 1
(d) 1 : 3
Answer:
(a) 1 : 1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

17. A defect present in AgCl is
(a) Frenkel defect
(b) Schottky defect
(c) point defect
(d) interstitial impurity defect
Answer:
(a) Frenkel defect

18. An ionic solid crystallises in bcc structure. If the ionic radii of cation and anion are 0.84 Å and 1.07 Å, the length of the body diagonal is
(a) 1.91 Å
(b) 2.75 Å
(c) 3.82 Å
(d) 2.32 Å
Answer:
(c) 3.82 Å

19. The type of defect in NaCl crystal will be
(a) point defect
(b) interstitial defect
(c) vacancy defect
(d) impurity defect
Answer:
(c) vacancy defect

20. Schottky defects are observed in which solid among the following ?
(a) Brass
(b) Cesium chloride
(c) Zinc sulphide
(d) Stainless steel
Answer:
(b) Cesium chloride

21. An ionic compound crystallises in FCC type structure with ‘A’ ions at the centre of each face and ‘B’ ions occupying comers of the cube. The formula of compound is
(a) AB4
(b) A3B
(c) AB
(d) AB3
Answer:
(b) A3B

22. Total number of different primitive unit cells are
(a) 6
(b) 7
(c) 12
(d) 14.
Answer:
(d) 14

23. The volume of atoms present in body centred cubic unit cell of a metal of atomic radius r is,
(a) \(\frac{16}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(b) \(\frac{8}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(c) \(\frac{12}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
(d) \(\frac{24}{3} \pi r^{3}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{8}{3} \pi r^{3}\)

24. The substances which can be permanently magnetised are
(a) diamagnetic
(b) paramagnetic
(c) ferromagnetic
(d) non-magnetic
Answer:
(c) ferromagnetic

25. CrO2 is
(a) diamagnetic
(b) paramagnetic
(c) metalic
(d) ferromagnetic
Answer:
(d) ferromagnetic

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

26. A metallic element crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If the radius of metal ion is 0.92 Å, the edge length of the unit cell of the crystal is
(a) 0.8464 Å
(b) 1.252 Å
(c) 5.187 Å
(d) 2.6 Å
Answer:
(d) 2.6 Å

27. The volume of unit cell of a metallic crystal of bcc type is 8.4 × 10-23 cm3. The volume occupied by 10 atoms in the crystalline structure is
(a) 4.2 × 10-22 cm3
(b) 3.12 × 10-23 cm3
(c) 1.74 × 10-23 cm3
(d) 2.856 × 10-22 cm3
Answer:
(d) 2.856 × 10-22 cm3

28. Copper crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If the unit cell length is 360 pm, the radius of copper atom is
(a) 180 pm
(b) 156 pm
(c) 127 pm
(d) 110 pm
Answer:
(c) 127 pm

29. If all the lattice points in ccp structure namely comers, face and edge centres and body centre are occupied by atoms then the total number of atoms in the unit cell will be
(a) 8
(b) 12
(c) 14
(d) 16
Answer:
(a) 8

30. Gold crystallises in face centred cubic structure. If atomic mass of gold is 197 g mol-1, the mass of the unit cell of gold will be
(a) 3.25 × 10-23 kg
(b) 6.5 × 10-23 kg
(c) 3.9 × 10-24 kg
(d) 1.3 × 10-24 kg
Answer:
(d) 1.3 × 10-24 kg

31. The mass of a unit cell of a body centred cubic crystal of a metal is 72.2 × 10-23 g. The atomic mass of the metal is
(a) 128.6 gmol-1
(b) 108.7 gmol-1
(c) 217.3 gmol-1
(d) 57.86 gmol-1
Answer:
(c) 217.3 gmol-1

32. An element crystallises in fee structure. If the atomic mass of the element is 72.7 U, the mass of one unit cell of it will be
(a) 2.9 × 10-24 g
(b) 4.83 × 10-25 kg
(c) 1.2 × 10-22 g
(d) 2.41 × 10-24 kg
Answer:
(b) 4.83 × 10-25 kg

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

33. Edge length of a cubic unit cell is 354 pm. The distance between two atoms diagonally opposite on the face is
(a) 500 pm
(b) 354 pm
(c) 708 pm
(d) 627 pm
Answer:
(a) 500 pm

34. The unit cell has an edge length 403 pm. The distance between two atoms placed opposite ends of body diagonal will be
(a) 806 pm
(b) 201.5 pm
(c) 698 pm
(d) 578 pm
Answer:
(c) 698 pm

35. An element having atomic mass 115 u, crystallises in bcc structure. The number of unit cells in 1 g of the element will be
(a) 2.6 × 1021
(b) 3.8 × 1023
(c) 8.7 × 10-3
(d) 6.17 × 1020
Answer:
(a) 2.6 × 1021

36. The edge length of a bcc unit cell of a metallic crystal is 2.9 Å. Hence the diameter of an atom is
(a) 1.025 Å
(b) 2.512 Å
(c) 1.45 Å
(d) 1.31 Å
Answer:
(b) 2.512 Å

37. An element crystallises in fee structure. If the atomic radius is 130 pm, the edge length of unit cell is
(a) 332.5 pm
(b) 410 pm
(c) 390 pm
(d) 367.6 pm
Answer:
(d) 367.6 pm

38. The arrangement of layers in hexagonal close packing is
(a) ABCABC
(b) ABAB
(c) ABBABBA
(d) ABBCABBC
Answer:
(b) ABAB

39. For square close packing, the planar arrangement is
(a) AAAA
(b) ABAB
(c) ABCABC
(d) AABBAA
Answer:
(a) AAAA

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 1 Solid State

40. Semiconductors are manufactured by addition of impurities of
(a) p-block elements
(b) actinoids
(c) Lanthanoids
(d) s-block elements
Answer:
(a) p-block elements

41. p-type semiconductor is formed when trace amount of impurity is added to silicon. The number of valence electrons in the impurity atom must be
(a) 3
(b) 5
(c) 1
(d) 2
Answer:
(a) 3

42. n-type semiconductor is formed when trace amount of impurity is added to silicon. The number of valence electrons in the impurity atom must be
(a) 3
(b) 5
(c) 1
(d) 2
Answer:
(b) 5